Home

1 - Sony

1. s I amp Page Num id ui le Il J4els lle Iz lls n n Jj I lt Insert Home Up Lock Tab Q IW IE WR T Y IU O P Enter Page 7 8 9 ll a feet Ena bown Homel Poup Caps Lock A IS JP JF G IA J 1K IL 4 51 gt ILL di gt Shift Z X IC IV IB JN M I lt I gt 12 Shift 1 2 3 A End 9 jJ PgDn Cui At Alt Gr Ctrl 0 ae H gt Ins Del English United States Q I amp _ I Page Num i JH dl ja la lis He Iz ls K R a eE Insert Home Up Lock Tab Q W IIE R T Y U l O P Page 7 8 9 gt pele Erid Down Home 4 j PgUp Caps Lock A S P JF G JA IJ IK WE I Wl Il Ente
2. t Je E E Je he hi l fo EE e 1 jeden mx L JL Tb iQ lw E IR IT Jv U Wo iP 16 C H Enter pae Ena Pese 7 18 9 gt I e I 4 eee EMG Down Homel 4 PgUp Caps Lock S D IF e H IJ IK WL Ie oe os 4 s Ife Qj gt sit gt Iz x Ic iv IB JIN IM I I I shit 4 1 l2 Is x E 2 End PgDn Erl t Ctrl Alt Alt Gr Ctrl 0 ly gt Ins Del Polish Programmers Poland HEERE EE je h EE d pepe TI E Tb la Iw JE R T IY Ju ln Wo IP RK Jp Page 7 8 9 rete Jw pE Je p fe Jr fe JF Jt RU peleia ase Ru uA S D F e YR o YK pt IE T Dee 4 5 lle L gt Shift Z X lfc Iv JB JIN JIM lt I gt I Shit 4 1 2 s f End v PgDn TR Ctrl Alt Al Ctr 0 l 4 i gt Ins Del Ru
3. Q I e Je I Page Num jii Jie Il I4 lis le jv Ils E o l l I lt imsert Home jup Lock Tab i e HH iE Ex Rm T Y l I1 JoslPalct Deletel eng Pase 7 18 9 gt X q A it J E H Att Down Homel 4 PgUp 4 Caps Lock A D F G H J K L E i Enter 4 5 6 ojl eft off all sj t 4 F E lt gt Shift Z X c lv IB IN JIM l I JI shitt 4 1 2 3 o al el xi all Til Tl i Lt End PgDn T Ctrl Alt SHE et ei alt Ctrl l gt 0 Ins Del When the area of use is set to J Notes The keyboard is fixed as the Japanese keyboard The keyboard konnte Gammon bechanged e It is not possible to enter Japanese hiragana katakana and kanji BIS 5 9 zj amp sa l Back Page Num aie Zei ale al ali sle 3e slz Sla sle lo S1 al alx space Insert Home lup Lock Tab M Ew Enter Page 7 8 9 gt i ud Wy al e Et e ele L 3 Delete End Down Homel 4 PgUp Caps Lock A E Ip e J K lut Jf ID a 4 5 I6 EB t a l o olini wile gt Shift T K N M A VS I II Shit 4 1 3 a 2 Zalh al O Ew
4. Item number Item name Settings 965 IMAGE ENHANCER INPUT UP Set up the operation of the up converter image enhancer for SD input CONVERTER separately from the settings for playback menu items 950 to 959 Sub Item 1 ENH SETTING 9 pb While SD signals are input make the behavior of the image enhancer of the up converter follow the settings for playback menu items 950 to 959 Settings for sub items 2 to 11 under menu item 965 become invalid input While SD signals are input make the behavior of the image enhancer of the up converter follow the settings for sub items 2 to 11 under menu item 965 separate settings during input of SD signals from those during playback 2 CONVERT Select the up converter mode CROP Select the edge crop mode L BOX Select the letter box mode SQUEZ Select the squeeze mode 3 H CROP P When sub item UP CONVERTER MODE of menu item 965 is set to crop adjust the H crop horizontal crop position for up converter output in edge crop mode 120 to 0 to 120 4 LBOXP When sub item UP CONVERTER MODE of menu item 965 is set to l box adjust the vertical location of the position where the picture is cut out for up converter output in letter box mode 120 to 0 to 120 5 CNV PROC Select the source picture to use in converting SD to HD FIELD Use field pictures ADAPT Frame or field is selected automatically 6 DETAIL Adjust the up converter ima
5. The status indicated beside each item lights in yellow during processing for that item and lights in green when the processing finishes If an error occurs The status indicator changes to red Correct the condition that caused the error and repeat the operation If you cannot connect Check the following points Make sure that this unit and the remote host are correctly connected to the network f the remote host is an XDCAM device make sure that it is not displaying a GUI screen f the remote host is an XDCAM device make sure that a disc is inserted When the connection is complete the indicators of all items have turned green the Upload Clips via Direct FTP screen appears To check the connection on the remote host side Ifthe remote hostis an XDCAM device check that the NETWORK has appeared in the display or other status display location Upload Clips via Direct FTP Upload to PDW HD1500 SN3009 Current Clip Clip 0 2 93 5MB Original C0001 Copy C0008 30 Total Clips Remain Time 16m 39s 16 i fes Immediatel After this clip The progress bars show the progress of the transfer If multiple clips are being transferred a count of the clips that have been successfully transferred appears If the remote host is an XDCAM device the disc usage also appears It does not appear if the remote host is a computer If a file of the same name already exists at the transfer
6. VAR STILL A still picture in variable mode VAR Speed Variable speed mode TOP 0001 xxxx Cuing up to the first frame of the first clip END xxxx xxxx Cuing up to the last frame of the last clip PREROLL Cuing up during thumbnail search a p Display Operation mode Block A Block B DISC OUT Disc is not loaded LOADING Disc is being loaded UNLOADING Disc is being unloaded STANDBY OFF Standby off mode Superimposed Text Information a Display when the unit is in Clip Continuous Rec mode Q Playback condition mark Disc exchange cache mark One of three channel condition marks is displayed when the ACCESS indicator is lit during any mode except recording The indication C appears here when the disc exchange cache function is operating Display Name Description Green There is no problem with the condition playback condition This unit and the disc can be used just as they are This corresponds to the green channel condition indicator of a VTR Yellow The playback condition has condition deteriorated to some degree There are no read errors but you should take the action described in the next section This corresponds to the yellow channel condition indicator of a VTR Display Name Description Red condition The playback condition has deteriorated
7. a Same as when V INPUT on page P1 VIDEO of the function menu is set to SG b FAM and FTP connections always synchronize to the internal synchronization reference signal regardless of the setting of OUT REF Synchronization reference signals when you are recording playing or editing 720P signals When you are recording playing or editing 720P signals set OUT REF on page P6 REF of the function menu item to REF and synchronize the internal reference signal generator of this unit to a reference signal input to the REF VIDEO INPUT connector The following reference signals may be used 720 59 94P system 1080 59 94i tri level sync signal 525 black burst signal 720 50P system 1080 50 tri level sync signal 625 black burst signal When you connect this unit directly to the video I O connectors of the PDW F1600 HD1500 F800 700 you can record and dub 720P signals even if you set OUT REF on page P6 REF of the function menu item to INPUT Synchronization Reference Signals Setting System Frequency This unit can record and play back video at the system frequencies of 59 94i 50i 29 97P 25P and 23 98P P 1080 or 59 94P and 50P 720 HD1500 When the PDBK F1500 option is installed Selecting the system frequency 1 Set setup menu item 013 SYSTEM FREQUENCY SELECT MENU to on and press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The system frequency selection screen appears RETU
8. b When the PDBK 201 option board is installed c FTP connections can be made only when the device connected to the REMOTE 9P connector D sub 9 pin is in stop mode During FTP be used to control this unit Menu items in the 300s relating to editing operations Item number Item name Settings 301 VAR SPEED RANGE FOR Select the playback speed range when carrying out playback in variable SYNCHRONIZATION speed mode from a remote control unit connected to the REMOTE 9P connector 2 2 2 to 2 times normal speed wide 2 20 to 2 20 times normal speed 311 F1600 Select methods for setting the edit presets of the digital audio channels ANALOG AUDIO EDIT PRESET CH1 to CH4 of this unit Make these settings when using an editor PVE REPLACE FOR CH1 500 BVE 600 etc or remote control unit without a function to control digital audio edit presets 312 IG AUDIO EDIT PRESET The edit presets of the digital audio channels of this unit are turned on REPLACE FOR CH2 and off according to the specified analog audio presets of the editor or remote control unit 313 F1600 nodef no definition No definition ANALOG AUDIO EDIT PRESET ch 1 analog ch1 Follow the edit preset of analog channel 1 REPLACE FOR CH3 ch 2 analog ch2 Follow the edit preset of analog channel 2 314 F1600 chi 9 analog ch1 ch2 Follow the edit preset of analog channel 1 or ne a PRESET The default settings for each item are as follows
9. 4 Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To sort clip lists See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu 2 Select Settings and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob 3 Select Sort Clip List by and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob 4 Select one of the following sort methods and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Name A Z Sort in ascending order by clip list name Date Newest First Sort by date and time of clip list creation newest first Clip lists will be displayed in the specified order the next time that you carry out an operation such as loading a clip list Disc Operations Checking disc properties See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Disc Properties and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Disc Properties screen appears Disc Properties User Disc ID 12345 Title1 One of the memories of sum Title2 none Total DUR 01 23 45 00 Remain 031min Rewrite 1234times Horizontal Scroll gt User Disc ID User disc ID Titlel Titlel Title2 Title2 Total DUR Total recording time Remain Remaining recording time Rewrite Number of times rewritten 1 When the unit s area of use UC J MODEL SELECT see page 30 is set to UC titles can be displayed in European languages 2 You can use plann
10. During recording and editing operations Alarm message in time Alarm message in video monitor screen Description action data display area Input Sig 9 VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL DOES NOT This appears when the signal that does not MATCH SYSTEM SETUP correspond to the system frequency or the number of lines set in this unit is being input or when HDSDI or i LINK TS is selected as a video input signal while setting the SD signal recording Input a signal that matches the system frequency or change this unit s system frequency setting see page 39 ILL REC 9 ENCODING DOES NOT SYNCHRONIZE Check the signals being input to this unit WITH REF VIDEO ILL REF 9 INPUT VIDEO SIGNAL DOES NOT Input a reference signal synchronized with this unit s SYNCHRONIZE WITH REF VIDEO System frequency SIGNAL USE COMMON REFERENCE SIGNAL OR CONNECT RECORDER REF OUT TO PLAYER REF IN MEM Full 9 MEMORY FULL Check the disc being recorded by this unit Verify ERR DISC ERROR DETECTED This appears when an error is found in the signal recorded on the disc while performing the recording verification function Change the disc Recording NOW RECORDING Wait for recording to finish Cache Full CACHE FULL This appears when the memory becomes full while DATA IS BEING OVERWRITTEN performing the disc exchange cache function Change the disc immediately Clip End EDITING ACROSS MULTIPLE CLI
11. When you press the DISPLAY button the display window changes to the video monitor display amp Audio level meters LEVEL MT on page P2 AUDIO of the function menu decides whether the meter is to be displayed and on which side left or right it is displayed in the display window Superimposed information Appears when CHAR SEL on the HOME page of the function menu is set to ON or LCD Recording mode indication This appears when setup menu item 150 REC MODE is set to disc exchange cache or clip continuous rec see page 130 See page 52 for more information about the disc exchange cache function See page 53 for more information about the Clip Continuous Rec function D Low battery warning Appears and flashes during operation with a battery pack when the battery power is almost exhausted B Converter display Displays the current down or up converter mode depending on the state of the unit The current down converter DC mode appears when HD video is being input and when an HD disc is being played The current up converter UC mode appears when SD video is being input and when an SD disc is being played The current modes are those selected with setup menu items 930 DOWN CONVERTER MODE DC and 950 UP CONVERTER MODE P 1 When the PDBK S1500 option is installed DC EC Down converter edge crop mode DC LB Down converter letter box mode DC SQ Down converter squeeze mode UC EC Up converter edge crop
12. If this unit is directly connected to a computer running Windows Vista with a network cable change the setting as follows 1 Open Network and Sharing Center gt Manage network connections 2 Local Area Connection in the control panel 2 In the Local Area Connection Properties uncheck the Internet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 and then click the OK button 3 Set the remote control switch to NET see page 16 Making FTP connections FTP connections between this unit and a remote computer can be made with either of the following The command prompt FTP client software This section explains how to use the command prompt For more information about using FTP client software refer to the documentation of the FTP client software on your system FTP File Operations suoneledo e 9 1e1deuj 113 suonejedo aji4 9 1e1deu 114 An FTP client that supports UTF 8 is required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII characters Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF 8 To log in If this unit is connected to a remote computer with a FAM connection first exit file operations on the FAM connection see page 111 1 Load a disc into this unit and put the unit into the following state Recording playback search and other disc operations see page 50 Stopped THUMBNAIL button see page 18 Off Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips Format Disc and so on in the Disc
13. Title2 R troprpjecteurs BRAVIA AV Format 1080SP 4ch Frame Rate PB 59 94P Capture 23 98P TC DUR 00 23 00 25 0 00 09 22 Created 30 NOV 2005 13 35 00 00 Modified 20 MAY 2006 15 02 00 00 Rec Device PDW 700 SN 10001 Horizontal Scroll B Clip No Clip number total number of clips Name Clip name 2 Titlel Title1 Title2 Title2 AV Format Recording format Frame Rate The frame rate from the time when the clip was shot For clips shot using Slow amp Quick Motion PB Capture where PB is the playback frame rate and Capture is the shooting frame rate TC DUR Timecode of the first frame Recording time Created Date and time of creation Modified Date and time of most recent modification Rec Device Name of device that created clip product number 1 When the unit s area of use UC J MODEL SELECT see page 30 is set to UC titles can be displayed in European languages To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a lt or gt mark is displayed for an item you can press the IN or OUT button to scroll the display by one character for each press The MARK1 and V MARK2 buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view SU9BINS MD ul suonejedo g Ja deyo To display the properties of the previous or the next clip Press the PREV button or the NEXT button To return to the clip thumbnail screen Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To edit clip information You can edit the name
14. To record with the Live Logging function enabled Connect this unit and a computer to a network see page 150 and then set setup menu item 258 LIVE LOGGING MODE to one of the following live mode Live mode live view mode Live View mode In Live View mode the run mode is always Free Run regardless of the setting of RUN MODE on page P5 TC of the function menu It is not possible to preset the timecode to be recorded The Disc Exchange Cache function and Clip Continuous Rec function cannot be enabled in Live View mode FAM or FTP connections cannot be established during a Live View mode connection Live view mode connections cannot be established during a FAM or FTP connection Recording Handling of discs when recording does not end normally salvage functions Recording processing does not end normally if for example the POWER switch on the rear panel is turned off during recording or if the power cord is disconnected during recording Because the file system is not updated video and audio data recorded in real time is not recognized as files and clip contents recorded up to that point are lost However this unit has salvage functions which can hold losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such discs There is a quick salvage function which executes automatically and a full salvage function which you can execute as required Quick salvage Clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data stored in no
15. Front Panel Q Format conversion This displays the status of 1080 720 format conversion Format conversion is not being performed Format conversion is being performed See page 61 for more information about 1080 720 cross convert function Reference signal This displays the type of reference signal to which this unit is synchronizing When there is no display the unit is synchronizing to the internal reference signal INPUT Input video HD REF HD format reference signal SD REF SD format reference signal The HD REF or SD REF display flashes when the video input signal is not synchronized to the reference signal and when the signals are synchronized but their phases do not match D Video input display This displays the currently selected video input signal HDSDI HDSDI video input SDSDI SDSDI video input i LINK i LINK TS HDV input P SG Test video signal from the internal signal generator 1 When the PDBK 201 option board is installed The display blinks when there is no video input signal and when the video input signal does not match the system frequency of this unit The video signal input is selected with V INPUT on page P1 VIDEO of the function menu see page 45 Video monitor display amp Audio level meters JOG STILL B Superimposed information Recording mode indication Low battery warning E Converter display
16. PDW 700 To SDI OUT 1 connector To SD HDSDI INPUT connector 75Q coaxial cable not supplied PDW 700 camcorder setting HDSDI REMOTE I F on page CAM CONFIG 1 of Settings on this unit Remote control switch REMOTE see page 16 the MAINTENANCE menu other than OFF Setup menu item 214 REMOTE INTERFACE SDI Connections and Settings suoneiedejgd e Jaydeyup 37 suonejedejg e jejdeuj 38 Synchronization Reference Signals The synchronization reference signal generator of this unit synchronizes to a reference signal input to the REF VIDEO INPUT connector or to a video input signal External synchronization is as follows depending on the setting of OUT REF on page P6 REF of the function menu and on the type of the selected input signal Video output signals are always synchronized to the internal synchronization signal Input to SD HDSDI Input to REF VIDEO Setting of OUT REF on page P6 REF P INPUT connector 9 INPUT connector REF INPUT Yes Yes Synchronize to the signal input to Synchronize to the signal input to the REF VIDEO INPUT connector the SD HDSDI INPUT connector Yes No Synchronize to the signal input to the SD HDSDI INPUT connector No Yes Synchronize to the signal input to the REF VIDEO INPUT connector No No No external synchronization is made
17. e to 12 dB by turning the PUSH SET S SEL knob P3 AUDIO page F3 A7 VOL Sets the volume of audio channel 7 9 The volume can be adjusted within the range from 200 to 200 e to 12 dB by turning the PUSH SET S SEL knob Item F1 A3 INPUT Setting Selects the audio input signal to assign to audio channel 3 SDI Audio signal embedded into SDI signal ANALOG 1 Analog 1 audio signal AES EBUS Signal input to the DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN 3 4 connectors F4 A8 VOL Sets the volume of audio channel 8 9 The volume can be adjusted within the range from 200 to 200 e to 12 dB by turning the PUSH SET S SEL knob F2 A4 INPUT Selects the audio input signal to assign to audio channel 4 SDI Audio signal embedded into SDI signal ANALOG2 Analog 2 audio signal AES EBU4 Signal input to the DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN 3 4 connectors F5 MIX SWAP P Specifies whether to perform audio mixing according to the settings of setup menu item 819 AUDIO INPUT ARRANGE OFF Do not perform audio mixing ON Perform audio mixing F6 AU METER Selects the display mode of the audio level meters FULL Display the range from 60 dB to 0 dB FINE Display a magnified section with 0 25 dB step marks F3 A5 INPUT Selects the audio input signal to assign to audio channel 5 SDI Audio signal embedded into SDI signal ANALOG 1 Analog 1 audio signal AE
18. 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu 2 Select Add Sub Clips and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Clip List Add screen appears Clip List Add 002 lt 017 035 m TC 00 30 40 13 TC 01 01 28 25 TC 00 09 43 14 W Ir ma TC 00 24 24 29 TC 00 24 34 27 TC 00 24 46 22 00 13 48 24 s ress TC 00 24 56 24 Scene Selection 3 Select the sub clips that you want to add from the upper part of the screen the part where 8 thumbnails are displayed multiple selections possible To select from expanded thumbnails Press the EXPAND button to display the expand thumbnail screen To select from chapter thumbnails Press the CHAPTER button to display the chapter thumbnail screen 4 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The thumbnail selection is confirmed and an I cursor appears at the bottom of the Clip List Add screen in the Scene Selection window The I cursor indicates Scene Selection Clip List Editing the location where the currently selected sub clips will be inserted To display the total duration after addition of the selected clips Press the SHIFT button 5 In the Scene Selection window move the I cursor to the location where you want to insert the clip The existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and right of the I cursor 6 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The sub clips are added at the I cursor position and you return to the clip list thumbnail screen You can check the results of th
19. 12dB EBUL EBUL can be selected only when the system frequency is 50i 50P 25P M371 DATA LEN Select the audio channel configuration for IMX recording 16bit x 8ch 16 bit 8 channel configuration 24bit x 4ch 24 bit 4 channel configuration M372 NON AUDIO Select whether to handle digital audio signals as non audio signals during INPUT recording n 1 Tr1 Tr2 2 Tr3 Tr4 3 Tr5 Tr6 4 Tr7 Tr8 M373 INPUT LEVEL Set the upper limit for the signal level input to audio channels 1 3 or 2 4 Sub Item 4dB OdB 3dB 6dB EBUL 1 CH1 CH3 2 CH2 CH4 EBUL can be selected only when the system frequency is 50i 50P 25P M377 OUTPUT LEVEL Set the reference level for audio output signals 4dB OdB 3dB 6dB EBUL EBUL can be selected only when the system frequency is 50i 50P 25P Maintenance Menu snue wN Z Je deuj 145 snus 4 Jajdeup 146 M3 OTHERS Other setting items Item Setting M38 F KEY For details refer to the Maintenance Manual CONFIG M380 HOME2 Assign a function menu item to page HOME2 of the function menu as a user setting M381 PAGE8 ASSIGN Assign a setup menu item to page P8 of the function menu as a user setting M382 PAGE8 NAME Specify the name of a setup menu item assigned with M381 PAGE8 ASSIGN M38F NV RAM Save the settings of M380 to M382 CONTROL M39 OTHER M390 MIXED REC Select whether to enab
20. 2 Select Planning Clip Name Suffix change the serial number added to clip names created by using planning metadata and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Planning Clip Name Suffix screen appears Planning Clip Name Suffix File Name PM_000_sample Title1 The typhoon No 10 hit Okinawa Title2 Les technologies BRAVIA123456 0001 Suffix Q Use the IN or gt OUT button to select a digit to change 4 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to change the digit 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required 6 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob OK is selected T Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To clear planning metadata See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Clear Planning Metadata and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A message appears asking if you are sure that you want to clear the plannning metadata 3 Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The planning metadata is cleared from this unit s memory To switch the title display in the display window When planning metadata is loaded into this unit you can select the format of the title to display in the display window See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Settings and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob 3 Select Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob See page 22 for more
21. In the above example a carriage return You can check user defined essence mark name strings in the User Defined Essence Marks screen see page 93 When you create a definition file enter each statement as asingle line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line and do not enter spaces except where specified except within essence mark name strings gt sp indicates a space and indicates Setting volume labels by using planning metadata If you read planning metadata that contains a volume label into the unit s memory the volume label is set in UserDiscID in DISCMETA XML when recording of the first clip finishes D 1 If recording of the first clip does not end normally the volume label is set in UserDiscID if you restore the clip by using the salvage function See page 152 for more information about how to load files Volume labels cannot be set in UserDiscID in the following cases When a clip has been written by a FAM or FTP connection Overview f another volume label name has already been set in UserDiscID in DISCMETA XML erase the user disc ID before starting How to specify volume labels Using a text editor enter an ASCII or UTF 8 format string up to 127 bytes in length in the shaded field in Example volume label specification The volume label is not set in UserDiscID if it is 128 bytes or longer Example volume label specification xml versionz 1 0 encoding
22. Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area Selects how to display in the video monitor screen the title contained in a planning metatdata file that is loaded into this unit ASCII Clip Name Display title in ASCII format Clip Name Display title in UTF 8 format Planning Clip Name Display Selects whether to display in the video monitor screen the title contained in a planning metatdata file that is loaded into this unit Disable Do not display titles Enable Display titles Setting Format Disc Selects whether to disable the Format Disc command Disable Disable the command Enable Enable the command Select Font Selects the language font used to display clip names clip list names and title2 clip titles Select USB Keyboard Language Selects a language of the USB keyboard used on the software keyboard Select Mouse Pointer Speed Selects the speed of the USB mouse pointer used on the software keyboard from the following values 5 Fast 4 3 Middle 2 1 Slow To display the Disc Menu To display the Disc Menu press the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button with the SHIFT button held down in one of the following screens Clip thumbnail screen Clip list thumbnail screen Clip playback screen Clip list playback screen Overview 71 SU9BINS ND ui suonejedo g JaydeyD SU99J9S IMD ui suonejedo s Je1deu 72 To return to the original screen press the RESET RETURN but
23. Timecode A digitally encoded signal which is recorded with video data to identify each frame of the video by hour minute second and frame number SMPTE timecode is applied to NTSC system and EBU timecode to PAL and SECAM systems UMID Unique Material Identifier A standard SMPTE 330M for video and audio metadata The Basic section of a UMID contains a globally unique number and a material number for the identification of recorded material An optional section called the Source Pack contains information such as the time and location of recording A UMID with the Basic section only is called a Basic UMID A UMID with the Source Pack is called an Extended UMID Glossary xipueddy 187 xipueddy 188 User bits A total of 32 bits are provided in the timecode which the user can use to record such information as date reel number or scene number on video tape or disc Also called user s bits VBID Video Blanking ID This is a video ID signal defined in the EIAJ CPR 1204 standard which is inserted into VBS video output to enable the aspect ratio to be detected The ID signal is inserted into line 20 VBI 283 Glossary Index A AC IN connector 27 ACCESS indicator 15 Accessories not supplied 171 supplied 171 Add Sub Clip screen 85 86 Alarms 158 Analog audio signal input output section 27 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT 1 2 connectors 27 OUTPUT 1 2 connectors 28 Ancillary data 174 Appen
24. UTF 8 2 PlanningMetadata xmlnsz http xmlns sony net pro metadata planningmetadata jassignId H00123 creationDate 2010 01 27T08 00 00Z lastUpdate 2010 01 27T15 00 00Z version 1 00 gt 4 Properties propertyId assignment class original update 2010 01 27T15 00 00Z modifiedByz Chris e3 Title usAscii Tennis Tournament xml lang en gt Tennis Tournament 27 01 2010 Title e Meta name MediaName content Australian Open 2010 oea Properties PlanningMetadata 4 In the above example indicates a space and e indicates a newline The specified volume name can be checked as the User Disc ID in the Disc Properties screen see page 91 If you create your own file take care to enter it as a single statement with newlines only at the newline positions and no spaces except at the indicated positions and in the volume label gt sp Appendix Important Notes on Operation Use and storage Do not subject the unit to severe shocks The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped Do not cover the unit while operating Doing so will cause temperatures to rise inside the unit possibly resulting in failure After use Turn off the on standby button If you plan not to use the unit for a long time turn off the POWER switch on the rear panel as well Shipping Remove the disc before transporting the unit f sending the unit by truck ship air or othe
25. Variable mode 63 VARIABLE switch 16 VIDEO CONTROL connector 26 Video input display 24 W Web Thumbnail function 94 Write protecting discs 49 Index xepu 191 The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation PDW F1600 ane Sony Corporation 3 282 299 08 1 http www sony net 2008
26. false version 1 00 gt 4 lt Properties propertyId assignment update 2008 01 20T09 00 00 09 00 modifiedBy Chris gt lt Title usAscii Typhoon xml lang en gt Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo lt Title gt 4 lt Properties gt 4 PlanningMetadata 4 In the above example a carriage return When creating a file write each line as a single statement inserting carriage returns only at the indicated carriage return locations and inserting no unspecified spaces If the UTF 8 format string exceeds 50 bytes the ASCII format string is used as the clip name string If no ASCII format name is specified the standard format clip name is used When an ASCII format name string exceeds 50 characters and when an UTF 8 format name string gt sp indicates a space and indicates exceeds 50 bytes the standard format clip name is used To set clip names 1 Loada planning metadata file containing clip names into the unit s memory see page 91 2 Carry out steps 2 to 5 of to set the To assign clip names on this unit page 108 3 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to display PLAN and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Each time that you start recording the unit automatically creates clip names using the names specified in the planning metadata file An underscore _ and a five digit serial number 00001 to 99999 is appended to each clip name Examples of automatically generated clip names Clip names di
27. 13 JUN2006 13 43 Display Select n 3 Select the desired clip list and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The name of the clip list selected here appears in the clip list thumbnail screen When you execute the Save Clip List command in the Disc Menu the clip list will be saved under that name To create a new clip list Select New File and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To clear clip lists The following procedure clears the current clip list from the unit s internal memory See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 mine clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu 2 Select Clear Clip List and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to clear the clip list 3 Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The current clip list returns to the unnamed state no name To delete clip lists The following procedure deletes a clip list from the disc See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 mine clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu 2 Select Delete Clip List and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Scene Selection Clip List Editing A list of clip lists appears Select the clip list that you want to delete and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion Delete Clip List E0001 Delete this Clip List OK
28. E DC power source v AC IN AC power source BVE 700 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT 5 EC NT PHONES SEREHE SDSDI COMPOSITE OUTPUT OUTPUT DIGITAL ANALOG SD video monitor HDSDI OUTPUT SEINS HD D video monitor AUDIO MONITOR Audio monitor i LINK S400 Laptop computer System Configurations Names and Functions of Parts Front Panel The names and symbols of buttons and knobs on the front panel are color coded according to function White Function when the button or knob is operated independently Chapter Orange Function when the button is operated with the SHIFT button held down Blue Function related to thumbnail operations On standby button and indicator Handle amp EJECT md Z5 Disc slot and EJECT p button ACCESS indicator Audio level adjustment section see page 16 Q Remote control switch KEY INHI switch PREV PLAY NEXT N Arrow buttons see page 16 es Shuttle jog variable control section see STOP REC page 17 Hea gt gt d PHONES jack TOP F REV U FFWD END OSTANDBY OREC INHI 2 SC MENU
29. IP address p1 most significant byte p2 least significant byte Port number Input example PORT 10 0 0 1 242 48 IP address 10 0 0 1 Port number 62000 PASV This command requests this unit to listen on a data port which is not its default data port It puts this unit into passive mode waiting for the remote computer to make a data connection Command syntax PASV lt CRLF gt TYPE Specifies the type of data to be transferred Command syntax TYPE lt SP gt lt type code options delimited by lt SP gt gt lt CRLF gt lt type code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM data is always transferred as T regardless of the type code specification A ASCII N Non print T Telnet format C ASA Carriage Control E EBCDIC N Non print T Telnet format C ASA Carriage Control IMAGE Binary default L LOCAL BYTE SIZE byte size Input example TYPE STRU Specifies the data structure Command syntax STRU SP lt structure code gt lt CRLF gt lt structure code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM the structure is always F regardless of the structure code specification F File structure default R Record structure P Page structure Input example STRU F MODE Specifies the transfer mode Command syntax MODE SP lt mode code gt lt CRLF gt lt mode code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM the
30. Local host this unit a The following software requirements must be satisfied An FTP server function must be available Service Version 7 0 or higher Download clip get Inthe case of Macintosh Mac OS X Version 10 5 6 or higher Upload clip put jf Laptop computer 9 Material server nthe case of Windows Microsoft Window IIS Internet Information Remote host Preparations for clip transfers Check the following points This unit must be connected over a network to the transfer target device XDCAM device or computer The transfer target device XDCAM device or computer must be supplied with stable power and the power must not be turned off during the transfer For battery powered devices the batteries must have sufficient remaining capacity Transferring Clips Direct FTP Function The settings under maintenance menu item M5 NETWORK must be set to values that allow network connections The remote control switch must be set to NET For XDCAM devices that support UPnP universal plug and play the UPnP function must be enabled the setting may vary To enable the UPnP function The UPnP universal plug and play function allows devices to be easily connected to networks The following XDCAM devices support UPnP PDW F1600 PDW HD1500 PDW HRI PDW F800 PDW 700 To enable the UPnP funct
31. No warning on Flash the STOP button as a warning 107 REC INHIBIT LAMP FLASHING Select whether to flash the REC INHI indicator when recording is prevented see REC INHI recording inhibit indicator page 20 off Light the REC INHI indicator on Flash the REC INHI indicator 108 AUTO EE SELECT When a disc is inserted and PB EE on the HOME page of the function menu is set to EE select the operation modes in which input video and audio signals are automatically handled in E E mode S F R stop f fwd f rev In stop fast forward fast reverse modes stop In stop mode 109 FORCED EE WHEN DISC UNLOAD During disc loading unloading and when no disc is inserted select whether to control the output signal PB EE setting on Do not control the signal is always an E E signal off Control 114 AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT LEVEL Select whether to control the level of the audio signal output from the AUDIO MONITOR R L connectors with the LEVEL knob for the PHONES jack var variable Control fixed Do not control Setup Menu Menu items in the 100s relating to the control panels Item number 118 Item name KEY INHIBIT SWITCH EFFECTIVE AREA Sub item Settings Select which buttons can be operated when the KEY INHI switch is set to ON The following sub items control different sets of buttons independently 1 FUNCTION KEY Select whether function buttons on
32. REC INH in HOME page of the function menu is set to ON Locked clips cannot be deleted If a deletion target clips is referenced by clip lists on the disc all of those clip lists are deleted as well If a deletion target clip is referenced in the current clip list only those referencing sub clips are deleted at the same time as the deletion target clip See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 2 In the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to delete Display the Thumbnail Menu Select Delete Clip A window appears asking you to confirm the deletion The window displays thumbnails of four frames from the target clip the first frame two intermediate frames and the last frame along with the name title1 date of creation and duration of the clip One of the following messages also appears depending on whether the clip is referenced in a clip list When the clip is not referenced in a clip list Delete Clip When the clip is referenced in a clip list Delete Clip amp Clip List All clip lists that reference the target clip are deleted along with the clip Delete Clip amp Clip List 022 036 INDEX MIDDLE1 MIDDLE2 gt gt gt n o TC 00 25 29 09 TC 00 25 30 00 TC 00 25 30 22 TC 00 25 31 13 Name C0023 Title SCENE 00126 Date 2005 DEC 01 14 55 OK Dur 0 00 02 05 l On Clip List Select OK and then press the PUSH S
33. SP lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Input example STOR Edit E0001E01 SMI RNFR RNTO Rename a file Specify the file to be renamed with the RNFR command and specify the new name with the RNTO command Always follow a RNFR command with a RNTO command For details see File operation restrictions page 104 FTP File Operations Command syntax RNFR lt SP gt lt path name before change gt lt CRLF gt RNTO lt SP gt lt path name after change gt lt CRLF gt Input example RNFR General info txt RNTO General clip_info txt DELE Deletes the specified file on this unit Depending on the directory and file type deletion may not be possible For details see File operation restrictions page 104 Command syntax DELE lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Input example DELE Clip C0099 MXF STAT Sends information about properties of the specified file or about data transfer status from this unit to the remote computer The following property information is sent depending on the file type MXF file File name File type CODEC type Frame rate Number of audio channels Duration UMID e non MXF file File name Command syntax STAT SP lt path name gt lt CRLF gt The following data is transferred depending on whether a file is specified with lt path name gt File specified The properties of the specified file No specification The size of the data transferred thu
34. See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Planning Metadata Properties and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Planning Metadata Properties screen appears Planning Metadata Properties LatestNews0034 Projections of world economi 21 FEB 2008 09 14 08 00 21 FEB 2008 09 14 08 00 Guillermo Arduino File Name Assign ID Created Modified Modified by Title1 Clip 00006 Title2 none Material Gp 008 File Name Planning metadata file name Assign ID Assign ID Created Date and time of creation Modified Date and time of most recent modification Modified by Name of person who modified the file Title1 Title 1 P Title2 Title 2 Material Gp Number of clips recorded with this planning metadata 1 This can be set as the clip name see page 152 Disc Operations To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a lt or gt mark is displayed for an item you can press the IN or OUT button to scroll the display by one character for each press The 4 MARK1 and V MARK2 buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view To return to the previous screen Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To change the serial numbers of clip names using planning metadata You can change the serial numbers that are added to clip names that use planning metadata See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu
35. The P part can be handled like a file with a user defined name b Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length and which can be written by XDCAM c Overwriting is not possible d Multiple files cannot be opened at the same time e Only when sub item NAMING FORM of setup menu item 036 is set to free Edit directory f Selection and deletion of any specified clip is possible Directories cannot be created in the Component directory File name Content E E01 SMI 9 Clip list file 0001 to 0099 Operations Read Partial read Yes Write Partial write Yes P Rename Yes 9 Create Yes 9 Delete Yes Overview suoneiedo e 9 1e1deu 105 suonejedo e 4 9 1e1deu 106 File name Content Operations Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete E MO1 XML 9 Metadata file generated automatically Yes Yes P No9 Not No9 when E E01 SMI file is created 0001 to 0099 Other files Files other than the above No No a The E part can be changed to a user defined name b Only files which can be written by XDCAM Partial writing is not possible c Only when sub item NAMING FORM of setup menu item 036 is set to free d Only files which can be written by XDCAM e When the E part of an E 01 SMI file name is changed an E MO1 XML file with the same name in the E part is
36. The Select Host Discovered via UPnP screen appears Some time may be required before the search for remote hosts finishes Select the name of a remote host from the list and press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A network settings screen appears see step 7 If you establish a connection with the selected remote host the network settings are saved in Remote Host 4 From the next time that you select Remote Host 4 UPnP the remote host that you select here will be connected To check the network settings of this unit Select Network Config and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The following network settings appear Item Setting Host Name Host name IP Address IP address 2 Subnet Mask Subnet mask DHCP Setting that specifies whether to acquire the IP address automatically from a DHCP server Enabled Acquire automatically Disabled Do not acquire automatically Method used to set IP address Manual Set Manually DHCP DHCP function AutolP Auto IP addressing function Undefined Nothing specified Address Status Default Gateway Default gateway a An IP address determined by a DHCP server appears instantly in this field Select OK and press the PUSH SET S SEL knob to return to the previous screen Select gt and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A network settings screen for the remote host appears Upload Clips via Direct FTP Select Host 1 Host Name Port
37. Thumbnail Menu ii Set Clip Flag Return to Upper Menu NG KP KEEP none Thumbnail Operations 81 SU9BINS MD ul suonejedo s Ja deyD SueeiJog IND ul suoneiado S 1e1deuo 82 4 select the clip flag that you want to set OK NG KP KEEP A clip flag icon see page 67 appears for clips that have clip flags set To clear clip flags Carry out steps 1 to 3 selecting a clip that has a flag set and then select none in step 4 You can also use CLIP FLG on page P7 OTHER of the function menu to set and clear clip flags see page 47 Locking write protecting clips In a clip thumbnail screen you can lock the selected clips so that they cannot be deleted or altered Locking prevents the following operations on clips Deletion Changing the index picture Adding and deleting shot marks Setting and clearing clip flags Locked clips are deleted along with other clips when a disc is formatted Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the write inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position or when REC INH in the HOME page of the function menu is set to ON To lock clips See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnails of the clips that you want to lock 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Lock Unlock Clip 4 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A lock icon see page 68 appears on th
38. UC LINE 12 LINE 19 Specify blanking for lines 12 to 19 bink blank Carry out blanking thru throu Switch off blanking LINE 20 Specify blanking for line 20 bink blank Carry out blanking half Carry out half blanking thru throu Switch off blanking In 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode J LINE 12 LINE 20 Specify blanking for lines 12 to 20 bink blank Carry out blanking thru throu Switch off blanking LINE 21 Specify blanking for line 21 bink blank Carry out blanking half Carry out half blanking thru throu Switch off blanking In 50i 50P 25P mode LINE 9 LINE 22 Specify blanking for lines 9 to 22 bink blank Carry out blanking thru throu Switch off blanking LINE 23 Specify blanking for line 23 half Carry out half blanking thru throu Switch off blanking 705 EDGE SUBCARRIER REDUCER MODE Select whether to enable the edge subcarrier reducer ESR on Enable off Do not enable When playing back a composite signal set this to on snue wN Z Jejdeuj 136 707 FORCED VERTICAL INTERPOLATION OFF The Y add function is normally switched on automatically during jog or variable speed playback This item selects whether to force the Y add function off auto Automatically switch the Y add function on off forced YADD off Force the Y add function off The Y add function is off while a di
39. dis disable Do not perform synchronized recording ena enable Perform synchronized recording Normally select dis Select ena only when you want to perform synchronized recording on two or more PDW HD1500 F1600 units in 23 98P mode Select ena on all of the PDW HD1500 F1600 units that will perform synchronized recording When you have connected two or more PDW HD1500 F1600 units in a daisy chain or distributed configuration for synchronized operation setup menu item 201 must also be set Maintenance Menu M3 OTHERS Other setting items Item M3B VANC RX M3B0 VANC RX PARAMETER PACKET Setting For setting HDSDI VANC data input parameters This setting is required for recording and playback of closed captions For details see page 174 In 59 94i 50i 29 97P or 25P mode selecting the line also selects the corresponding line in the second field for example if line 9 is selected line 572 is also selected for VANC packet reception Menu item M3BO enables recording of one VANC packet when the selected line contains any packets whose DID SDID matches the value set with this menu item Up to four packets are recorded per each line regardless of the DID and SDID for the VANC set with menu item M3B1 or M3B2 It is not possible to set the same line with menu items M3BO M3B1 and M3B2 If the same line is specified priority is given in the order of M3BO M3B1 and M3B2 for example i
40. function menu is set to TC or VITC and you try to preset timecode or user bits Set PRST RGN to PRESET see page 47 REC RUN 9 TCG RUN MODE IS SET TO REC RUN This appears when RUN MODE on page P5 TC of SET TC FREE RUN MODE IN FUNCTION the function menu is set to REC RUN and you try to MENU preset timecode or user bits Set RUN MODE to FREE RUN see page 47 REC mode P THUMBNAIL S CANNOT BE Stop recording and try again DISPLAYED DURING RECORDING CANNOT EXECUTE IN REC MODE DRIVE MAINTENANCE MENU CANNOT BE EXECUTED WHILE IN REC MODE INPUT SELECTION CANNOT BE CHANGED DURING RECORDING AUDIO REC MODE CANNOT BE CHANGED DURING RECORDING REC PAUSE TC UB CANNOT BE PRESET IN REC Stop recording and try again PAUSE MODE gt Disc Exchg EXIT DISC EXCHANGE CACHE MODE This appears when you perform one of the following 3 operations 3 Attempt to preset timecode or user bits x Attempt to make a FAM connection Press the button such as PLAY button while the disc is being ejected during disc exchange No SEL List P CLIP LIST IS NOT SELECTED This appears when you press the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button while the clip list on the disc is not loaded into the current clip list Load the clip list see page 85 and try again Troubleshooting 1 61 xipueddy 162 Alarm message in time data display area SB CLP mode P Alarm message in video monitor scree
41. information to display Thumbnail Menu Is Clip Information Return to Upper Menu DELG Duration Sequence Number 3 Select the items that you want to display Date Date and time of creation or date and time of the more recent modification Time Code Timecode of first frame Duration Playback time Thumbnail Operations Sequence Number Thumbnail sequence number Return to Upper Menu Returns to the Thumbnail Menu The selected information will appear at the bottom of the thumbnails when you display a thumbnail screen Changing clip index pictures The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails as index pictures for clips Normally the index picture is the first frame in a clip but you can set any frame in the clip as the index picture You can only change index pictures from the clip thumbnail screen The thumbnails shown in the clip list thumbnail screen the expand thumbnail screen and the chapter thumbnail screen cannot be changed To select a clip index picture while viewing the video See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip whose index picture you want to change 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Select Index Picture Select Index screen appears 018 036 Select Index Navigating sibling relati E lo lt TCR 01 09 16 13 OK You can play and search with this screen 4 Sele
42. monitor of this unit and an external monitor to which the output of the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector is input An abbreviated name appears in the time data display area when you press the NEXT button The values in the Settings columns are the values which appear in the time data display area The values may appear in a different format on an external monitor In this case the external monitor values are shown in parentheses Underlined values are the factory defaults This manual does not explain the menu items in MO CHECK M1 ADJUST M2 SERVICE SUPPORT and Mo DRIVE Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an explanation of these items M3 OTHERS Other setting items Item M30 SOFTWARE VERSION Setting Display of the software version of this unit M31 SERIAL NUMBER Display of the serial number of this unit M33 FILE I F PROAV DISPLAY CONFIG Selects whether or not to display PROAV directory DISABLE Do not display PROAV directory ENABLE Display PROAV directory PC REMOTE Disables or enables a FAM connection ENALBE Enable a FAM connection F KEY SELECT Enable or disable a FAM connection using the function menu M36 HOURS METER RESET Display and reset of the hours meter and the thread counter M37 AUDIO M370 HEAD ROOM CONFIG Select the audio reference level headroom 20dB 18dB 16dB
43. normal playback high speed playback in the forward or reverse directions and jog shuttle and variable playback When this unit is set to repeat playback mode the selected clip only is played repeatedly To move to another clip press the PREV NEXT SHIFT PREV or SHIFT NEXT button or perform a thumbnail search Pulldown playback When this unit s system frequency is set to 1080 59 94i 1080 29 97P or 720 59 94P clips recorded as 1080 23 98P are converted by 2 3 pulldown before playback pulldown playback Timecode in pulldown playback During pulldown playback timecode is also converted to 30 frames to match the output video signals The upper row of the time data display area displays the original 24 frame timecode and the lower row displays the 30 frame timecode TC UITC 00 59 59 23 PDT 00 59 59 298 You can superimpose the 30 frame timecode after pulldown on an external monitor To do so set setup menu item 005 DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT to time data only TCR 00 59 59 23 PDT 00 59 59 29 Disc playback start position Although this unit uses optical discs it is designed to offer the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs One of these is the playback start position which works in the same way as tape as described below After playback stop The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was pressed Press the PLAY button to resume playback at the stop pos
44. operations The STORED OWNERSHIP UMID ownership information setting screen appears ITEM 029 STORED OUNERSHIP ATION COUNTRY Sets the country code ORGANIZATION Sets the organization code USER Sets the user code See the next item About the UMID ownership information for more information about these codes 2 Use the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select the item to set and the character input location then press the knob 3 Use the PUSH SET S SEL knob or function button F3 or F4 to select characters to input at the selected location To delete all input data Press the RESET RETURN button 4 Press SAVE function button F5 The message NOW SAVING appears and the ownership information is saved About the UMID ownership information COUNTRY country code Set the country code by entering an abbreviated alphanumeric string 4 byte alphanumeric string according to the values defined in ISO 3166 1 There are about 240 country codes Find your own country code on the following web page Refer to ISO 3166 1 http www iso org iso country codes iso_3166_code_lists htm When the country code is less than 4 bytes the active part of the code occupies the first part of the 4 bytes and the remainder must be filled with the space character 20h Example Japan For Japan the country code is JP which is 2 bytes or JPN which is 3 bytes Thus enter the following JP__ or JPN _ wher
45. pbr playback remain The remaining playback time of the selected clip from the current playback position hours minutes seconds frames name clip name title The name of the clip that is currently being recorded or played as set in Settings gt Display Title of the Disc Menu standard name user defined name title or planning metadata name The following characters can be displayed as clip names in this area Digits O to 9 e Alphabetic characters a to z A to Z e The following symbols amp comma period colon semicolon lt gt 4 _ 4 1 Space edit edit preset Edit preset state 9 ed amp tc edit preset amp tc mode Edit preset state and settings of timecode 9 When menu item 005 is set to off sub status information is not displayed when this item is set to anything other than off 024 MENU CHARACTER TYPE Determine the type of characters in menu text output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector for superimposed display on the monitor white White letters on a black background black Black letters on a white background W out White letters with black outline B out Black letters with white outline Set this item by selecting the required type while viewing the monitor 028 HD CHARACTER Specify whether to superimpose text info
46. provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 3 Cambridge Broadband Ltd copyright notice BSD Portions of this code are copyright c 2001 2003 Cambridge Broadband Ltd All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Trademarks and Li
47. recording format of the PDW F1600 units to match the recording format of the editing target clip The following table shows the required settings Time code With TCG on page P5 TC of the function menu select INT With PRST RGN on page P5 TC of the function menu select PRESET With RUN MODE on page P5 TC of the function menu select FREE RUN Repeat playback mode With setup menu item 142 REPEAT MODE select off Linear Editing xXoeg e g pue Buipiooeu v Jeydeyo 57 xoeg e g pue BuipiooeH y 1e1deuo 58 See page 149 for more information about maintenance menu operations See page 44 for more information about function menu operations See page 125 for more information about setup menu operations To edit clips created by application software on devices other than XDCAM devices You can use application software on devices other than XDCAM devices to create clips and then copy them to this unit as files To edit such clips set maintenance menu item M39 OTHER CONFIG gt M394 HD L EDIT to Extra extra mode Clips edited in extra mode cannot be edited on XDCAM devices with software versions earlier than 1 51 or on this unit when this unit is set to standard mode f you want to use extra mode select extra mode on every PDW F1600 HD1500 that you connect to the editing system To set up mixing of audio input signals By making setup menu settings you can
48. unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture To avoid electrical shock do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED CAUTION The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing No objects filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed on the apparatus The unit is not disconnected from the AC power source mains as long as it is connected to the wall outlet even if the unit itself has been turned off This apparatus is provided with a main switch on the rear panel Install this apparatus so that user can access the main switch easily RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric sh
49. 126 for more information about the signal output settings in E E mode To set shot marks A Shot Mark1 essence mark or Shot Mark2 essence mark is set if you hold down the MARK1 or MARK2 button and press the PUSH SET S SEL knob during recording If you connect a Windows USB keyboard to the Recording xXoeg e g pue DBuipiooeu v Jeydeyo 51 xXoeq e g pue BuipiooeH v 1e1deuo 52 MAINTENANCE connector you can record shot marks from Shot Mark0 up to Shot Mark9 by pressing the 0 to 9 keys on the numeric keypad If the unit is set up to display superimposed text information see page 41 SHOTMARK 0 to 9 appears every time you set an essence mark When Shot MarkO0 to Shot Mark9 is set you can search for the shot marks by displaying thumbnails of the frames at those positions see page 75 You can also use shot mark positions as edit points during scene selection operations see page 64 You can also set shot marks during playback See page 62 for the procedure To set a clip flag You can set one of the three types of flag OK NG or KEEP for the clip while it is being recorded by viewing its video image and using the function menu see page 47 You can also set a clip flag during playback See page 62 for details You can also set a clip flag on the GUI screen See page 81 for details Continuing recording while exchanging discs disc exchange cache function About 30 seconds this
50. 2 SUPER connectors 27 Select Essence Mark screen 75 Select Index screen 78 Set Start Time Code screen 88 Setup menu basic menu 121 extended menu 128 SHIFT button 19 Shortcut 102 SHTL JOG button 17 Shuttle dial 17 mode 62 Shuttle jog variable control section 17 Skip Scroll 73 Specifications 169 STANDBY indicator 20 STOP button 20 SUB CLIP button 18 65 indicator 18 65 Sub clip 84 adding 85 deleting 88 reordering 87 trimming 87 Superimposed text information 41 Supplying power 29 AC power supply 29 Battery power supply 29 DC power supply 29 Synchronization reference signals 38 System frequency setting 31 System information 23 T Text information 41 THUMBNAIL button 65 indicator 18 65 Thumbnail display items 67 operations 73 selecting 73 selecting information displayed 78 selecting multiple thumbnails 74 Thumbnail Menu 69 Thumbnail search 74 using chapter function 74 using essence marks 75 using expand function 74 using thumbnails 74 Tilt mechanism 32 TIME CODE IN connector 28 OUT connector 28 Time data display area 22 Timecode 39 after setting initial value 39 input output section 28 recording external timecode directly 41 recording sequentially upon the last recorded timecode 40 recording with the internal timecode generator synchronized 40 setting to current time 40 Title 107 Troubleshooting 158 U UMID Data 172 USB connector 27 User bits setting 40 V VAR JOG button 17
51. 21 Device Type PDW HD1500 Description Path Clip User Name admin Password KKKKKEKKAKK Cancel Connect Transferring Clips Direct FTP Function Item Setting Host Name Host name or IP address If this is a host name a DNS server must be available on the connected network Specification of an IP address is recommended Port Port used by the FTP server normally 21 Device Type The type of the remote host f the remote host is an XDCAM device select the model name or Other XDCAM model if the model name is not in the list from the list of model names 9 f the remote host is a computer select Others PC Server from the list of model names Comment about the remote host UTF 8 encoding up to 127 bytes This setting has no effect on the connection The setting that you make here appears as the remote host name in the Select Remote Host screen see step 5 of the procedure Description Path If the remote host is a computer path to the transfer destination directory This is not needed if the remote host is an XDCAM device User name for FTP login If the remote host is an XDCAM device the default is admin User Name Password Password for FTP login If the remote host is an XDCAM device the default is the model name such as pdw hd1500 a If an XDCAM device is selected as the Device Type then the User Name and Password are
52. 311 ch 1 analog ch1 312 ch 2 analog ch2 313 nodef no definition 314 nodef no definition 317 F1600 Select the type of audio transition used for linear editing AUDIO EDIT MODE cut edit Cut editing audio discontinuity at transition point and possible noise during playback cross fade Cross fade IN OUT DX eo 3 a Setup Menu snus z Ja dey9 131 snue wN Z Ja deup 132 Menu items in the 300s relating to editing operations Item number 319 Item name F1600 PREREAD SELECT Settings Select the preread operation a v audio video Preread for both audio and video audio Preread for audio only video Preread for video only 320 DIGITAL AUDIO PB PROCESS ON Specify the handling of audio at edit points and at the second and EDIT POINT subsequent recording start points in Clip Continuous Rec recording cut Carry out a cut possibly resulting in audio discontinuities at the edit point fade Fade out and fade in 329 F1600 Select methods for setting the edit presets of the digital audio channels ANALOG AUDIO EDIT PRESET CH5 to CH8 of this unit Make these settings when using an editor REPLACE FOR CH5 PVE 500 BVE 600 etc or remote control unit without a function to control digital audio edit presets ae MA EAS AUDIO EDIT PRESET The edit presets of the digital audio channels of this unit are turned on REPLACE FOR C
53. 87 SueeiJog IND ul suongeiedo S 1e1deuo 88 To cue up the In point or Out point Display the Thumbnail Menu select Cue up Inpoint or Cue up Outpoint and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To cancel the In point or Out point setting Display the Thumbnail Menu select Reset Inpoint or Reset Outpoint and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The In point or Out point setting returns to the previous value 6 Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob 7 Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required 8 Save the clip list see page 89 To delete sub clips See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Select the clips to delete in the clip list thumbnail screen multiple selections possible 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Delete Sub Clips and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion 4 Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required 6 save the clip list see page 89 To play the clip list When this unit is in single clip playback mode see page 60 only the selected sub clip can be played See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations To play using GUI screens 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the sub clip where you want to start play Scene Selection Clip List Editing To start play from the start of the clip list Select th
54. Click here for support information For Windows Vista 1 Open Programs Programs and Functions in the control panel and then right click the header where Name and Supplier are displayed and select Other 2 In the Advanced Settings dialog check Version and click OK The version column appears Check the version of ProDisc For Windows 7 Open Programs and Features in the control panel and then check the version of ProDisc File Operations in File Access Mode for Windows Making FAM connections 1 Ifthere is a disc loaded in this unit put the unit into the following state Recording playback search and other disc operations see page 50 Stopped THUMBNAIL button see page 18 Off Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips Format Disc and so on in the Disc Menu see page 71 Stopped Unsaved current clip list Save or clear Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function Disconnected Setting of setup menu item 258 LIVE LOGGING Values other than live view mode off or live mode 2 If this unit is connected to a remote computer by FTP log out from the FTP session see page 114 3 Connect the amp i LINK S400connector on this unit to the i LINK EEE1394 connector on the remote computer using an i LINK cable see connections illustration on page 33 Windows recognizes this unit as a removable disc and displays one of the
55. Composite line 21 output EIA 608 SDSDI line 21 input HDSDI VANC EE output EIA 708 EIA 608 708 conversion EIA 608 SDSDI line 21 output Composite line 21 output Up convert playback of SD discs containing closed caption data When you up convert and play SD clips ELA 608 compliant closed caption data in the clips is converted to EIA 708 format and then played and output according to the EIA 708 standard However settings are required for output of EIA 708 standard closed caption data by up convert playback Playback of SD discs EIA 608 _ D EIA 608 708 conversion Up convert playback For details see To record EIA 608 B standard closed caption data in SDSDI line 21 signals after conversion to the EIA 708 B standard page 174 HDSDI VANC output EIA 708 EIA 608 SDSDI line 21 output Composite line 21 output Cross convert playback of HD discs containing closed caption data and down convert playback For details see To record and playback EIA 708 B standard closed caption data in HDSDI signals page 174 When you cross convert and play 1080 or 720 clips EIA 708 compliant closed caption data recorded in the clips is played and output with no changes By performing down convert playback you can also play and output EIA 608 standard closed caption data However settings are required for output of EIA 708 standard closed caption data Playback
56. Continuing recording while exchanging discs disc exchange cache TD CUI esed teo p RU D E ore eed 52 Recording with the HDSDI remote control function 53 Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function 53 Using the Live Logging function cee eeececescecsseceeneeeceneeeeneeeeaees 54 Handling of discs when recording does not end normally salvage TUDCUODS iesu Melek prex boe a Tu cu ee CU e Mes Eu 54 Linear EdITIT Quieres coc eo eo tetx een corn RxRSauuZuaadu ns duEd du tu bx dea cca ranan cin 56 cad T RAA 56 enlierto rr EA 57 Preparations for editing ae sistens ec tre asesinato nee eg De vo 57 Editing operations i aatia Mo dabo a about a cases 59 Preteacd et ing soe iato uus a e eodd eundi 59 PIAV OO ied eU Rn 60 Playback Operatic oso beet daten teet pn entend aS 61 Playback operations using thumbnails eeeeees 63 Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens OVOPRVICW sssini naadi 65 Switching between GUI screens eese 65 Information and controls in thumbnail screens ssssss 66 Displaying Tre HUS ceniona ND encore nodis ebas MEHR S M OR a 69 GUI Screen Operations 2 v terere t reiten eH YYX RNV RU VA QUSE NAR EE 12 Thumbnail OperationS sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 73 Selecting th mbiailS senecaene a ee daa Dr aee eaii 73 Searching wi
57. Jumbo frames make it possible to deliver larger payloads per packet Since fewer packets need to be routed packet processing overhead is lower and network throughput is potentially improved Note that this item is enabled only when LINK SPEED is set to 1000Mbps For it to work all other devices that handle packets on the network must also support jumbo frames Maintenance menu operations This section describes the indications in the maintenance menu and how to change the settings To display the maintenance menu Holding down the PAGE HOME button and the SHIFT button press the MENU button The maintenance menu appears on the video monitor display and the currently set menu item is displayed in reverse video Meanings of indications on the menu screen On screen indication Meaning Pressing the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the OUT button switches to the next lower menu level or to a setting selection screen Right pointing arrow gt at the right of a menu item Left pointing arrow Pressing the PUSH SET S SEL at the left of a menu knob or the IN button switches to item the previous higher menu level Maintenance Menu M57 DNS1 Set the address of DNS server 1 000 000 000 000 The address of DNS server 1 cannot be set when DHCP is set to ENABLE To check the automatically acquired address of DNS server 1 close the maintenance menu and then open it again M58 DNS2 Set the
58. MENU 0 j 0 Clip list thumbnail screen 002 013 y s us i A Te 00902013 re TC 00 00 28 08 TC00 00 35 15 TC00 004608 AL Ah ed TC 00 00 59 16 TC 00011331 E DpArE amp TIME 28 JUL 2006 19 55 3 75 00 31 THUMBNAIL MN o ct Lit ae o NS i C OA Lit DISC MENU a Playback screens appear when you switch to video monitor display Use the DISPLAY button to switch from the basic monitor display to video monitor display see page 19 b The clip list playback screen appears when a clip list is loaded into the unit s memory see page 89 The other thumbnail screens are Expand thumbnail screen Chapter thumbnail screen Essence mark thumbnail screen Information and controls in thumbnail screens About the display of clip and clip list names You can specify that titles should appear instead of names in the clip name areas of thumbnail screens You can also change the display language Overview To specify that titles if they exist should be displayed with higher priority than names select one of the following under Settings gt Display Title in the Disc Menu On Titlel title1 Display in the order titlel title2 clip or clip list name On Title2 title2 Display in the order title2 titlel clip or clip list name To change the display language according to the area of use see page 30 select the desired language under Settings
59. Menu Item number 013 Item name SYSTEM FREQUENCY SELECT MENU Settings Specify whether to enable switching the system frequencies 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P 50i 50P 25P 23 98P off Do not enable switching the system frequencies on Enable switching the system frequencies For details about switching the system frequencies see page 39 Settings for both basic and extended menu items are saved separately for different system frequencies 1080 59 94i 29 97P 1080 50i 25P 1080 23 98P e 720 59 94P e 720 50P Therefore when you switch system frequencies all menu items are reset to the current settings for the new mode They are different from the setting for the previous mode 016 ALARM DISPLAY Select whether to display alarm messages off Do not display alarm messages However certain important alarms are displayed limit on limited Display only a minimum number of alarm messages on Display all alarm messages For details about alarm message display conditions see Alarms page 158 017 SUB STATUS DISPLAY SELECT Determine the kind of sub status information to be output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector off Do not output sub status information rmain disc remain Available disc space unit minute clip clip no Order of playback of the selected clip total number of clips
60. Menu see page 71 Stopped Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function Disconnected Setting of setup menu item 258 LIVE LOGGING Values other than live view mode off or live mode Login is not possible unless a disc is loaded and the unit is in the state described above 2 Start the command prompt 3 Enter ftp SP IP address gt and press the Enter key SP refers to a space For example if the IP address of this unit is set to 192 168 001 010 enter ftp 192 168 1 10 Refer to the Windows help for more information about the FTP command If the connection succeeds you are prompted to enter a user name 4 Enter the user name admin and press the Enter key When the user name is verified you are prompted to enter a password D Enter the password and press the Enter key The password is set to the model name pdw f1600 or pdw hd1500 when the unit is shipped from the factory The login is complete when the password is verified See page 114 for the FTP protocol commands supported by this unit FTP File Operations If the connection times out This unit terminates FTP connections if no command is received within 90 seconds of the last command If this occurs log out see the next section and repeat steps 2 to 4 If you power this unit off during an FTP connection the data transferred thus far is discarded To log out To
61. Part number 1 777 823 12 250 V 10 A about 2 0 m For the customers in European countries other than the United Kingdom Part number 1 551 631 61 250 V 10 A about 2 0 m RCC 5G 9 pin Remote Control Cable RM 280 Remote Edit Controller PFD23A Professional Disc PFD50DLA Dual layer Professional Disc BP L80S Battery Pack BKP L551 Battery Adaptor PDBK 201 MPEG TS Board PDBZ UPGO02 Software Upgrade Key HD1500 PDBK S1500 SD Record And Playback Key PDBK F1500 24P Record And Playback Key Design and specifications are subject to change without notice Notes Always make a test recording and verify that it was recorded successfully SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER Specifications xipueddy 171 xipueddy 172 Using UMID Data Metadata is additional information recorded on discs along with audio
62. Q LEVEL adjustment knob 5 Recording and playback control section see page 19 A Display menu control section see page 18 On standby D button and indicator When the POWER switch on the rear panel is in the I position and when DC power is connected to the DC IN 12V connector on the rear panel this switches the unit between the operating state the indicator is lit green and the standby state the indicator is lit red When the indicator is lit red pressing the button switches this unit to the operating state and the indicator lights continuously green When the indicator is lit green pressing the button switches the unit to the standby state and the indicator lights continuously red If a disc is loaded in the unit the indicator flashes before changing to continuously lit red When using this unit normally leave the rear panel POWER switch in the I on position and use this button to switch the unit between the operating state and standby state ACCESS indicator This lights when the disc is accessed and when a file is opened by a FAM or FTP connection see page 103 If the on standby button is pressed while this indicator is lit Front Panel 15 Sud Jo suonounJ pue seweN z Jedeuo Sued Jo suonounJ pue sewen z Jeldeup 16 access to the disc is completed before the unit switches to the standby state While the ACCESS indicator is lit do not turn off
63. Select with CNTR SEL on HOME page of the function menu Selection of audio channels to monitor Select with MONITR R and MONITR L on page P2 AUDIO of the function menu Volume adjustment of the monitor audio Adjust with the LEVEL knob Remote local setting Set the remote control switch If you set it to REMOTE also set setup menu item 214 REMOTE INTERFACE RM and the connector used appear on the system information of the display see page 130 SD up convert function You can input SD signals to the SD HDSDI INPUT connector and record them as HD signals User data recording You can record user data files other than XDCAM AV files on Professional Discs as PC data via the i LINK or FTP interface This allows Professional Discs to be used as data recording media with a data storage capacity of 46 4 GB when dual layer PFD50DLA discs are used Carrying out recording One recording segment from the start to the end of recording is called a clip See Clips page 84 for more information about clips EJECT 1 662 2930 0 5 1 Insert a disc 2 Hold down the REC button and press the PLAY button Recording starts 3 To stop recording press the STOP button If the disc becomes full Recording stops and the message ALARM DISC END appears on the monitor The shortest clip that can be recorded
64. TC Positions where alarms occurred timecode F4 DETAIL ALARM details F5 F6 EXIT Exits the alarm log screen sub menu Handling Discs Handling Discs Discs used for recording and playback This unit can record and play back the following Professional Disc P formats PFD23A capacity 23 3 GB e PFD50DLA capacity 50 0 GB 1 Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation tis not possible to use the following discs for recording or playback Blu ray Disc Professional Disc for Data PFD50DLA discs can be used only by XDCAM devices with the DL mark see the following illustration They cannot be used by XDCAM devices without this mark Professional Disc Notes on handling Handling The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge and is designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or fingerprints However if the cartridge is subjected to a severe shock for example by dropping it this can result in damage or scratching of the disc If the disc is scratched it may be impossible to record video audio or to play back the content recorded on the disc The discs should be handled and stored carefully Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the cartridge Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage Do not disassemble the cartridge The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for indexing discs Apply the label in the correct position S
65. This allows you to set the time after which the unit exits a disc stop mode and enters standby off mode 0 5 s 0 5 sec 8 m 8 min 30 m 30 min Can be set in the range from 0 5 seconds to 30 minutes off Do not put into standby off mode Setup Menu Menu items in the 600s relating to the timecode metadata and UMID Item number 601 Item name VITC POSITION SEL 19 In 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode Settings Select the line into which to insert VITC signals SD output 12H 16H 20H Any line from line 12 through line 20 You can insert VITC signals in two places To insert in two places set both item 601 and item 602 In 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode J output of wide picture information is given priority if OUTPUT in setup menu item 731 is set to auto and the VITC insertion line is set to line 16 n 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode UC output of wide picture information is given priority if OUTPUT in setup menu item 731 is set to auto and the VITC insertion line is set to line 20 In 50i 50P 25P mode Select the line into which to insert VITC signals SD output 9H 19H 22H Any line from line 9 through line 22 You can insert VITC signals in two places To insert in two places set both item 601 and item 602 602 VITC POSITION SEL 2 9 In 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode Select the line into which to insert VITC signals SD output 12H 18H 20H Any line from li
66. To display the setup menu A all DISPLAY button MENU button Time data display area Press the MENU button A setup menu appears on the video monitor display and a cursor indicates the currently selected menu item Cursor indicating the currently selected item Group name for the currently selected item xd METER HO1 0PE HOURS 102 H11 0PE HOURS r 102 To display menus on the external monitor Connect the monitor to the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector on this unit and press the MENU button To display menus in the time data display area Press the MENU button to display a setup menu on the video monitor display and press the DISPLAY button The video monitor display is switched the basic operation display and the number and setting of the currently selected menu item appear in the time data display area X A HOT Item number flashing 000109 Setting To display the full item name Hold down the NEXT button Buttons used to change settings Use the following buttons to change setup menu settings Menu control Functions buttons MENU button Displays and hides the setup and user interface menus Returns to the menu from a setting Screen PUSH SET S
67. a TCP IP network in real time and to record the results in a status log User data recording mode User data files other than XDCAM AV files can be recorded on Professional Discs as PC data via the i LINK or FTP interface This allows Professional Discs to be used as data recording media with a data storage capacity of 46 4 GB when dual layer PFD50DLA discs are used Supports a variety of interfaces This unit supports the following interfaces HDSDI video 8 channel audio input and output SDSDI video 8 channel audio input and output the SD HDSDI INPUT connector doubles as an SDSDI HDSDI input connector SD composite output AES EBU digital audio 4 channel input and output Analog audio 2 channel input and output Remote RS 422A D sub 9 pin x 1 Video remote D sub 9 pin x 1 TBC control is available from the front panel i LINK TS HDV input and output when PDBK 201 option board is installed Software Downloads When the unit is used with a PC connection download any device drivers plug ins and application software you require from the following websites Sony Professional products website U S A http pro sony com Canada http www sonybiz ca Latin America http sonypro latin com Europe http www pro sony eu pro Middle East Africa http sony psmea com Russia http sony ru pro Brazil http sonypro com br Australia http pro sony com au New Zealand http pro sony co nz Japan http www so
68. address of DNS server 2 000 000 000 000 The address of DNS server 2 cannot be set when DHCP is set to ENABLE To check the automatically acquired address of DNS server 2 close the maintenance REL menu and then open it again M59 UPnP Select whether to enable the UPnP universal plug and play function snue wN Z 13 deyo 149 snue wN 4 Ja deup 150 On screen indication Meaning Current setting of the menu item When shown with a colon the current setting is the same as the factory default setting When shown with a raised dot the current setting is different from the factory default setting Character string at the right of a menu item An asterisk in a Factory default setting complete list of settings To change a menu item setting Carry out the following operations to change the setting For information about how to change network settings see next section To change network settings Function buttons Arrow buttons PUSH SET S SEL knob SHIFT button PAGE HOME button MENU button 1 Use the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the MARK1 and MARK2 buttons to select the required item then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the SELECT function button F2 The sub items of the selected item appears 2 Select a sub item w
69. also changed automatically f When an E E01 SMI file is created an E MOI XML file with the same name in the E part is also generated automatically g When an E E01 SMI file is deleted an E MOI XML file with the same name in the E part is also deleted automatically Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory Sub directory File name Content Operations Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete C S01 MXF 9 Proxy AV data MXF file generated Yes No No No No9 automatically when a C MXF file is created 0001 to 9999 Other files Files other than the above No No a The C part can be changed to a user defined name b When the C part of a C MXF file name is changed a C S01 MXF file with the same name in the C part is generated automatically c When a C MXF file is created a CFSO1 XML file with the same name in the C part is generated automatically d When a C MXF file is deleted the C SOI XML file with the same name in the C part is also deleted automatically UserData directory Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory File name Content Operations Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete Any file Yes Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes a UTF 8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length Depending on the character type file names including exten
70. audio input source To display this item on the PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 with the PDBZ UPGO 2 Software Upgrade Key installed set maintenance menu item M393 AUDIO DSP to AGC limiter When maintenance menu item M393 AUDIO DSP is set to linear edit this item is not displayed CH1 line Line input mic Microphone input CH2 line Line input mic Microphone input 839 AUDIO AGC LIMITER MODE For automatic input level adjustments performed on the analog audio signals recorded on channels 1 and 2 select whether to perform the adjustments in stereo mode or independently for channels 1 and 2 mono Perform automatic adjustments independently for channels 1 and 2 stereo Perform automatic adjustments in stereo mode To display this item on the PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 with the PDBZ UPGO 2 Software Upgrade Key installed set maintenance menu item M393 AUDIO DSP to AGC limiter When maintenance menu item M393 AUDIO DSP is set to linear edit this item is not displayed 840 AUDIO AGC SELECT Set the AGC saturation level off AGC does not operate 6dB 9dB 12dB 15dB 17dB AGC operates when the VARIABLE switch is set to PRESET To display this item on the PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 with the PDBZ UPGO02 Software Upgrade Key installed set maintenance menu item M393 AUDIO DSP to AGC limiter When maintenance menu item M393 AUDIO DSP is set to linear edit this item is n
71. been set A clip flag can also be set or deleted using the GUI screen See page 81 for details Sub Item F1 OK Set an OK flag F2 NG Set an NG flag F3 KEEP Set a KEEP flag F4 F5 DELETE Delete the clip flag F6 EXIT Exit the clip flag sub menu Basic Operations of the Function Menu suonejedejg Ja deup 47 suonejedejg e Jaydeyo 48 Item F4 PC RMT Setting Enables or disables a FAM connection The connection can be cut off while it is maintained or remade while it is disabled ENABLE Enable a connection DISABLE Disable a connection PC REMOTE under maintenance menu item M33 FILE I F CONFIG must be set to F KEY SELECT in order to use this function see page 145 e DISABLE is always selected when the unit is powered off and then on again regardless of the previous setting F5 PREREAD Selects whether to put the unit into preread editing mode ON Put the unit into preread editing mode OFF Do not put the unit into of preread editing mode When you put the unit into preread editing mode the time data display area in the display on the front panel of the unit is divided into two sections and PREREAD appears in the lower section F6 ALRM LOG Displays the alarm log screen Sub Item F1 ALARM ALARM messages F2 DATE Dates and times when the alarms occurred F3
72. can be used as a playback disc A disc which contains clips in different recording formats cannot be used as a disc for editing However it can be used as a playback disc if you create a clip list that contains only clips in one of the recording formats Locked clips cannot be edited Editing across multiple clips is not possible It is not possible to carry out assemble editing other than on the final clip Ifthere is no space on the disc in assemble editing it will not be possible to extend the clip Preread editing is not supported After linear editing discs in the MPEG HD422 format cannot be read by the versions 1 2 or earlier of the PDW HD1500 700 To play such discs on the PDW HD1500 7700 upgrade the software to version 1 5 or higher Even after linear editing the underlying VANC data is not rewritten VANC data cannot be edited However essence mark data is rewritten can be edited Linear editing is not possible when the unit is in one of the following modes To perform linear editing exit the mode Single clip playback mode Clip Continuous Rec mode Disc Exchange Cache mode Live Ligging mode The message N A Clip appears if you attempt to perform linear editing on discs that contain clips of the following types If this occurs linear editing is not possible Create copies output video and audio signals from the HDSDI output connectors or other connectors and record them to an
73. chapter positions The positions of Rec Start essence marks cannot be adjusted 1 In the chapter thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the shot mark whose position you want to adjust 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Move Essence Mark The Move Essence Mark screen is displayed Move Essence Mark ShotMark2 001070101072 TCR 00 28 23 14 You can perform playback and searches in this screen 4 Use the PLAY button or jog dial to display the frame you want D Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To display the chapter thumbnail screen of the previous or next clip with chapters With the chapter thumbnail screen still active press the PREV button or the NEXT button The unit searches in the reverse or forward direction for the next clip with chapters beginning with the previous or next clip Using essence marks to find scenes See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip playback screen or the clip thumbnail screen press the THUMBNAIL button with the SHIFT button held down The Select Essence Mark screen appears The names of essence marks that are not recorded on the disc are displayed in gray Select Essence Mark Shot Mark Shot Mark2 Rec Start Cut Thumbnail Operations SU9BINS MD ul suonejedo s JajdeyD 75 SU99J9S IMD ui suonejedQ s JaydeyD 76 If planning metadata with user defined essence mark has been loaded Yo
74. clips Unlock All Clips Unlock all clips Delete All Clips Delete all clips Disc Properties Display the properties of the currently loaded disc Or edit the user disc ID title 1 and title 2 Format Disc Format initialize the currently loaded disc Download Clip via Direct FTP Used to send clip to and from remote devices and remote computers Settings Sub Item SET Key on Thumbnail Selects the behavior of the unit when the PUSH SET S SEL knob is pressed with one thumbnail selected Cue up amp Still Cue up the selected thumbnail Cue up amp Play Cue up and play the selected thumbnail Sort Clip List by Selects a method to sort the clip list Name A Z Sort in ascending alphabetic order Date Newest First Sort by date and time of creation newest clip list first Sort Planning Metadata by Selects a method to sort the planning metadata Name A Z Sort in ascending alphabetic order Date Newest First Sort by date and time of creation newest planning metadata first Display Title Selects whether to display clip and clip list titles On Title1 title1 Display the title in the following order of priority Title1 Title2 Clip name or Clip list name On Title2 title2 Display the title in the following order of priority Title2 Title1 Clip name or Clip list name Off Do not display the title Always display the clip name or clip list name
75. converter output in letter box mode 120 to 0 to 120 Setup Menu 1 41 snus Z Jejdeuj 142 Menu items in the 900s relating to digital process Item number 953 Item name UP CONVERTER PROCESS UC 9 Settings Select the source picture to use in converting SD to HD FIELD Use field pictures ADAPTIVE Frame or field is selected automatically 954 DETAIL GAIN UC 9 Adjust the up converter image enhancer the sharpness of edge enhancement 0 to 40H to 7FH 955 LIMITER UC 9 Adjust the up converter image enhancer the maximum detail level added to emphasize the original signal 0 to 20H to 3FH 956 CRISP THRESHOLD UC 9 Adjust the up converter image enhancer the threshold amplitude at which low amplitude signals are not emphasized 0 to 8 to FH 957 LEVEL DEPEND THRESHOLD UC 8 Adjust the up converter image enhancer Set the luminance range for edge enhancement 0 to 8 to FH 958 H DETAIL FREQUENCY UC 9 Adjust the up converter image enhancer Set the center frequency and frequency properties for edge enhancement 3 2MHz 3 2 MHz 1 1 MHz 4 5MHz 4 5 MHz 1 4 MHz 5 0MHz 5 0 MHz x0 7 MHz 4 0MHz 4 0 MHz 2 0 MHz 959 H V RATIO UC 9 Adjust the up converter image enhancer Set the horizontal vertical ratio for edge enhancement 0 to 3to 7 Setup Menu Menu items in the 900s relating to digital process
76. destination The file name is changed so that it does not conflict with the file at the destination The name of the file on the transfer source this unit appears in the Original field and the name of the file on the transfer destination appears in the Copy field P 1 If the clip name is a standard name it is changed to the unused clip name with the smallest number Example If names C0001 to C0020 are in use the name C0021 If the clip name is a user defined name a serial number is appended to the clip name Example If the name is EveningNews EveningNews 1 To cancel the processing Do one of the following Select Abort Immediately and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob If you are transferring multiple clips select Abort After this clip and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The transfer of subsequent clips will be cancelled after transfer of the current clip finishes Set the remote control switch of the unit to LOCAL When several files are to be transferred the entire transfer task is cancelled when the first transfer failure occurs Subsequent clips are not transferred When the transfer of all files has finished the Uploading Result Report screen appears Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen Transferring Clips Direct FTP Function SU88J0S MD ul suonejedo g Ja deyD 99 See page 72 for information about thumbnail sc
77. disc select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To exit the formatting screen Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob with Exit selected To disable the Format Disc command To prevent inadvertent disc formatting resulting in the loss of recorded data you can disable the Format Disc command See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations Disc Operations su 19 MD Ul suonejedo g Ja deyD 93 SU99198 MD ui suoneiedo 6 1e1deu 94 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 sclect Settings and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob 3 select Setting Format Disc and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob 4 select Disable and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Displaying disc and clip properties in a web browser By connecting this unit and a computer over a network you can display disc properties and clip properties in a web browser installed on the computer Web Thumbnail function The Clip Properties page also allows you to download high resolution clip data proxy AV data and metadata from this unit and to save that data on your computer Recommended browsers The following browsers are recommended nternet Explorer 7 l Internet Explorer 8 p 1 This function may not work properly in 32 bit versions of Internet Explorer if you are using a 64 bit version of Microsoft Windows You should use a 64 bit version of Internet Explorer with 64 bit versions of Windows To display the uni
78. duration may differ depending on the state of a disc of video and audio data can be recorded to the unit s internal memory cache during a disc exchange and then written back to the newly loaded disc 1 check that setup menu item 150 REC MODE is set to disc exchange cache If the disc exchange cache indication is lit in the time data display area see page 22 of the basic operation display setup menu item 150 REC MODE is set to disc exchange cache 2 If none of the indications of step 1 appear set setup menu item 150 REC MODE to disc exchange cache see page 130 The setting of 150 REC MODE can be changed even during recording However if you change the setting from clip continuous rec the setting change is enabled after the end of Clip Continuous Rec mode recording 3 Exchange the disc Recording During the period from the time when recording ends on the current disc and the disc is ejected until the time when the next disc is inserted the unit records to its internal cache memory Then after the new disc is inserted it copies the data from the cache to the disc and resumes normal recording Disc exchange cache indications and their meanings Indication Meaning Right side of icon flashes once per second Recording to the cache Left side of icon flashes twice per second Remaining memory capacity Low Whole icon flashes four times per second Remaining memory capac
79. function By installing the PDBK S 1500 option you can output HD while playing discs recorded as SD HD down convert function You can always output SD while playing discs recorded as HD To specify the frame to use as the thumbnail image You can display a list of thumbnails of all clips on a disc and use it to check the recorded content see page 73 When the unit is shipped from the factory it is set up to display the first frame of each clip as the thumbnail As required you can select another frame to display as the thumbnail For example if there are several seconds of color bars recorded at the start of the clip selecting a frame several seconds after the end of the recording of color bars can make it easier to identify the clip The GUI screen allows you to select thumbnail frames while viewing the video For details see Changing clip index pictures page 78 You can also use setup menu item 143 INDEX PICTURE POSITION to specify a different default frame You can specify the initial frame in any of the first few seconds after the initial frame The setting range is 0 seconds to 10 seconds Playback operation This section describes the following types of playback Normal playback Playback at normal speed Playback in jog mode Variable speed playback with the speed determined by the speed of turning the jog dial Playback in shuttle mode Variable speed playback with the speed determined by the an
80. generated When the value reaches 99999 the next number restarts from 00001 Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the serial number after recording several clips or the same is true depending on the value setting Care should be taken when setting the serial number The PREFIX setting is saved in memory banks but the NUMERIC setting is not saved see page 125 Assigning user defined clip and clip list names The following standard format names are assigned automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or recorded by XDCAM devices Overview Clips C0001 MXF to C9999 MXF Clip lists E0001E01 SMI to E0099E01 SMI This unit can handle clips and clip lists with user defined names as well as names in the standard format Limitations Letters numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2 0 character set can be used However the following control characters and symbols cannot be used Control characters U 0000 to U 001F U 007F Symbols lt gt Depending on the character type the length of user defined names the C or E E01 part may be limited to 14 characters The limit for ASCII characters is 56 characters All file name extensions are converted automatically to uppercase Titles are used as user defined clip names on this unit Therefore the available characters are limited to those supported by the title function Files generated along with c
81. gt Select Font in the Disc Menu Select Font setting Area of use setting J for Japan Displayable languages English Japanese Area of use Select Font Displayable setting setting languages UC for regions European English European outside Japan Alphabet languages Korean English Korean Simplified English Simplified Chinese Chinese Traditional English Traditional Chinese Chinese Clip thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of clips on the disc in the order that they were recorded You can use this screen to work with clips deleting or locking them selecting their index pictures adding them to clip lists and so on DUR 00 25 06 14 S DUR 00 27 51 09 L DUR 00 27 19 04 LES T UR T Fane as 00 23 34 18 _DUR 00 23 54 22 DUR 0 00 10 23 5 6 7 Q Clip name Displays the name or a title of the selected clip see page 66 Selection frame Indicates that the thumbnail is selected To select another thumbnail move the frame see page 72 Multiple selection frames appear when multiple thumbnails are selected see page 72 Clip number total number of clips Displays the total number of clips on the disc and the number of the selected clip Scrollbar When not all of the thumbnails can be displayed in the thumbnail display area the position of the slider shows the relative position of the currently displayed clips and the length of the
82. icamedadioccs rusa cbr ois E AU UEM TE KK EKERK LUE 187 MCG Santis aate atdht tomi Ub nia iata PELIS ndani a adini 189 Table of Contents 9 M Q 491deuS 10 Overview Marks for Model Specific Functions In this manual functions that are supported only by the PDW F1600 or only by the PDW HD1500 are indicated by the following marks F1600 PDW F1600 HD1500 PDW HD1500 Marks for Model Specific Functions Features Chapter Features The PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 referred to as this unit is a professional disc recorder supporting full HD 1920 x 1080 and 1280 x 720 playback and recording with Professional Disc P media When you use this unit in combination with a nonlinear editing system the FAM 2 function enables data file transfers between the unit and computers over the i LINK interface allowing the unit to be used like an external hard drive The unit can be used as a player for video editing and program output and as a recorder for nonlinear editing For these applications it can be connected to Sony nonlinear editors monitors and video equipment with HDSDI interfaces via its standard HDSDI I O connectors It has a compact lightweight body for easy portability outdoors and can be powered from any of three power sources AC DC or battery ie power 1 Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation 2 FAM File access mode 3 This unit does not support DV
83. in steps 4 and 5 is saved as a preset value To recall the preset timecode Select Recall Preset TC in the Thumbnail Menu and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob 6 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob OK is selected 7 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob again 8 Save the clip list see page 89 To save clip lists To save under a specified name See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu 2 Select Save Clip List as and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A list of clip lists appears Disc Menu liil Save Clip List as Name amp Date Sorted by Name DVD og Bl 08 AUG2007 11 50 E0003 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0004 03 AUG2007 17 51 lt E0005 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0006 E0007 E0095 E0098 03 AUG2007 17 51 03 AUG2007 17 51 18 MAY2006 10 25 13 JUN2006 13 43 Display Select To switch the information displayed for clip lists Press the OUT button With each press the display changes in the order Name amp Date gt Name amp Title gt Name amp Sort Date gt To sort clip lists Select one of the following orders by selecting Settings gt Sort Clip List by in the Disc Menu Name A Z Sort in ascending order by clip list name Date Newest First Sort by date and time of clip list creation newest first 3 Select the desired clip list name and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To save unde
84. in the lower right of the screen When the selected range duration in the expand thumbnail screen is less than two seconds it is expanded automatically to two seconds Hosts Discovered via UPnP UMID Unchange Network Config Cancel Execute steps 6 to 9 of To upload entire clips page 97 If the connection succeeds the Select Clip to Download screen appears Download Clip via Direct FTP Select Clip to Download C5000 MXF 71 6MB C5001 MXF 36 4MB C5002 MXF 2 147 4MB C5003 MXF 2 147 4MB C5004 MXF 36 7MB C5008 MXF 224 9MB C5009 MXF 298 8MB C5012 MXF 75 3MB Ifthe remote host is a computer only the MXF files in the specified directory appear When more 301 or more clips are stored on a remote host the denominator indicating the clip total at the upper right is shown as and the names of the 301st and following clips are not displayed File names containing other than ASCII characters 3 Execute step 2 to 9 of the previous section To upload kanji and so on are not displayed entire clips 4 Selecta clip to download and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Downloading clips The download starts When the download finishes the Downloading Result Report screen appears Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen Proceed as follows to download clips from a remote host such as other XDCAM device devices or a
85. information about the clip information area 4 Select one of the following and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob ASCII Clip Name Display the ASCII format title see page 152 Clip Name Display the UTF 8 format title see page 152 Checking user defined essence marks You can display the names of user defined Shot MarkO to Shot Mark9 essence marks in planning metadata UTF 8 format maximum 32 bytes 1 Display the Planning Metadata Properties screen see Play g page 92 for the planning metadata loaded into this unit The gt button is enabled when the planning metadata contains user defined essence marks see page 153 2 Press gt and then turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob The User Defined Essence Marks screen appears User Defined Essence Marks ShotMarkO 1 kick off 0 1 2 Touch Down 3 3 turn over timeout 4 5 i 6 tt 17 i M Formatting discs See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Format Disc and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A message appears asking you to confirm the format Format Disc All Clips Clip Lists and Non AV Data General Files will be Deleted Format OK Cancel 3 Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To cancel the format Select Cancel and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To continue by formatting another disc Exchange the
86. is 2 seconds long Even if recording start and stop operations are performed within 2 seconds a 2 second clip is recorded The maximum number of clips that can be recorded is 300 If the loaded disc already contains 300 clips recording operation is not possible The message MAX Clips appears in the time data display area This unit can record video input signals that are not synchronized to a reference signal However in that case video breakup and audio noise may occur in E E playback During recording do not turn off the POWER switch on the rear panel or disconnect the power cord This could cause the clip being recorded to be lost For details see Handling of discs when recording does not end normally salvage functions page 54 To adjust the audio recording levels When carrying out audio recording at a reference level Set the VARIABLE switch to PRESET The audio signals will be recorded at a preset reference level You can change the reference level and the input levels with maintenance menu item M37 AUDIO CONFIG See page 149 for more information about how to make maintenance menu settings Manually adjusting the audio recording levels Set the VARIABLE switch to REC and adjust the CH 1 ALL CH and CH 2 to CH 4 knobs so that the audio level indications on the audio level meters do not exceed 0 dB for a maximum volume Carry out the adjustment in E E mode See setup menu item 108 AUTO EE SELECT page
87. material server 1 00 Transferring Clips Direct FTP Function Copying clips directly between XDCAM devices In the field or another environment where the devices are not connected to a network you can copy upload clips between XDCAM devices by connecting them directly The example in the following procedure shows how to copy a clip from this unit to a PDW HD1500 Insert discs into both units and proceed as follows 1 Connect this unit and the PDW HD1500 by a network cable The cable can be either a cross cable or a straight cable Network cable not supplied PDW HD1500 2 se up the two units as follows Item Setting Item M50 in the maintenance menu DHCP ENABLE Item M59 in the maintenance menu UPnP ENABLE 3 Power both units off and on again and wait for about three minutes 4 Check that the IP addresses of the two units have been set as follows by the Auto IP function Item Setting 169 254 00C XXX X any number Item M51 in the maintenance menu IP ADDRESS PRESET D inthe clip list thumbnail screen of this unit select the clip to copy upload 6 Display the Thumbnail Menu T Select Upload Clips via Direct FTP and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob With selected the Select Transfer Type screen of the Upload Clips via Direct FTP command appears 8 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Select Remote Host scree
88. mode For details on charging battery packs refer to the operation manual for the battery charger Notes about battery usage Before using the batteries be sure to charge them fully with the special battery charger Refer to the operating instructions for your battery charger for more information about how to charge the batteries Batteries may not be completely charged if you charge them immediately after use when they are still warm You should wait until the batteries cool before charging them Attaching a battery pack Attaching and removing of the BP L80S Battery Pack is described below For details on attaching the BKP L551 refer to the installation manual for the BKP L551 Attach the BKP L551 to the side panel Em BKP L551 2 Align the grooves on the BP L80S with the projections on the BKP L551 Preparing Power Sources suoneiedejgd e je deu 29 suonejedejg e Jajdeyo 30 3 Slide the BP L80S as shown below so that the connectors on the BP L80S and the BKP L551 are connected 4 Connect the DC cable of the BKP L551 to the DC IN 12V connector Removing the battery pack With the lever pushed in slide the BP L80S out as shown below ois Checking the remaining battery power You can use the LEDs on the side panel of the battery to check the remaining power of the battery Initial Setup Initial Setup This unit is shipped with the area o
89. mode is always S regardless of the mode code specification S Stream mode default B Block mode C Compressed mode Input example MODE S LIST Sends a list of files from this unit to the remote computer Command syntax LIST lt SP gt options SP path name gt lt CRLF gt lt options gt can be any of the following a Also display file names that begin with e F Append to directory names The following data is transferred depending on whether lt path name gt specifies a directory or file Directory specified A list of the files in the specified directory File specified Information about the specified file No specification A list of the files in the current directory The wildcard characters any string and any character may be used in lt path name gt Input example 1 LIST a Clip Input example 2 LIST Clip MXF NLST Sends a list of file names from this unit to the remote computer with no other information Command syntax NLST SP options or path name gt lt CRLF gt The following options may be specified when no path name is specified a Also display file names that begin with e Display information other than file name gives the same result as the LIST command F Append to directory names The following data is transferred depending on whether lt path name gt specifies a directory or file Direc
90. on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is set to Cue up amp Play then pressing the PUSH SET S SEL knob has the same effect Shortcut List File Operations Overview A remote computer can be connected to this unit and used to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data files such as video and audio data files There are two ways to connect a remote computer FAM connection Connect the i LINK S400 connector on this unit to the i LINK IEEE1394 connector on the remote computer using an i LINK cable see page 33 FTP connection Connect the network connectors on this unit and the remote computer using a network cable see page 33 Directory structure The following figure shows the directory structure of discs visible to a remote computer This structure is not the same as the actual structure recorded on the disc Chapter root 9 INDEX XML ALIAS XML 9 DISCMETA XML MEDIAPRO XML uj pu pu ug ug SYSPRO XML E Clip 5 C0001 MXF C0001M01 XML C0001M02 KLV C0002 MXF C0002M01 XML ug pug pug mg ug C0002M02 KLV Qo omponent P0001 MXF 9 It m a E0001E01 SMI E0001M01 XML E0002E01 SMI ug pug ug ug E0002M01 XML C o C0001S01 MXF C0002S01 MXF J fil ug C0003S
91. operations do one of the following depending on whether an i LINK cable is connected i LINK cable is not connected Connect this unit and a remote computer with an i LINK cable i LINK cable is connected The unit is mounted automatically so you do not need to do anything The unit is powered off and an i LINK cable is connected Power the unit on You can enable and disable FAM connection from the function menu For details see page 48 FTP File Operations File operations between this unit and a remote computer can be carried out by the File Transfer Protocol called FTP below Preparations 1 Connect the network connectors of this unit and a remote computer with a network cable see connections illustration on page 33 Or connect this unit to the network to which the remote computer is connected see connections illustration on page 33 2 Set the IP address and other network setting items for this unit P For details see To change network settings page 150 If network settings have already been made Check the IP address of this unit For details see To check the assigned IP address page 150 1 This unit is able to acquire an IP address automatically from a DHCP server It also supports an Auto IP function to assign an IP address automatically when access from this unit to the DHCP server times out You can check DHCP settings and the assigned IP address on page M5 NETWORK of the maintenance menu
92. perform the following kinds of audio mixing Mixing of audio input signals Changing the channels of audio input signals and recording to disc Mixing of audio input signals and audio that has been recorded to disc sound on sound 1 Display setup menu item 819 AUDIO INPUT ARRANGE See page 125 for more information about setup menu operations ITEM 819 AUDIO INPUT ARRANGE Input channels Recording channels Linear Editing To return to the setup menu Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob without turning it Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to move the to the recording channel that you want to set up and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The screen changes to the input channel selection screen To return to the recording channel selection screen Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob without turning it Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to move gt to the input channel that you want to turn on and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob In this state you can turn the selected input channel on or off To toggle the input channel on highlighted or off Do one of the following Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob Press the or function button F3 or F4 To confirm the setting and return to the input channel selection screen Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To exchange input channels For example turn input channel 2 on for recording channel 1 and turn input channel 1 on
93. playback position on the disc Convenient disc based playback and searching Like previous products in the XDCAM series this unit supports a number of convenient search functions including scene selection thumbnail searches essence marks searches and expand searches Scene selection This function allows you to select clips from the disc and insert them into playlists Clips can be inserted and played back in any order Thumbnail searches The unit creates thumbnails from the first frame of each generated clip and displays them in thumbnail lists on the color LCD or an external monitor You can cue up clips very easily by simply by selecting them from thumbnail lists Essence mark searches Essence marks can be recorded at any scene during or after recording Lists of these marks can be displayed on the color LCD or an external monitor allowing you to quickly find scenes that were marked for later reference Expand searches This function allows you to look inside the clip selected in a thumbnail screen or inside the segment from a selected essence mark to the next essence mark The selection range is divided into 12 equal blocks and the first frames of those blocks are displayed as thumbnails By checking the thumbnails you can easily find the scene you want Filter Clips function You can select clips of a certain type from among all of the clips on a disc For example you can do the following Select clips in a certain video
94. properties Click Disc Properties in the Disc menu The disc properties of this unit appear in the Disc Properties page See Checking disc properties page 91 for more information about the various properties XDCAM HD Status Disc Properties Device Information userDiscID XDCAM HD Demo Disc TITLEOO1 w oer 0 00 33 18 NEN 43 min ro EES Hours Meter Software Version Disc Properties Thumbnails Maintenance Network Account Setup Menu 2008 Sony Corporation Software Update License Registration To display clip thumbnails Click Thumbnails in the Disc menu A page of thumbnails of clips on the disc appears Each thumbnail page displays up to 12 thumbnails Like the thumbnails in the unit s GUI screens see page 67 the thumbnails display several information items including index picture changed marks S marks clip flag icons and lock icons Thumbnails 002 016 003 016 Esa T f fiait i Z2 imi 12916 lt lt lt 001 012 gt gt gt Device Information Hours Meter Software Version Disc Properties Thumbnails Maintenance Network Account Setup Menu Software Update License Registration When multiple pages exist you can switch pages by clicking lt lt back five pages lt back one page gt forward one page or gt gt forward five pages To display clip properties In the Thumbnails page
95. related data files are single byte letters numbers and symbols However the following symbols cannot be used lt gt l f you click Cancel in the download dialog or if the download is cancelled in some other way with the browser still connected to the unit by FTP click Back to Thumbnails to return to the thumbnails screen or exit the web browser Disc Operations SU9BINS MD ul suonejedo s Ja deyD 95 SU9919S MD ui suoneiado c 1e1deu 96 Transferring Clips Direct FTP Function You can transfer clips MXF files between this unit and external devices over a network This unit has an Direct FTP function which allows you to connect to any XDCAM device or computer with an FTP server function and transfer files with a few simple operations in the GUI screen The following table lists the types of file transfers that this unit can execute Transfer direction Transfer target Function Upload One or more clips put Multiple clips with clip list Part of one clip partial put Transfer direction Transfer target Function One clip get Download File transfers with this function are limited to clips high resolution data and clip list files To transfer files of other types proxy AV data files in the General and User Data directories and so on operate after establishing a FAM or FTP connection see page 103
96. select a clip by clicking its thumbnail The properties of that clip appear in the Clip Properties page See Checking clip properties page 79 for more information about the various properties XDCAM HD Status Clip Properties Device Information Hours Meter Software Version Disc Properties Thumbnails HTTP Download FTP Download HTTP Downi jon i FTP Download Tm 7 26619452 byte Maintenance KOOT 1179648 byte HTTP Download FTP Download CMU TE MM 3688 byte Account Setup Menu 001 016 Software Update C0001 License Registration TITLE00001 Title2 Nagano Trekking AV Format MPEGHD422 1080 8ch 59 94i 17 54 32 27 0 00 18 03 24 FEB 2009 15 40 09 00 25 FEB 2009 21 05 09 00 PDW 700 SN 03043 16 9 Back to Thumbnails To download high resolution clip data HIGH resolution file proxy AV data LOW resolution file or metadata Clip NRT metadata click the FTP Download or HTTP Download button to the right of the item that you want Then click Save in the dialog that appears and specify the save destination The specified data is downloaded to the specified location in your computer FTP download limitations The following limitations apply to FTP download operations They do not apply to HTTP download operations The characters that can be used in the names of clip
97. set automatically to the default and you do not need to make the Port and Path settings Simply selecting the Host Name or as appropriate the Description is enough to fulfill the requirements for connection If the User Name or Password of the device that you want to connect to changes set them here Set the various items To select an item Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to move the cursor and then push the PUSH SET S SEL knob A software keyboard appears so that you can enter a setting Select Connect and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The settings are saved and the Connecting Status screen appears Upload Clips via Direct FTP Connecting Status Open Remote Host FTP Login Change Directory The following table lists the various stages that appear in the connection status screen and describes the corresponding processing Item Description DNS Name Resolving When host was specified by a host name instead of an IP address the unit is querying a DNS server for the host s IP address ping echo back The unit has issued a ping communications established command and is waiting for a response Open Remote Host The unit is connecting to the remote host over the specified port FTP Login The unit is logging in to the remote host with specified user name and password Change Directory When a path was specified the unit is changing to the specified directory
98. slider shows the relative length of currently displayed clips within all of the clips When you have a large number of thumbnails you can save time by using the Skip Scroll function to jump directly to the thumbnail you want see page 73 Q Recording format The recording format of the selected clip is displayed as a combination of the following information Video format logo Number of system lines Recording quality Number of audio channels Clip date and time Displays the date and time when the selected clip was shot and recorded Q Duration Displays the duration recording time of the selected clip When multiple clips are selected displays the total recording time of the selected clips 1 Thumbnail display items T T v Q Index picture Displays an image to stand for the content of the clip The index picture is normally the first frame of the clip Index picture changed mark This mark like the folded over corner of a page that you want to remember appears when the index picture has been changed to any frame other than the first frame of a clip see page 76 When you cue up a clip the unit always cues up the first frame even when the index picture has been changed to a different frame S mark This mark appears when shot marks or other essence marks have been set in the clip see page 51 The chapter thumbnail screen can be displayed for clips that show this mark s
99. stream output 4 BKP L551 Battery Adaptor is required Features of this unit The principal features of this unit are as follows MPEG HD422 codec High quality video and audio recording and playback The MPEG HD422 codec provides video compression compliant with the MPEG 2 422P Q HL standard It enables HD 4 2 2 50 Mbps digital component file recording in the 10801 1 080 effective scanning lines interlaced or 720P 720 effective scanning lines progressive format currently in use by many broadcast facilities Uncompressed PCM recording of 24 bit 48 kHz audio enables 8 channel audio recording at high sound quality 1 MPEG HD422 is a trademark of Sony Corporation Long recording times PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 supports dual layer Professional Discs 50 GB When dual layer Professional Discs are used this unit can record about 95 minutes Recording and playback functions Support for multiple SD and HD codecs In addition to the MPEG HD422 codec this unit supports the MPEG HD codec It can record HD 4 2 0 digital component files at both 10801 35 25 18 Mbps and 720P 35 25 Mbps allowing HD operation across a wide range of recording times and application objectives The unit is also capable of SD IMX 30 40 50 Mbps or DVCAM codec recording and playback 1 HD1500 When the PDBK S1500 or PDBK F1500 option is installed 2 MPEG HD is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation 3 Playback only suppor
100. the currently selected sub clip s will be inserted Add Sub Clip 002 lt 017 035 TC 00 30 40 13 TC 01 01 28 25 TC 00 09 43 14 JL aan TC 00 24 24 29 TC 00 24 34 27 TC 00 24 46 22 TC 00 24 56 24 ia 00 13 48 24 a wes Scene Selection To display the total duration after addition of the selected clip Press the SHIFT button 4 In the Scene Selection window move the I cursor to the location where you want to insert the clip The existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and right of the I cursor D Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The selected clip is inserted as a sub clip and a mark appears on the thumbnail in the Scene Selection window Scene Selection Clip List Editing SueeJog MH ui suonejedo c Ja deyD 85 su 199 f1 ui suoneiedo g 1e1deu 86 To check the addition results Move the cursor 6 Press the RESET RETURN button This returns you to the Clip thumbnail screen 7 Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips 8 Save the clip list see page 89 In step 1 you can hold down the SHIFT button when you press the PUSH SET S SEL knob This is a shortcut that displays the Add Sub Clip screen immediately You can also save the clip list immediately in step 5 by executing the Save Clip List command in the Disc Menu Adding sub clips from the clip list thumbnail screen See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations
101. the HOME page of the function menu is set to ON The usable formats displayed when no disc is loaded in this unit are as follows Display Usable format HD 422 HD420 HD420HQ HD420SP HD420LP 9 HD422 HD422 a HD420LP supports playback only When the PDBK S1500 option is installed Display Usable format HD 422 HD 420 DEDE vc HD420 HD420HQ HD420SP HD420LP 9 IMX MPEG IMX 50Mbps 40Mbps 30Mbps DVCAM DVCAM HD422 HD422 a HD420LP supports playback only System frequency Displays the system frequency of the clips recorded on the disc O Video format Displays the video format and bitrate of the clips recorded on the disc D Audio format Displays the audio format of the clips recorded on the disc Q System information Power status ECKE DEFAULT Menu setting status Remote interface NM REPEAT Clip playback mode SHTL JOG Jog shuttle dial mode Power status Displays the status of the power supply to the unit Display Power status AC power Front Panel 23 seq Jo suonounJ pue seweN z Jeideu Sued Jo suonounJ pue sewen z Jeldeup 24 Power status Battery Battery almost exhausted Flashes at 1 Hz Battery exhausted Flashes at 4 Hz AC power power saving mode Battery power saving mode Battery power saving mode low Menu setting statu
102. the connection method for the 5 i LINK S400 connector FAM FAM PC REMOTE FAM connection TS TS connection 1 30 Setup Menu Menu items in the 200s relating to the remote control interface Item number Item name Settings 257 NETWORK ENABLE Select the remote control switch positions which enable network connections net network Only when the switch is set to NET n amp 9P network amp remote 9PIN When the switch is set to NET and when the switch is set to HEMOTE and setup menu item 214 is set to 9PIN 258 LIVE LOGGING MODE Specify the Live Logging operation mode off Disable the Live Logging function live mode Select Live mode Supported operations are metadata editing only live view mode Select Live View mode Supported operations are proxy AV data streaming and metadata editing n Live View mode the run mode is always Free Run regardless of the setting of RUN MODE on page P5 TC of the function menu It is not possible to preset the timecode to be recorded The Disc Exchange Cache function and Clip Continuous Rec function cannot be enabled in Live View mode FAM or FTP connections cannot be established during a Live View mode connection Live view mode connections cannot be established during a FAM or FTP connection a HD1500 When the PDBK S1500 or PDBK F1500 option is installed connections the device connected to the REMOTE 9P connector cannot
103. the date and time when the clip that contains the selected thumbnail was recorded or last modified Clip name Displays the name or a title of the clip that contains the selected frame see page 66 Displaying menus Thumbnail Menu The Thumbnail Menu displays menu items that are valid for the currently displayed thumbnail screen Overview SU9BINS MD ul suoneiado s Ja deyD 69 To display the Thumbnail Menu Clip thumbnail screen To display the Thumbnail Menu press the MENU button with a thumbnail screen displayed To return to the original Clip Navigating sibling relati 018 036 screen press the MENU button again or press the RESET SUNT ae RETURN button lt TC 00 29 19 23 TC 00 29 38 TC 00 29 50 04 TC 00 30 25 11 7 Bie f n L1 TC 00 30 40 13 TC 00 09 43 14 TC 00 24 24 29 i um 4 Pa S TC 00 24 34 27 TC 00 24 46 22 TC 00 25 42 08 TC 00 25 49 07 DATE amp TIME 30 NOV 2005 14 14 bur 0 23 22 26 gomar zi END OSTANDBY OREC INI Thumbnail Menu Clip Information Select Index Picture Clip Properties MENU button Add Sub Clips SHIFT SET RESET RETURN button Delete Clip SHIFT RESET Lock Unlock Clip SHIFT STOP Set Clip Flag gt Skip Scroll Thumbnail Search gt Thumbnail Menu of the clip thumbnail screen Shortcut operations Shortcut button names are displayed next
104. the front panel are enabled dis disable Disabled ena enable Enabled 2 CONTROL PANEL Select operable buttons on the front panel are enabled dis disable Disabled ena enable Enabled 119 VARIABLE SPEED LIMIT IN KEY Select the playback speed range when carrying out playback in variable speed mode from the front panel of this unit off off 2 to 2 2 to 2 times normal speed on on 0 to 1 0 to 1 times normal speed 121 FRAME PB MODE Select the variable playback field frame mode auto Field playback frame Frame playback Compared to field playback frame playback gives more detail during playback of still pictures 130 DISPLAY DIMMER CONTROL Set the brightness of the indication on the LCD 10 25 50 75 100 131 AUDIO VOLUME Select whether each of the CH 1 ALL CH CH 2 to CH 4 adjustment knobs on the control panel is effective to control the audio recording level and playback level on each channel or the CH 1 ALL CH adjustment knob alone functions as a master control to control the audio level on all channels together each Each of the CH 1 ALL CH CH 2 to CH 4 adjustment knobs is effective to control each channel all The CH 1 ALL CH adjustment knob alone functions as a master control When all is selected the ALL CH indicator under the CH 1 ALL CH adjustment knob lights up 140 AREA MARKER Select whether to display the disp
105. the maintenance menu to display the NETWORK menu and then proceed as follows Contact your network administrator if you have any questions about the proper settings for these items To set the communications speed 1 2 Select maintenance menu item M5 NETWORK gt M54 LINK SPEED Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The communications speeds AUTO 10Mbps 100Mbps and 1000Mbps appear and the arrow flashes Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob or use the MARKI or MARK2 button to select a communications speed To return to the factory default setting Press the RESET RETURN button Press the SAVE function button F5 This returns to the NETWORK menu To set the communications protocol 1 Select maintenance menu item M5 NETWORK gt M55 DUPLEX 2 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The communications protocols AUTO Full Duplex Half Duplex appear and the arrow flashes Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob or use the MARKI or MARK2 button to select a communications protocol To return to the factory default setting Press the RESET RETURN button Press the SAVE function button F5 This returns to the NETWORK menu Maintenance Menu snue wN Z 13 deyo 151 ejepeje u Buiuuejd 9 saj deyo 152 Planning Metadata Overview Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata about the clips to be shot and recorded To use planning metadata you will need to save a file in advance
106. timecode played f A 7 back tron tha disc F2 Unassigned function button EXT Synchronize to external timecode F3 Unassigned function button input to the TIME CODE IN 7 s nn ctor F4 Unassigned function button SDI Synchronize to timecode F5 SYNC Sets the sync phase of HD output embedded into HDSDI signal input signals While the setting value is to SD HDSDI INPUT connector flashing turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to adjust the sync phase of output u A WOES signals with respect to the input Tne ordin E ee reference signal over the range 15 us to the timecode data in the TS signals Thedisplay Shiows I 2 qe E127 F6 FINE Makes fine adjustment to the sync phase F2 PRST RGN Selects the following for the internal timecode generator PRESET Presets an initial value for the timecode generated by the internal timecode generator as specified from the control panel or remotely from the device connected to the REMOTE 9P connector This is valid when INT is selected with the F1 TCG item on this page The operation is the same as TC when anything else is selected TC Generate timecode synchronized to timecode read by the internal timecode reader VITC Generate timecode synchronized to VITC read by the internal timecode reader of HD output signals While the setting value is flashing turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to adjust the sync phase of output signals with respect to the input reference sign
107. to the menu items of commands that have shortcuts see page 102 Shortcuts displayed within parentheses should be used with all menus closed SU99J9S IMD ui suonejedo s JeydeyD Thumbnail Menu submenus The Thumbnail Search Menu contains the basic commands for thumbnail searches The Thumbnail View Menu contains the basic commands for moving to other menus Disc Menu The Disc Menu allows you to do the following Underlined values in the Operation Setting column are the factory defaults Item Operation Setting Load Clip List Load clip list into this units memory Save Clip List Save a clip list on the disc under its current name overwriting the old contents Save Clip List as Save a clip list on the disc under a new name Delete Clip List Delete a clip list from the disc Clear Clip List Clear the current clip list from the unit s memory Load Planning Metadata Select Drive Select a media disc or drive and load planning metadata into this unit s memory 70 Overview Item Operation Setting Planning Metadata Properties Display the properties of the currently loaded planning metadata Planning Clip Name Suffix Change the serial number added to clip names created by using planning metadata Clear Planning Metadata Clear the currently loaded planning metadata from the unit s memory Lock or Delete All Clips Sub Item Lock All Clips Lock all
108. trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and other countries Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVIS
109. us ee ipei ip So v qr e eames 156 Troubleshooting a cusccrtackte ce ma DIR do Hab b ita dx Ei ILE e ePe2 42 aaa AF ad 158 P drin EHE 158 Error HIGSSADES cisciehspedtievedi ev tie a EEES Eg E TEENE UIE TENES 169 To eject discs with the unit powered off sss 169 Specifications m 169 Using UMID Date creo cessi ani E Rao s ku ee Ug du uiua cu x Cu DI eek oid 172 Ahcillary Dalai ixi RC hp beue sik Fu e FE Uu mai Dn in e ri ies 174 Ancillary data in HDSDI SDSDI signals eese 174 Ancillary data in MXF files recente creto onere Foe dae ee sega 174 General MXF metadata 2 edite pde doses 174 Closed Capaon dabit ees o dois a lo ence nade 175 Correspondence between Setting Items of the HKDV 900 and Setup Menu of This Unit eeeessseesss 179 8 Table of Contents List of Supported USB Keyboards 180 Trademarks and Licenses esee erret 183 MPEG 4 visual patent portfolio license eesee 183 MPEG 2 video patent portfolio license esee 183 About IJG Independent JPEG Group eee 183 Character display software TT ype 3 eer riis 183 JADOUUDOESDIIDO quien ertet ro pote FINI hd Ve RERUM iro ve ONE SR PR iS 183 About DOPAD ove aie tor aces eas dete pip as rn neq RN EE 186 GIOSSANY aie
110. visual data It is used to bring greater efficiency to the flow of operations from material acquisition through editing and to make it easier to find and reuse material As one of application of metadata the UMID has been internationally standardized What is a UMID A UMID Unique Material Identifier is a unique identifier for audio visual material defined by the SMPTE 330M 2004 standard A UMID may be either as a 32 byte Basic UMID or an Extended UMID which includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes For details refer to SMPTE 330M Extended UMID 64 bytes Basic UMID 32 bytes Source Pack 32 bytes A globally unique ID is automatically recorded for every clip 4 gt gt Universal label L Instance Material Number Time Date Spatial Country Org User No Coordinates 12 bytes 1 3bytes 16 bytes 8 bytes 12 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional information such as location time date company ID and so on The UMID is applied as follows Material No Source Pack Instance No ID generated when shooting Same as the above Shooting information when where and who Same as the above Original material 00 00 00 Copied material generation number 1 byte random number 2 bytes t Distinguish between the original material and copied mate
111. with the knob You can also cause this to simultaneously adjust the output volume from the AUDIO MONITORR L connectors on the rear panel To do this set setup menu item 114 AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT LEVEL to var Disc slot and EJECT button Insert a disc in the disc slot To remove the disc press the EJECT button Front Panel 1 Audio level adjustment section CH 1 ALL CH CH 2 to CH 4 adjustment knobs CH 1 CH 3 O CH CH 2 O CH4 VARIABLE VARIABLE switch CH 1 ALL CH CH 2 to CH 4 audio level adjustment knobs Depending on the setting of the VARIABLE switch these adjust the input audio or playback audio levels of channels to 4 You can adjust levels of channels 5 to 8 using the function menu See page 46 for details By the setting of setup menu item 131 AUDIO VOLUME you can enable the CH 1 ALL CH adjustment knob to simultaneously adjust all eight channels When this simultaneous adjustment is enabled the ALL CH indicator lights VARIABLE audio level adjustment selector switch This selects whether input audio levels or playback audio levels are adjusted by the CH 1 ALL CH and CH 2 to CH 4 adjustment knobs for channels 1 to 4 or by the function menu setting for channels 5 to 8 REC Adjust the input audio levels The playback audio levels are fixed at their preset values PRESET The audio levels are fixed at their preset values PB Adjust the playback audio levels
112. 0 dB FS sine wave signal When you set the A1 INPUT item on page P2 AUDIO of the function menu to SG the internal signal generator operates and outputs simultaneous test signals to channels 1 to 8 see page 45 815 AUDIO SAMPLING RATE Select the mode of operation of the sampling rate converter for AES CONVERTER EBU input to channels 1 to 4 off Do not operate on Operate 819 AUDIO INPUT ARRANGE 9 Set up mixing of audio signals For details see To set up mixing of audio input signals page 58 823 NON AUDIO FLAG PB Control non audio flags in digital audio output Sub item 1 CH1 CH2 During playback except E E mode set non audio flags in digital audio output to the following states 2 CH3 CH4 on Set to on data is non audio 3 CH5 CH6 auto Set as follows 4 CH7 CH8 When data is read from disc and confirmed Follow the data When data from disc is not confirmed Maintain current state 824 ANALOG LINE OUTPUT SELECT Select the analog audio signals tracks 1 to 8 to be assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 tr1 2 Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 tr3 4 Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 tr5 6 Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 tr7 8 Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 LI 827 AES EBU AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT Select the audio signals to assign to AES EBU audio output channels z Sub item 8 1 CH1 CH2 tr1 2 Tracks 1 and 2 assign
113. 0 or XDS PD2000 are inserted in an XDS PD1000 XDS PD2000 or PDW HD1550 but recordings that were in progress will be lost Troubleshooting 1 59 xipueddy 160 During front panel operations Alarm message in time data display area Alarm message in video monitor screen Description action KEY INHI 9 KEY INHIBIT MODE IS SELECTED This appears when the KEY INHI switch is ON SET KEY INHIBIT SWITCH TO OFF Set the KEY INHI switch to OFF REMOTE 9 REMOTE MODE IS SELECTED Set the remote control switch to LOCAL SET REMOTE LOCAL NETWORK SWITCH TO LOCAL No Disc 9 NO DISC Insert a disc and try again REC INHI AUTO FORMATTING WAS NOT Set the disc s Write Inhibit tab to enable recording COMPLETED see page 49 THE DISC WRITE PROTECT TAB IS SET TO SAVE PLEASE EJECT DISC THE DISC WRITE PROTECT TAB IS SET TO SAVE AUTO FORMATTING WAS NOT This appears when REC INH on the HOME page of COMPLETED the function menu is set to ON REC INHIBIT MODE IS SELECTED Set REC INH to OFF see page 44 CHECK FUNCTION MENU PLEASE EJECT DISC REC INHIBIT This appears if you press the REC button when a disc error has occurred Correct the disc error and try again No Clip D NO CLIP This appears when a playback search or delete operation is attempted on a disc with no clips recorded on it Insert a disc with clips recorded on it Disc Top 9 DISC TOP This app
114. 01 MXF Em UserData General N NI Continued a Root directory b Only when sub item NAMING FORM of setup menu item 036 is set to free c Files generated when voice over editing is executed on the PDW HR1 Overview suoneledo ei4 9 Jeydeu 103 suonejedo aji4 9 1e1deu 104 Continued ji PROAV B ALIAS XML A ALIAS BUP L CLPR A CMPTR DISCINFO XML DISCINFO BUP uj ut uit DISCMETA XML AM EDTR INDEX XML ug ug INDEX BUP FS USERDATA File operation restrictions This section explains which operations are possible on files stored in each directory When required the following operation tables distinguish reading and writing from partial reading and writing Read Read data sequentially from the start to the end of the file Partial read Read only a part of the data in the file Root directory Write Write data sequentially from the start to the end of the file Partial write Write data to a part of the file only Operations other than Read and Partial read are possible only when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording enabled File name Content Operations Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete INDEX XML Contains data for management of the Yes No No No No material on the disc ALIAS X
115. 1 1 Click the id icon displayed in the remote computer s taskbar and then click Eject Solid state disk The Sony XDCAM PDW IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device device can now be safely removed from the computer F1600 or HD1500 appears This unit can now resume normal operations The limitations described in Operation limitations during FAM connections no longer apply 2 Disconnect the i LINK cable as required To reconnect To reconnect after exiting file operations do one of the following depending on whether an i LINK cable is connected i LINK cable is not connected Connect this unit and a remote computer with an i LINK cable i LINK cable is connected Disconnect the i LINK cable from either this unit or the remote computer wait for at least 10 seconds and then reconnect the disconnected cable The unit is powered off and an i LINK cable is connected Power the unit on You can enable and disable FAM connection from the function menu For details see page 48 File Operations in File Access Mode for Windows suonejedo e 9 1e1deu 111 suonejedo e i4 9 1e1deu 112 File Operations in File Access Mode for Macintosh File access mode operating environment Operating system requirements for file operations by file access mode are as follows Computer operating system Mac OS X v10 4 11 or higher Preparations The FAM driver must be downloaded and installed
116. 1 titlel and title 2 of a clip by using a software keyboard 1 The NAMING FORM sub item on setup menu item 036 must be set to free see page 124 The only characters that can be entered are the alphanumeric characters and characters in the fonts supported by this version of the unit s firmware Japanese kanji cannot be entered Names and titles must be within the specified character length limits Thumbnail Operations 79 SueeJoS IND ul suoneiedo s 1e1deuo 80 Some symbols cannot be used in clip names The keys for those symbols are disabled when you are editing a clip name See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Inthe Clip Properties screen turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select the item you want to edit Name Title P or Title2 1 Only ASCII characters can be used for Titlel 2 Press PUSH SET S SEL knob An input screen appears for the selected item If the area of use setting is UC for regions outside Japan a keyboard appears that corresponds to the font selected with Disc Menu item Settings gt Select Font A Japanese keyboard appears if the area of use setting is J for Japan Set Title of Clip 001 041 ya e w CapsLock SShitt z Cancel 3 Edit the string in the edit box To enter characters Use the MARKI 4 MARK2 IN or OUT buttons or turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select a key and then press the PUSH SET S SEL kn
117. 112 reconnecting 113 File Operations in File Access Mode for Windows 110 exiting file operations 111 making connections 110 operating on files 111 preparations 110 reconnecting 111 recording continuous timecode 119 Filter Clips function 76 Formatting discs 93 Frame frequency groups 50 Front panel 15 32 changing the angle 32 pulling out 32 returning to original position 32 FTP file operations 113 command list 114 loggingin 114 logging out 114 making connections 113 preparations 113 recording continuous timecode 119 Function buttons F1 to F6 18 Function menu 22 44 HOME page 44 P1 VIDEO page 45 P2 AUDIO page 45 P3 AUDIO page 46 P4 AUDIO page 46 P5 TC page 47 P6 REF page 47 P7 OTHER page 47 G Gigabit Ethernet 12 Glossary 187 GUI screen 65 operations 72 H Handle 15 Index HDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER connectors 26 remote control function 53 HOME button 19 i LINK S400 connector 26 IN button 17 indicator 17 Index picture changing 78 Initial Setup 30 J Jog dial 17 mode 62 Jog shuttle transport indicators 17 K KEY INHI switch 16 L LEVEL adjustment knob 16 Linear editing 56 Live Logging function 54 Loading unloading disc 49 M Maintenance periodic 156 MAINTENANCE connector 27 Maintenance menu 145 communication speed 151 items 145 network settings 150 operations 149 MARKI MARK buttons 17 Menu bank setting 124 changing settings 126 configuration 120 disc menu 70 function
118. 29 Menu items in the 100s relating to the control panels Item number Item name Settings 150 REC MODE Select the recording mode normal Normal recording mode D EXC disc exchange cache Disc Exchange Cache mode C REC clip continuous rec Clip Continuous Rec mode 151 GUI OPERATION Select whether to disable the display of the Thumbnail Menu and Disc Menu when this unit is in any mode other than stop mode ena enable Do not disable stop via stop Enable the display of menus in the stop mode dis disable Disable 153 FIND MODE Specify the frame to be cued up when the PREV or NEXT button is pressed clip The first frame of the clip R ST clip amp rec start mark The frame where a Rec Start essence mark is set if no essence mark is set the first frame of the clip SHOTMARK1 Shot Mark1 154 SINGLE CLIP PLAY MODE Put the unit into single clip playback mode or exit from single clip playback mode off Exits from single clip playback mode Puts the unit into continuous playback mode on Puts the unit into single clip playback mode a The disc is ejected after recording stops b The unit enters stop mode when the PLAY button is pressed It enters freeze picture mode jog shuttle or variable mode when the SHTL JOG button or VAR JOG button is pressed Menu items in the 200s relating to the remote control interface Item number Item name Settings 201
119. 29 97P 50i 25P or 23 98P 00 29 32 When the number of system lines is 720 and the system frequency is 59 94P or 50P Set this item by adjusting to the required position while viewing the monitor Setup Menu snue wN Z Je deuj 121 snue N 4 Jejdeuj 122 Item number 005 Item name DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT Settings Determine the kind of text information to be output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector T amp sta time data amp status Time data and the units status T amp UB time data amp UB Time data and user bits data When UB user bits data is selected with CNTR SEL on the HOME page of the function menu the user bits data and time data arranged in that order are displayed T amp CNT time data amp CNT Time data and counter count When COUNTER is selected with CNTR SEL on the HOME page of the function menu the counter count and time data arranged in that order are displayed T amp T time data amp timecode Time data and timecode TC or VITC T amp clp time data amp clip no Time data and clip number time time data only Time data only 006 LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE Determine which recording and playback control buttons on the front panel are enabled when this unit is controlled from external equipment dis all disable All buttons and switches are
120. 38 F KEY CONFIG Turning the PUSH SET S SEL knob while holding down the PAGE HOME button changes the page forward or backward Pressing F1 to F6 buttons while holding down the PAGE HOME button switches the page directly to pages P1 to P6 Pressing the F1 button again while the page P1 is displayed switches the page to P7 Pressing the F2 Basic Operations of the Function Menu button again while the page P2 is displayed switches the page to P8 To clear the function menu from the screen Press the DISPLAY button to switch to the video monitor display To change the setting of a function menu item Use the function buttons To select the value of the setting item Press the button to the left of each setting item to change the value of the item Keep pressing the button until the value you want appears To set the value of the setting item Press the button to the left of each setting item so that the setting value flashes to enable adjustment of the value and then turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to increase or decrease the value Turning the PUSH SET S SEL knob while holding down the SHIFT button increases the increment of adjustment Pressing the button to the left of each setting item while the setting value is flashing causes the value to stop flashing and completes the adjustment Function menu settings The following tables list the setting items on each page and describe their setting values Underlined values are
121. 4 5 l6 a gt Shift Z X C V B N M gt Shift 4 1 2 3 ga j a End J PgDn Bn Ctrl Alt Al Ctrl 0 bE Y md Ins Del French France ie Ie z ti i A 2 num Tab i Va EE HIM Suppr Fin F A i 4 ZEFPFPFPFEFE a EE gt shit gt IW Xx v Is s n 1 l2 s lt Fin Entr Ctrl Alt Alt Gr Ctr 0 Di md Inser Suppr i 3 German Germany 2 Q e TN lg We Jl li UND Bild Num x l ella ella is lle Iz dis Lilo Ilo ig Nr IL Einfg Post D a Lo Tab Q W IIE R T Z U l O P y i Enter Bild 7 8 8 all U a pad Entf Ende Y Post 4 Bild ob o iA Is IP IF G IH IJ IK IIL l WA I 4 5 6 gt Shift Y X C V B N M E Shift 4 1 2 3 lt i us Ende j Bild Strg Ait Alt Gr Strg 0 SUR gt nts Entf 1 80 List of Supported USB Keyboards Italian Italy
122. 410 nm Emission duration Continuous Laser output power 135 mW max of pulse peak 65 mW max of CW Standard IEC60825 1 2001 Egenskaber for laserdiode Belgelaengde 400 til 410 nm Str lingsvarighed Kontinuerlig Afgivet lasereffekt 135 mW maks str letoppunkt 65 mW maks ved kontinuerlig str ling Standard IEC60825 1 2001 Tekniska data f r laserdiod Vaglangd 400 till 410 nm Emissionslangd Kontinuerlig Laseruteffekt 135 mW max f r pulstopp 65 mW max f r kontinuerlig v g Standard IEC60825 1 2001 Egenskaper for laserdiode B lgelengde 400 til 410 nm Str lingsvarighet Uavbrutt Utgangseffekt for laser 135 mW maks av pulsheyde 65 mW maks av CW Standard IEC60825 1 2001 CAUTION For U S A CAUTION ATTENTION VORSICHT ADVARSEL ADVARSEL VARNING VARO For EUROPE This label is located on the top panel of the drive unit Denna etikett finns pa ovansidan av driftenheten Denne m rkat sidder pa drevenhedens verste panel Tama kyltti sijaitsee ajurilaitteen ylapinnalla Dette merket er plassert p oversiden av driverenheten CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure WARNING Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss In order to use t
123. 5 seconds and the system exits the menus To change more than one setting be sure to press the SAVE function button F5 after making the settings To return menu settings to their factory default settings After changing menu settings use the following procedure to return the settings to their factory default settings setting initialization To return a particular setting to its factory default setting In the screen that selects the setting of that item press the RESET RETURN button For example proceed as follows to return the 005 DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT item to its default setting This assumes that the setting has been changed from the factory default time data amp status in step 3 of the procedure in To change the settings of menu items page 126 1 Press the RESET RETURN button time data amp status factory default setting is selected 2 Press the SAVE function button F5 The setting returned to its factory default is saved in memory as the current setting To return all settings to their factory default settings 1 2 Press the MENU button to display the setup menu Press the RESET RETURN button A message appears to confirm whether you wish to return all settings to their factory default settings Message on the video Initialize all items to factory monitor display preset values Message in the time data Init setup display area Press the SAVE fun
124. 500 When the PDBZ UPG02 Software Upgrade Key is installed b IHD1500 When the PDBK F1500 option is installed M4 SETUP MAINTENANCE Items relating to the setup menu Item Setting M40 EXTENDED MENU Select whether to display the extended menu DISABLE Do not display ENABLE Display M41 CUSTOMIZE Select whether to enable the customization function of the setup menu DISABLE Do not display ENABLE Display Maintenance Menu snue wN Z Je deuj 147 Item M46 MENU DATA CONTROL M4 SETUP MAINTENANCE Items relating to the setup menu Setting M461 MENU Displays the status of the menu bank where the current menu settings are stored STATUS DISPLAY M462 SAVE Select whether to temporarily back up save setup menu settings before operations such as MENU DATA software upgrades SAVE function button F5 Back up save the settings MENU button Return to next highest menu level without backing up M463 LOAD Select whether to restore load setting that were backed up saved with the SAVE MENU MENU DATA DATA item SAVE function button F5 Restore load the settings MENU button Return to the next highest menu level without restoring M47 SETUP BANK4 Select the bank to be stored in menu bank 4 or reset menu bank 4 CURRENT TO BANK4 Store the current menu settings in menu bank 4 BANK1 TO BANK4 Store the menu bank 1 settings in menu bank 4 BANK2 TO BANK4 St
125. 65 Alarm message in GUI screen Description action Some Essence Mark cannot be Moved The essence mark cannot be moved This appears when an attempt is made to move an essence mark that cannot be moved with a Move Essence Mark operation Rec Start and Cut essence marks cannot be moved Clip is Locked The clip is locked This appears when an attempt is made to delete a clip set the clip thumbnail or delete a shot mark when the clip is locked All Clips are Locked All clips are locked This appears when an attempt is made to execute a Lock All Clips operation when all clips are already locked All Clips are Unlocked All clips are unlocked This appears when an attempt is made to execute an Unlock All Clips operation when all clips are already unlocked Command Disabled This appears when an attempt is made to perform Format Disc operation while Setting Format Disc is set to Disable A File with the Name you Specified Already Exists Specify a Different Name This appears when an attempt is made to set an existing clip name while changing the clip name using Set Clip Name Set NAMING FORM to free This appears when an attempt is made to change the clip name using Set Clip Name even though NAMING FORM is not set to free see page 108 No Flash Drive This appears when an attempt is made to select USB Flash Drive in the media selection screen under Load Planning Metadata S
126. 8 timecode data on Add RP188 timecode data Setup Menu Menu items in the 900s relating to digital process Item number Item name Settings 923 AUTO SQUEEZE 9 Select whether to use auto squeeze mode off Do not use on Use 930 DOWN CONVERTER MODE DC Select the down converter mode crop Select the edge crop mode I box Select the letter box mode squez Select the squeeze mode 931 DOWN CONVERTER LETTER BOX Select the aspect ratio of the down converter output when menu item MODE DC 930 is set to I box 16 9 Set the aspect ratio of the HD SD converter output to 16 9 14 9 Set the aspect ratio of the HD SD converter output to 14 9 13 9 Set the aspect ratio of the HD SD converter output to 13 9 932 H CROP POSITION DC Adjust the H crop the horizontal position when cropping in the edge crop mode of the down converter output when menu item 930 is set to crop 120 to 0 to 120 934 CROSS COLOR DC Adjust the down converter cross color 0 to 8to 15 935 DETAIL GAIN DC Adjust the down converter image enhancer the sharpness of edge enhancement 0 to 7FH 936 LIMITER DC Adjust the down converter image enhancer the maximum detail level added to emphasize the original signal 0 to 20H to 3FH 937 CRISP DC Adjust the down converter image enhancer the threshold amplitude at which low amplitude signals are not emphasized 0 to FH 938 LEVEL D
127. AV Full DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO Delete unneeded GENERAL files FOR MORE RECORDING SPACE DELETE NON AV DATA GENERAL FILES Index File UNSUPPORT INDEX FILE Use another disc DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO File System CURRENT VERSION OF THE This appears when you insert a disc that can be SOFTWARE SETS THE DISC WRITE played back but not recorded PROTECTED Exchange the disc for one with a file system FILE SYSTEM ON THE DISC INHIBITS punc by this unit Or format the disc see WRITING page 3v Loading LOADING This appears if you press a button while a disc is loading Wait until the disc has finished loading and try again Unloading a UNLOADING This appears if you press a button while a disc is unloading Wait until the disc has finished unloading and try again Clip lock CLIP IS LOCKED This appears when an operation is attempted on a UNLOCK CLIP IN THUMBNAIL MENU locked clip or when an edit preset command is received for such a clip Use the Thumbnail Menu to unlock the clip see page 82 and try again File Access CANNOT CHANGE SETTINGS DURING This appears when an attempt is made to change the FILE ACCESS setting of PC RMT ENABLE DISABLE on page P7 OTHER of the function menu while accessing a file or processing the command with PC REMOTE Troubleshooting Alarm message in time data display area Alarm message in video monitor screen Description action Inh
128. Ade une p T eon Tune 96 Upload e ops euo od ier adea iue ake once oss casein anda RUP NEGAT 97 Downloading clips eet eet in eer aevo RS e v Re Deve dens 100 Copying clips directly between XDCAM devices 101 SHOMCUE qa Br gem 102 Chapter 6 File Operations OVE VICW 103 Direct ry SOCUGDHTOS esiste p ich d Ried Qe beer lemen aeneae ios 103 File operation restrictions associe re ceot ar ge erre O2 Rev ee UPS NeDA vu Re ve gi vegas 104 Assigning user defined clip titles seeeee 107 Assigning user defined clip and clip list names 108 File Operations in File Access Mode for Windows 110 Making FAM connections ccssscssssccsssccceesescsensccssnteecseccesnascenees 110 Opcratm e Qu lllbes o si dn conan sca n e babet poa erm Dados todas is 111 Exiting Tle Oper duns coerente sage Duct ore roger ev E iatis 111 File Operations in File Access Mode for Macintosh 112 Making FAM connections eese enne eene ener 112 Operating om Mes ssp edt g t po Gata in P at UR b USENET 112 Exiting file operatiDES i esoeraeoc Ino der gets a se eee EM estu ted es 112 FTP File Operations ionic eee concidit x a Mixed insane ina nnmnnn nnna 113 Making E TP Connections esi etae sp hoste ea PH i en gore pes 113 Command lisi 55e iocis aetas eedilotet i ove a aa a odi aite ded 114 Recordin
129. Buipiooeu v Jeydeyo To enable the function Set setup menu item 150 REC MODE to clip continuous rec For details about operation see Basic menu operations page 125 To record Send a REC command from a controlling device connected to either of the following connectors REMOTE 9P connector SD HDSDI INPUT connector Put the unit into HDSDI remote control mode To stop recording Send a REC PAUSE command To stop the function Recording 53 yoeghe q pue BuipiooeH p 1e1deuo 54 Do one of the following to stop the Clip Continuous Rec function A new clip will be generated the next time you start recording Perform a clip operation lock delete or rename a clip Make a network or FAM connection Eject the disc Change the recording format change the setting of setup menu item 031 RECORDING FORMAT Power the unit off To turn the function off Set setup menu item 150 REC MODE to normal Using the Live Logging function Live Logging allows you to transfer planning metadata and proxy AV data between this unit and a computer as you are recording Live Logging has the following two operation modes Main functions as seen from this unit Operation mode Live Receive planning metadata Send clip metadata recorded on the basis of planning metadata Write edited clip metadata back to disc Live View Same functions as above Send proxy AV data
130. DIAL ENABLE is set to dial factory default setting you can start jog playback by simply rotating the jog dial even when the SHTL JOG and VAR JOG buttons are not lit Playback in shuttle mode In shuttle mode you can control the speed of playback by the angular position of the shuttle dial The range of playback speed is 20 times normal speed or maximum speed as selected by an extended menu setting 1 1 Maximum speed is about 50 times normal speed However the maximum speed may vary depending on the state of the clip and the playback position on the disc To carry out playback in shuttle mode proceed as follows r i 3 12 3 1 Press the SHTL JOG button turning it on 2 Turn the shuttle dial to the desired angle corresponding to the desired playback speed Playback in shuttle mode starts 3 To stop playback in shuttle mode return the shuttle dial to the center position or press the STOP button When setup menu item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE is set to dial factory default setting you can start shuttle playback by simply rotating the shuttle dial even when the SHTL JOG button is not lit To alternate between normal speed playback and shuttle mode playback Set the shuttle dial to the position corresponding to the desired shuttle playback speed then switch between normal speed playb
131. DID secondary data identification word 01h V INPUT on function menu page P1 VIDEO SDSDI Setup menu item 031 RECORDING FORMAT HD422 420HQ or 420SP VANC packets The Japanese ARIB TR B23 standard limits the number of packets that can be multiplexed into HDSDI to 4 packets per line The number of VANC packets that can be recorded that is set using maintenance menu item M3B is limited to 9 packets per frame for 50P or 59 94P mode and 18 packets per frame for other modes When VANC packets are not continuous from word 0 and there is unused area on the line then information about the packet position is not recorded Packets are output flush left During input if a parity error is detected in a VANC packet the packet is discarded and recorded flush left Ancillary data in MXF files VANC ancillary data recorded from a HDSDI signal can be inserted to an MXF file as an ANC Frame Element conforming to the SMPTE436M 2006 and can be output This data can also be input and recorded on the disc To insert ancillary data into MXF files to output In setup menu item 666 METADATA ITEM OUT select on see page 135 HANC VANC packets Detection of HANC VANC packets HANCY V ANC packets are recorded on the disc only when the DATA ITEM of the head frame is identified as ANC Frame Elements conforming to the SMPTE436M 2006 when an MXF file is input General MXF metadata This unit examines the data contained in the
132. E ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 6 Cisco BUPTNIC copyright notice BSD Copyright c 2004 Cisco Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Cisco Inc Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
133. E Audio channel Displays the audio channels Also indicates preset or variable mode by its color see page 16 White Preset mode Green Variable mode Reference level Displays the reference level for recording as set in the maintenance menu Level bars Display the audio recording or playback levels of channels 1 to 8 The OVER indicators light when the audio level exceeds 0 dB 8 Meter display mode Displays the audio level meter display mode selected with AU METER on page P4 AUDIO of the function menu see page 46 Function menu Use the PAGE HOME button to display this menu and to switch between the pages HOME P1 to P7 P8 D HOME2 D of the menu Each page has three to six setting items Press the corresponding button to change a setting 1 If a menu item is assigned using maintenance menu item M38 F KEY CONFIG For details see page 44 Basic Operations of the Function Menu in Chapter 3 Clip information Displays clip information Front Panel All remaining clips or clip list playback time Total number of clips recorded on disc ww Number of current clip PDW HD1500 000 00 Clip name Clip names are displayed according to the setting of Settings gt Display Title in the Disc Menu see page 71 However clip names are always displayed during playback If you are using planning metadata and press the REC button in stop mode the name of the clip t
134. E 717 CHROMA PHASE CONTROL DC SD 9 SETUP 718 SETUP LEVEL BLACK LEVEL HD DC SD UC 9 SD Sync Phase 719 SYSTEM PHASE SYNC DC SD SD Fine 720 SYSTEM PHASE SC DC SD CROSS COLOR 934 CROSS COLOR DC H CROP 932 H CROP POSITION DC POSITION 951 H CROP POSITION UC P DETAIL GAIN 935 DETAIL GAIN DC 954 DETAIL GAIN UC P LIMITTER 936 LIMITER DC 955 LIMITER UC P CRISP 937 CRISP DC 956 CRISP THRESHOLD UC P DEPEND 938 LEVEL DEPEND THRESHOLD bey LEVEL DEPEND THRESHOLD uc 9 FREQUENCY 939 H DETAIL FREQUENCY DC 958 H DETAIL FREQUENCY UC 9 Setting item of Menu item of this unit s setup HKDV 900 menu H V RATIO 940 H V RATIO DC 959 H V RATIO UC 5 GAMMA No menu item corresponds to this setting item CROP 930 DOWN CONVERTER MODE 950 UP CONVERTER MODE P LETTER BOX 930 DOWN CONVERTER MODE 950 UP CONVERTER MODE P SQUEEZE 930 DOWN CONVERTER MODE 950 UP CONVERTER MODE P a The setting becomes effective for the output only when VID PROC on page P1 VIDEO of the function menu is set to MENU b Whether to set the down converter or up converter is determined using setup menu item 212 VIDEO REMOTE CONTROL SELECT If both converters are selected u amp d of menu item 212 the relevant menu item allows both converters to be set but only the value for the down converter is used as the return value from t
135. E IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG 2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG 2 PATENT PORTFOLIO WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 PACKAGED MEDIA means any storage media storing MPEG 2 video information such as DVD movie which are sold distributed to general consumers Disc replicators or sellers of the PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for their own business from MPEG LA Please contact MPEG LA for any further information MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 http www mpegla com About IJG Independent JPEG Group This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Character display software iType This product includes technology from Monotype Imaging Inc including iType and certain fonts About net snmpd Part 1 CMU UCD copyright notice BSD like Copyright 1989 1991 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work 1996 1998 2000 Copyright 1996 1998 2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright no
136. ED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 5 Sparta Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright c 2003 2006 Sparta Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Sparta Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWIS
137. EL knob A list of the planning metadata files stored on the media appears Disc Menu fi Load Planning Metadata 22 Professional Disc PM 001 sample 04 AUG 10 39 PM 002 sample 04 AUG 10 PM 008 san 04 AUG 10 04 AUG 10 39 nple PM 004 sample Name amp Date Sorted by Name Depending on the type of USB flash drive data may not appear if you attempt to read planning metadata immediately after connecting the USB flash drive In this case connect the USB flash drive again or exit the menu and try again The data will then appear correctly Disc Operations 91 SU9BINS MD ul suonejedo s Ja deyo SU99J9S IMD ui suonejedQ s JaydeyD 92 4 Select the desired planning metadata file and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The selected planning metadata file is loaded into the unit s memory and the Planning Metadata Properties screen appears D Check the information that appears and press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To sort planning metadata You can sort planning metadata by operating in the same way as in To sort clip lists page 90 However in step 3 select Sort Planning Metadata by The planning metadata will be displayed in the specified order the next time you load planning metadata To check planning metadata properties You can check the properties of the planning metadata that is loaded into this unit s memory including the date and time of creation and the clip titles
138. EPEND THRESHOLD DC Adjust the down converter image enhancer Set the luminance range for edge enhancement 0 to 8 to FH 939 H DETAIL FREQUENCY DC Adjust the down converter image enhancer Set the central frequency for edge enhancement 2 6MHz 3 4MHz 3 9MHz 4 6MHz 940 H V RATIO DC Adjust the down converter image enhancer Set the horizontal vertical ratio for edge enhancement 9 0 to 3 to 7 E 942 V FILTER SELECT DC Set the vertical interpolation filter coefficient for down converter output in S 1080 mode only z If the setting value is large the vertical resolution is high 2 1to3 5 943 CROSS COLOR CRISP DC Set the cross color crisp level for down converter output 0 to 4 to FH 944 LEGALIZE DC For down converter output selects whether to suppress signals with levels that are lower than the pedestal level off Do not suppress signals lower than the pedestal level on Suppress signals lower than the pedestal level 950 UP CONVERTER MODE Select the up converter mode EDGE CROP Select the edge crop mode LETTER BOX Select the letter box mode SQUEEZE Select the squeeze mode 951 H CROP POSITION UC Adjust the H crop the horizontal position when cropping in the edge crop mode of the up converter output when menu item 950 is set to crop 120 to 0 to 120 952 LETTER BOX POSITION UC 9 When menu item 950 is set to I box adjust the vertical location of the position where the picture is cut out for up
139. ET S SEL knob The selected clip is deleted and you return to the clip thumbnail screen To delete all clips 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Lock or Delete All Clips and then select Delete All Clips A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete all clips 3 Select OK to execute the deletion or Cancel to cancel it and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Locked clips cannot be deleted In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the RESET RETURN button with the SHIFT button held down Thumbnail Operations su 19 MD ul suoneiado s Ja deyD 83 SU9919S MD ui suoneiado c 1e1deu 84 Scene Selection Clip List Editing What is scene selection Scene selection is a function which allows you to select material clips from the material recorded on a disc and perform cut editing You can do this by operating on this unit only Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut editing in the field and in other offline situations In scene selection you create a clip list editing data Since the material itself is not affected you can repeat this any number of times You can play back the edit list created by scene selection on this unit In scene selection you can add whole clips or add parts of a clip You can add scenes using chapters change the playback sequence and amend or delete In and Out points All of these operations can be carried
140. F See Items in the extended menu page 128 for more information See Basic Operations of the Function Menu page 44 for more information 1 Power supply section POWER switch AC IN connector POWER v AC IN Sc POWER main power switch Press the I side to power on the unit Press the O side to power off When using the unit normally leave the POWER switch in the I on position and use the on standby button on the front panel to switch the unit between the operating state and standby state Before turning the main power off always check to be sure that the unit is in the standby state and then press the main power switch to the O side NACIN connector Connect to an AC power supply with the power cord not supplied 2 Analog audio signal input output section Q ANALOG AUDIO INPUT 1 2 connectors ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT 1 2 connectors ANALOG AUDIO INPUT ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT AUDIO MONITOR 1 R L AUDIO MONITOR R L connectors Q ANALOG AUDIO INPUT 1 2 connectors XLR 3 pin female These input analog audio signals With A1 INPUT or A2 INPUT on page P2 AUDIO and A3 INPUT or A4 INPUT on page P3 AUDIO of the function menu see page 46 you can select whether the signal input to connector 1 is assigned to audio channel lor Rear Panel Sud Jo suonoun J pue seweN z Jeideu 27 Sued Jo suonounJ pue sewen z J
141. GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Trademarks and Licenses xipueddy 185 xipueddy 186 Part 7 Fabasoft R amp D Software GmbH amp Co KG copyright notice BSD Copyright c Fabasoft R amp D Software GmbH amp Co KG 2003 oss fabasoft com Author Bernhard Penz bernhard penz fabasoft com gt Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of Fabasoft R amp D Software GmbH amp Co KG or any of its subsidiaries brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS ORIMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
142. H6 and off according to the specified analog audio presets of the editor or remote control unit 331 F1600 nodef no definition No definition ANALOG AUDIO EDIT PRESET ch 1 analog ch1 Follow the edit preset of analog channel 1 REPLACE FOR CH7 ch 2 analog ch2 Follow the edit preset of analog channel 2 332 Fi600 is analog ch1 ch2 Follow the edit preset of analog channel 1 or ANALOG AUDIO EDIT PRESET 3 REPLACE FOR CH8 344 ASSEMBLE AUTO EDIT Set whether to record 2 seconds of postroll when an additional clip is POSTROLL RECORDING recorded by sending the AUTO EDIT command 9 pin protocol 20 42 from a nonlinear editing system connected to the REMOTE 9P connector on the rear panel Linear editing systems follow the settings made on the linear editing systems off Do not record postroll on Records approximately 2 seconds of postroll Menu items in the 400s relating to preroll Item number Item name Settings 401 FUNCTION MODE AFTER CUE UP Select the state that the unit goes into after a cuing up operation stop Stops the stop mode still Still playback in jog and shuttle mode Menu items in the 500s relating to disc protection Item number Item name Settings 501 STILL TIMER To protect the disc against shock and vibrations and to lengthen the life of the laser diodes the unit automatically enters standby off mode whenever a specified time elapses in a disc stop mode stop mode or the still picture mode of search mode
143. HOURS1r P ROLL TIME CHARA H POS CHARA U POS You can press the UP function button F3 or the DOWN function button F4 to move the mark by 100 menu items 4 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A setting screen for the currently selected item appears RETURN CUSTOM ITEM H13 SEEK RUNNING HOURS 0 resettable on SAVE EXIT SETUP 5 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select on or off on Display the item in the setup menu off Do not display the item in the setup menu 6 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To continue selecting items Repeat steps 3 to 6 To set items more quickly In step 3 turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to move the mark and then press the ON function button F1 or OFF function button F2 to set items continuously 7 Press the SAVE function button F5 Customization indication in the setup menu When you open the setup menu after customizing the displayed menu item a C mark appears at the upper right of the screen to indicate that the menu has been customized Setup Menu snuey z Jeideuj 127 snus 4 Jejdeuj 128 Items in the extended menu The following tables show the items in the extended menu The values in the Settings columns are the values which tem names are the names which appear on an external appear in the time data display area The values may monitor to which the output of the COMPOSITE appear in a differ
144. I line 21 input HDSDI VANC output SDSDI line 21 output Composite line 21 output EIA 608 recording and playback Recording and playback after EIA 608 708 conversion In response to closed caption input data that complies with the EIA 608 standard record play and output that data after conversion to EIA 708 format However settings are required for recording of EIA 608 standard closed caption data For details see To record EIA 608 B standard closed caption data in SDSDI line 21 signals after conversion to the EIA 708 B standard page 174 EIA 708 recording and playback EIA 608 5 708 conversion SDSDI line 21 input HDSDI VANC output Ancillary Data xipueddy 175 xipueddy 176 EIA 708 608 EE output In response to closed caption input data that complies with the EIA 708 608 standard output to EE However settings are required for EE output of closed caption data in HDSDI signals For details see To record and playback EIA 708 B standard closed caption data in HDSDI signals page 174 or To record EIA 608 B standard closed caption data in HDSDI signals page 174 HDSDI VANC input EIA 708 608 EIA 608 SDSDI line 21 input Optional functions By installing the PDBZ UPG02 Software Upgrade Key in this unit you can expand the unit s closed caption data conversion functions Closed caption data in SDSDI line 21 signals are output to EE output as SDSDI or comp
145. ICE SUPPORT M3 QTHERS MA SETUP MAINENANCE MS NETWORK M6 DRIVE 2 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select M4 SETUP MAINTENANCE then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the SELECT function button F2 The sub items of M4 SETUP MAINTENANCE appears MAINTENANCE MENU MA SETUP MAINTENANCE lt M40 EXTEND MENU dis gt MAO CUSTOMIZE dis M46 MENU DATA CONTROL MA 7 SETUP BANK4 M48 AUTO RECALL off M49 RESET ALL SETUP Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select M40 EXTENDED MENU then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the SELECT function button F2 The setting screen for M40 EXTENDED MENU appears MAINTENANCE MENU MA SETUP MAINTENANCE MAO EXTEND MENU dis DISABLE gt ENABLE Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select ENABLE and press the SAVE function button F5 The message NOW SAVING appears on the video monitor display and Saving appears in the time data display area while the new settings are saved in memory When the saving operation is completed the video monitor display and the time data display area return to their normal indications When you next display the menu and change the item display the extended menu will appear after the basic menu 1 44 Setup Menu Maintenance Menu Items in the maintenance menu The following tables show the items in the maintenance menu tem names are the names which appear on the video
146. ING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Glossary AES EBU A standard established jointly by the AES Audio Engineering Society and EBU European Broadcasting Union for serial transmission of digital audio Two channels of audio can be transmitted via a single connector Clip A recording unit Clips are created every time recording starts and stops Clip list A list of locations in the material recorded on the disc arranged in any order Clip lists can be created with the scene selection function of this unit Composite video signal A video signal in which luminance and chrominance are combined along with timing reference sync information to make composite video Drop frame mode SMPTE timecode runs at 30 frames second while the NTSC color television system runs at about 29 97 frames second Drop frame mode adjusts the running of time
147. IVE HIGH TEMPERATURE ON NET 4 BOARD HUMID MOISTURE HAS BEEN DETECTED Stop recording or playback power the unit off and on again and wait until the HUMID display disappears BATT EMPTY BATTERY EMPTY Change the battery Unknown USB UNKNOWN USB DEVICE The USB connector of this unit is for maintenance purposes and connection of USB devices Connect a compatible USB device Alarms related to system frequency and recording format The following alarms are displayed only when setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY is set to on or limit Alarm message in time data display area Alarm message in video monitor screen Action 1080 59 94i RECORDING AND PLAYBACK IS NOT This appears when the system frequency of the unit 1080 29 97P POSSIBLE differs from that of the loaded disc Insert a disc with SYSTEM SETTINGS DIFFERENT FROM the same system frequency as the unit or change the 1080 50i DISC units system frequency 1080 25P 1080 23 98P 720 59 94P 720 50P 525 59 94i 625 50i 1080 59 94i DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED This appears when mixed format recording mode is 1080 50i VIDEO RESOLUTION DIFFER FROM IT disabled and the current system lines setting of this ON DISC unit does not match the resolution of the inserted 1080 29 97P disc 1080 25P Insert a disc with a resolution that matches the current system lines setting of this unit or chang
148. L TIME Settings 0 s 0 sec 5 s 5 sec 30 s 30 sec Set the preroll time to between 0 and 30 seconds in steps of 1 second A preroll time of at least 5 seconds is recommended when using this unit for editing 002 CHARACTER H POSITION Adjust the horizontal screen position as a hexadecimal value of the text information output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector for superimposed display on the monitor The hexadecimal value 00 is for the far left of the screen Increasing the value moves the position of the characters to the right 00 OC 28 When the number of system lines is 1080 and the system frequency is 59 94i 29 97P 50i 25P or 23 98P 00 OB 28 When the number of system lines is 720 and the system frequency is 59 94P or 50P Set this item by adjusting to the required position while viewing the monitor 003 CHARACTER V POSITION Adjust the vertical screen position as a hexadecimal value of the text information output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector for superimposed display on the monitor The hexadecimal value 00 is for the top of the screen Increasing the value lowers the position of the characters 00 2A 32 When the number of system lines is 1080 and the system frequency is 59 94i
149. MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE About libupnp Copyright c 2000 2003 Intel Corporation All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Trademarks and Licenses Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUD
150. MIX Basic Operations of the Function Menu suoneiedeJd e 1ejdeuj 45 suonejedejg e Jajdeyo 46 Item Setting F5 SPEAKER Enables or disables output from this unit s speaker OFF Do not output ON Output F6 LEVEL MT Specifies the position at which to superimpose audio level meters in the video monitor screen in full screen display mode OFF Do not superimpose LEFT Superimpose the audio level meters of 2 channels on the left side RIGHT Superimpose the audio level meters of 2 channels on the right side LEFT 4 Superimpose the audio level meters of 4 channels on the left side RIGHT 4 Superimpose the audio level meters of 4 channels on the right side LEFT 8 Superimpose the audio level meters of 8 channels on the left side RIGHT 8 Superimpose the audio level meters of 8 channels on the right side Item F6 A8 INPUT Setting Selects the audio input signal to assign to audio channel 8 SDI Audio signal embedded into SDI signal ANALOG2 Analog 2 audio signal AES EBU4 Signal input to the DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN 3 4 connectors P4 AUDIO page Item F1 A5 VOL Setting Sets the volume of audio channel 5 9 The volume can be adjusted within the range from 200 to 200 e to 12 dB by turning the PUSH SET S SEL knob F2 A6 VOL Sets the volume of audio channel 6 9 The volume can be adjusted within the range from 200 to 200
151. ML 9 Contains conversion tables for Yes No No No No assigning user defined names to clips and clip lists DISCMETA XML Contains metadata to indicate the Yes Yes D No No No disc properties MEDIAPRO XML Contains a list of material on the disc Yes No No No No basic properties related information and information about access methods SYSPRO XML Contains information about device Yes No No No No System settings and menu settings Other files Files other than the above No No a Only when sub item NAMING FORM of setup menu item 036 is set to free b Only files which can be written by XDCAM Overview The directories in the root directory Clip Edit Sub UserData General and PROAV cannot be deleted or Directories cannot be created in the root directory renamed Clip directory File name Content Operations Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete C MXF 9 Clip file created by recording MXF Yes Yes D Yes Yes Yes file 0001 to 9999 C MO01 XML 2 Metadata file generated automatically Yes Yes No 9 No No when C MXF file is created 0001 to 9999 C MO2 KLV 9 User metadata file This type of file is Yes Yes No 9 Yes Yes generated automatically during recording via an FTP or FAM connection when the unit recognizes that an MXF file contains metadata that was generated by a non XDCAM d
152. N In point time data FFWD Fast forward search OUT Out point time data F REV Fast reverse search DUR Duration between In point and Out point PLAY Playback mode servo unlocked PLAY LOCK Playback mode servo locked Note REC Record mode servo unlocked If the time data or user bits data cannot be read correctly C REC Record mode servo unlocked 9 they will be displayed with an asterisk For example REC LOCK Record mode servo locked M XL C REC LOCK Record mode servo locked 9 Timecode reader drop frame mark for 59 94i JOG STILL A still picture in jog mode 59 94P 29 97P mode only JOG FWD Jog mode in forward direction Indicates drop frame mode JOG REV Jog mode in reverse direction 66 99 Indicates non drop frame mode Timecode generator drop frame mark for 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode only Indicates drop frame mode factory default setting Indicates non drop frame mode eo 0 66 99 VITC field mark blank Fields 1 and 3 for 59 941 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P mode or fields 1 3 5 and 7 for 501 50P 25P mode Fields 2 and 4 for 59 941 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P mode or fields 2 4 6 and 8 for 501 50P 25P mode Operation mode The field is divided into two blocks as shown below Block A displays the operation mode Block B displays the servo lock status or playback speed SHUTTLE STILL A still picture in shuttle mode SHUTTLE Speed Shuttle mode
153. NE9 In 50i 50P 25P Specify blanking for lines 9 322 to 22 and 335 E mode bink blank Switch blanking on LINE 22 thru throu Switch blanking off 726 H BLANKING WIDTH Select the horizontal blanking width of the output analog video signal narow narrow Digital blanking narrow wide Analog blanking wide When wide is selected the horizontal blanking width complies with SMPTE170M and normally the blanking is widened and the image becomes narrower It is recommended to select narow at the editing stage then later for broadcast transmission to select wide to output a signal conforming to the standard Note however that narow has to be always selected for SDI signals 728 OUTPUT SCH PHASE Set the subcarrier H phase 512 512 DEC to 0 0 DEC to 511 511 DEC Setup Menu snue wN Z Je deuj 137 snue wN 4 Ja deup 138 Menu items in the 700s relating to video control Item number Item name Settings 731 WIDE MODE Specify whether to record and play back with the addition of wide picture information Sub Item 1 INPUT 9 Select whether to save wide picture information to the disc when recording auto Automatically save wide picture information when it is detected in the selected input video signal on Always save wide picture information off Never save wide picture information 2 OUTPUT Select whether to add wide picture information to the s
154. NTERFACE 9PIN Editing Control Unit Settings When connecting an editing control unit BVE 700 700A 2000 to use with this unit set VTR constants as follows F1600 System VTR CONSTANT frequency 2 3 4 CREE Genii e 9 10 11 12 13 614 15 16 59 94i Ao 97 loo 96 loza o7a 03 80 foa o7 FE loo so 5A FF 5A 59 94P 29 97P 50i 50P 25P A1 97 oo 7D oza loza 03 lso loa loz FE oo fso 4C FF 4B 23 98P A2 97 loo 78 1978 gz9 03 80 loa loz FE loo 80 448 FF 48 a This is 15 when maintenance menu item M393 AUDIO DSP is set to AGC limiter HD1500 System VTR CONSTANT frequency 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 lie 59 94i Ao 96 loo 96 15 15 o3 lao loa 07 FE loo lso 5A FF 5A 59 94P 29 97P 50 50P 25P A1 96 loo 7D 15 15 los lso loa loz FE loo lao 4c FF 4B 23 98P 2 A2 96 loo 78 15 15 03 lso loa loz FE loo lao 4 48 FF l48 a When the PDBK F1500 option is installed Using RM 280 The following figure shows a cut editing system comprising a PDW HD1500 as a player a PDW F1600 unit as a recorder and an RM 280 as an editing controller Connections and Settings suonejedejg Ja deup 35 suonejedejg e Jajdeyo 36 HD video monitor To HDSDI input connector 759 c
155. OGRAM XXXX This message means that recording on that disc did not end normally The XXXX in the message is a code for XDCAM devices that can salvage the disc Refer to the following table and use one of the indicated devices to salvage the disc Code XXXX Model 0002 PDW 1500 530 510 R1 PDW F70 F350 F330 0200 PDW F70 F350 F330 Version 1 9 or higher PDW F75 F355 F335 0300 2 PDW HD1500 HR1 700 0301 9 PDW HD1500 700 Version 1 5 or higher PDW F1600 F800 a Does not appear on this unit Even when these functions are used it is not possible to recover data from immediately before the interruption of recording The amount of data lost is as follows Quick salvage From 2 to 4 seconds of data before the interruption of recording Full salvage From 4 to 6 seconds of data before the interruption of recording More data may be lost when the unit is subject to vibrations and when you switch frequently between recording and paused You are prompted to execute a full salvage every time you insert a disc that has not been salvaged or power the unit on with such as disc loaded No recording is possible on discs containing clips that have not been salvaged although it is possible to play back the normally recorded sections Recording becomes possible if you perform a quick format but this erases all of the original recorded content To restore clips with a full salvage 1 Insert t
156. OP button and STANDBY indicator lit After a certain time passes in a disc stop mode the unit automatically enters standby off mode and the indicator goes off Front Panel You can specify the time until the unit enters standby off mode For details see the description of setup menu item 501 STILL TIMER page 132 REC INHI recording inhibit indicator This lights in the following cases When a disc with recording inhibited is loaded When REC INH on the HOME page of the function menu is set to ON The format of the recorded part of the disc does not match the system frequency settings of the unit Display window Basic operation display Q Audio input display Audio level meters DATA n zs Function menu Clip information Recording format Time data display area a The mixing display appears only on the PDW F1600 see the following figure E E ico E HD SDI P D 5 Q Disc information System information DEFRULT RM 9P REPEAT Format conversion Em Reference signal Video input display Q Audio input display Audio level meters Displays information about audio There are two display modes for the audio level meter FULL mode and FINE mode which can be switched over using AU METER on page P4 AUDIO of the function menu Meter display mode FULL Input signal
157. P7 OTHER of the function menu to ON see page 48 Audio source Audio mixer Digital or analog audio input Digital or analog audio output Digital video output o OO x SS ES OP E oc Digital video input Video switcher Linear Editing xXoeg e g pue DBuipiooeu v Jaydeyo 59 xXoeq e g pue BuipiooeH y 1e1deuo 60 In preread editing an I O feedback loop may occur if an input video signal is used as the reference signal To prevent this set OUT REF on page P6 REF of the function menu to REF see page 47 This selects use of an external reference signal during preread editing When preread mode is selected no E E video is output regardless of the editing mode of this unit This is to prevent feedback due to loop connections However feedback can occur when E E video is output after preread editing ends and PREREAD is set to OFF if input and output are still connected on the same channel To prevent feedback select PB playback signals for all video and audio signals and all editing modes before starting preread editing Do this by selecting PB in step 1 of the following procedure Set PB EE on the HOME page of the function menu to PB Set PREREAD on page P7 OTHER of the function menu to ON see page 48 Make the necessary connections for preread editing After selecting
158. PARA RUN Select whether to use synchronized operation when you have connected two or more PDW HD1500 F1600 units in a daisy chain or distributed configuration and are using external control from a VTR or a remote controller such as the RM 280 dis disable No synchronized operation ena enable Use synchronized operation Notes f you are controlling from a VTR select ena on all of the PDW HD1500 F1600 units is f you controlling from the RM 280 or another remote control device select dis on one of the PDW HD1500 F1600 units and select ena s on all of the other PDW HD1500 F1600 units 212 VIDEO REMOTE CONTROL Select whether to control the up converter or down converter when 2 SELECT 9 controlling the image enhancer from the HKDV 900 or another unit o connected to the VIDEO CONTROL connector down Control the down converter up Control the up converter u amp d Control both the up and down converter It is also possible to adjust setup menu item 718 SETUP LEVEL BLACK LEVEL from the HKDV 900 Hold down the D2 button on the HKDV 900 and rotate the SETUP dial 214 REMOTE INTERFACE When the remote control switch is set to REMOTE select the device from which to remote control this unit 9PIN Device connected to the REMOTE 9P connector SDI Device connected to the SD HDSDI INPUT connector i LINK Device connected to the i LINK S400 connector b 215 i LINK MODE P Select
159. PS IS This appears when an edit across multiple clips is NOT POSSIBLE attempted It is not possible to edit across multiple clips Disc Full DISC FULL This appears when the free capacity of the disc is FOR MORE RECORDING DELETE exhausted during assemble editing 9 SOME CLIPS Delete unneeded clips or exchange the disc for one Ei with enough free capacity REC Format 9 REC MODE SELECTION DIFFERENT This appears when editing of mixed recording formats FROM AUDIO VIDEO ON DISC is enabled and an attempt is made to edit an MATCH REC MODE SELECTION WITH underlying clip in a different recording format CLIP Reset the recording format to match the format of the editing target clip see page 57 Preroll 9 PREROLL TIME SETTING IS SHORT This appears when editing is impossible because the preroll time is too short Set setup menu item 001 PREROLL TIME to 5 seconds or longer 1 64 Troubleshooting Alarm message in time data display area Alarm message in video monitor screen Description action LOGGING MODE Last Clip 9 ASSEMBLE EDITING IS NOT POSSIBLE This appears when an attempt is made to perform an BESIDES LAST CLIP assemble edit on a clip that is not the last clip on the disc Assemble editing is possible only on the last clip Live Logg CANNOT EDIT AV MATERIAL IN LIVE This appears when an edit preset command is received while the Live Logging function is enabled a Disp
160. PUSH SET S SEL knob to move the to the left of the item names to NAMING FORM The indicates the selected item a NAMING FORM AUTO NAMING END ITEM 036 FILE NAMING Cxxkxx Cxxxx SAVE EXIT SETUP Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select free and press the knob You are now able to use clips and clip lists with user defined names Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to move the to the left of AUTO NAMING and press the knob 7 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select title and press the knob 8 Press the SAVE function F5 button The same name will now be given to newly recorded clips To use clips and clip lists with user defined names over FAM and FTP connections Carry out steps 2 to 5 of To assign clip names on this unit and then press the SAVE function F5 button It is now possible to write transfer and rename clips and clip lists with user defined names over file access mode FAM connections page 110 and FTP connections page 113 Able to use clips with user defined names over FAM and FTP connections Sakura SMI Able to use clip lists with user defined names over FAM and FTP connections To check clip names Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen and select the clip whose name you want to check The name of the selected clip appears at the upper left of the screen See Thumbnail Operations p
161. RN SYSTEM FREQUENCY SELECT 1080 59 94i If the System Frequency setting is changed Turn Power off and on again 2 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select the system frequency to be used SYSTEM FREQUENCY SELECT 1080 501 Push F5 SAVE Kes 3 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the SAVE function button F5 The message Turn off on POWER appears 4 After pressing the on standby button to power off the unit power it on again Setting Timecode There are the following four ways of recording timecode Internal Preset mode This records the output of the internal timecode generator set beforehand to an initial value The following run modes can be selected Free Run Timecode advances continually Rec Run Timecode advances only during recording Internal Regen regenerate mode This records the output of the internal timecode generator initialized to timecode following continuously upon the timecode of the last frame of the last clip on the disc External Regen mode This records the output of the internal timecode generator synchronized to an external timecode generator As the external input the timecode input to any of the following connectors can be selected TIME CODE IN connector LTC SD HDSDI INPUT connector VITC and LTC B i LINK S400 connector TC External Preset mode This directly records the input of an external timecode generator As the external input the timeco
162. S EBU 1 Signal input to the DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN 1 2 connectors F4 A6 INPUT Selects the audio input signal to assign to audio channel 6 SDI Audio signal embedded into SDI signal ANALOG2 Analog 2 audio signal AES EBU2 Signal input to the DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN 1 2 connectors F5 A7 INPUT Selects the audio input signal to assign to audio channel 7 SDI Audio signal embedded into SDI signal ANALOG 1 Analog 1 audio signal AES EBUS Signal input to the DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN 3 4 connectors Basic Operations of the Function Menu a To enable this setting the following settings are also required in the same way as for volume operations for channels 1 to 4 Set the VARIABLE switch of the front panel to REC or PB Set setup menu item 131 AUDIO VOLUME to EACH b HD1500 When the PDBZ UPG02 Software Upgrade Key is installed P5 TC page P6 REF page Item Setting Item Setting F1 TCG Selects the timecode signal to which the F1 OUT REF Selects the reference signal for the internal timecode generator output signals of this unit synchronizes REF Use the signal input to the INT Follow the initial value set from the REF VIDEO INPUT connector as the control panel or remotely from the output reference signal device connected to the INPUT Use the input video signal as the REMOTE 9P connector or output reference signal synchronize to
163. S PRESET If the IP address cannot be assigned this is shown as 000 000 000 000 In this case consult the network administrator To set the IP address First set DHCP to DISABLE see the previous section When the IP address is assigned automatically 1 Select maintenance menu item M5 NETWORK gt M51 IP ADDRESS PRESET 2 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The IP address appears and the digit that can be changed flashes 3 Set the IP address To select a different digit to be changed Use the IN and OUT buttons To change the value of a digit Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob Turning clockwise increases the value and turning counterclockwise decreases the value The 4 MARKI and V MARK2 buttons can be used To return to the factory default setting Press the RESET RETURN button When all digits are set press the SAVE function button F5 This returns to the NETWORK menu Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required to set the subnet mask and default gateway In the NETWORK menu press the SAVE function button F5 When the NOW SAVING message vanishes power the unit off and then on again with the on standby button To set the communications speed and protocol Set the communications speed LINK SPEED and communications method DUPLEX to match the network environment To set the communications speed and communications protocol proceed as explained in the previous section To display
164. SDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER connectors 272 to 0 to 272 746 SYNC PHASE HD Control the H sync phase of the high definition video signal output from the HDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER connectors 128 to 0 to 127 747 FINE HD Fine control the H sync phase of the high definition video signal output from the HDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER connectors 0 to 1023 a HD1500 When the PDBK S1500 or PDBK F1500 option is installed b Not displayed when the unit is in 23 98P mode Menu items in the 800s relating to audio control Item number Item name 802 DIGITAL AUDIO MUTING IN SHUTTLE MODE Settings Set the audio muting conditions during shuttle playback off Not muted on Muted Setup Menu Menu items in the 800s relating to audio control Item number Item name Settings 807 AUDIO OUTPUT PHASE Set the output timing of digital audio playback signals HD SDI SDI AES EBU only with 80H as a reference position Output timing is earlier for values smaller than 80H and later for values greater than 80H 80H 128 samples approx 2 7 ms 80H 1 sample approx 20 us 0 0 HEX to 80 80 HEX to FF FF HEX Values can be set in this range 808 INTERNAL AUDIO SIGNAL Select the operation of the internal audio test signal generator GENERATOR silnc silence Silent signal 1kHz 1kHz sine 1 kHz 2
165. SEL knob When turned clockwise or counterclockwise moves the mark up or down in the list of menu items to select the item to change When turned clockwise or counterclockwise changes a menu item setting When pressed answers Yes to a question Setup Menu SsnueyN z Jeideuo 125 snue N Z Ja deup 126 Menu control buttons Function buttons F1 to F6 The function to be displayed varies depending Functions RETURN Goes up one level SELECT Selects an item UP Skips back 100 or 50 items in the list of menu items DOWN Skips forward 100 or 50 items in the list of menu items SAVE Saves a new setting to memory EXIT Exits the current menu Changes a setting Changes a setting on the situations RESET RETURN button Returns the current setting to the factory default Answers No to a question To change the settings of menu items Proceed as follows to change the settings of menu items 1 Use the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select the required item Example Screen display when item 005 DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT is selected Current setting KEY PARAMETER 001 P ROLL TIME 5s 002 CHARA H POS 0n 003 CHARA U POS 2E 005 DISPLAY SEL T amp CNT 006 LOCAL ENA st amp eJ 007 DISC TIMER 12H 009 CHARA TYPE white 011 CHARA SIZE x1 012 COND DISPLY dis 013 SYSTEM FREG off 016 ALARM on 2 Press
166. SON Y PROFESSIONAL DISC RECORDER PDW F1600 PDW HD1500 XDCAM 2 i CINEALTA OPERATION MANUAL 1st Edition Revised 7 2 Important Safety Instructions Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Donotinstall near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug dose not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
167. See page 74 for more information about the expand function CHAPTER button When pressed during thumbnail display displays a list of thumbnails of the frames where essence marks are recorded chapter function When this is pressed again returns to normal thumbnail display The chapter function can be useful when essence mark thumbnails provide more information about the content of the clip than the index pictures of the first frames This can also be used to cue up long clips This button also becomes a function button F5 when the function menu is visible See page 74 for more information about the chapter function 5 Recording and playback control section PREV button PLAY button NEXT button STOP button lA REC button PREV PLAY NEXT STOP He Ej gt gt l TOP F REV U FFWD END l GREC J Q STANDBY indicator J REC INHI indicator PREV previous button Press this button turning it on to show the first frame of the current clip While the first frame of a clip is shown pressing this button jumps to the beginning of the previous clip 1 This button is also used together with other buttons for the following operations Reverse direction high speed search Hold down the PLAY button and press this button A high speed search in the reverse direction is carried out Displaying the first frame of the first clip Hold down the SHIFT button and press thi
168. T REMOTE LOCAL NETWORK SWITCH TO LOCAL Example alarm in monitor video section When an alarm is displayed remove the alarm cause by following the action to take If the alarm display does not disappear contact your Sony service representative Please note that there are some alarms which do not appear depending on the setting of setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY see page 123 See page 125 for more information about setup menu operations Alarm message in time Alarm message in video monitor screen Description action data display area ADJ Mode THE UNIT IS IN ADJUSTMENT MODE This appears when the unit is in adjustment CHECK THE SWITCHES OF S2701 ON THE mode HPR 23 BOARD AND S1 ON THE VPR 99 Contact your Sony service representative BOARD MENU Ver UP THE SETUP MENU SOFTWARE HAS BEEN Reset the settings in the setup menu see UPGRADED page 127 SET THE SETUP MENU ITEMS TO THE DESIRED SETTINGS ILL SETUP INVALID SETTINGS SELECTED IN SETUP Reset the settings in the setup menu see MENU page 127 If the same message appears after SET ITEMS IN THE SETUP MENU TO THE you reset the settings contact your Sony service APPROPRIATE VALUES CONTACT SERVICE representative IF THIS ALARM APPEARS AGAIN AFTER ABOVE PROCEDURE Exchg batt BATTERY NEEDS REPLACING PLEASE The NVRAM battery is exhausted Contact your CONTACT SERVICE Sony service representative Update Err RUN SOFTWARE UPDATE PROGRAM The sof
169. TCH THE CLIP LISTS RESOLUTION resolution of clips in the clip list i LINK D CANNOT EDIT AV MATERIAL WHEN This appears when an edit preset command is INPUT SIGNAL IS VIA i LINK received but i LINK is selected as the input signal Under V INPUT on the P1 VIDEO page of the function menu select a signal other than i LINK SD Input D CANNOT EDIT AV MATERIAL WHEN This appears when an edit preset command is INPUT SIGNAL IS VIA SD SDI received but the recording format is set to HD422 and SDSDI is selected as the video input signal Under V INPUT on the P1 VIDEO page of the function menu select HDSDI NON AUDIO D AUDIO INSERT EDITING WITH This appears when digital audio signals are set to INDEPENDENT CHANNELS IS NOT data and an edit preset command is received for POSSIBLE individual channels in the audio input channel pairs CHANGE NON AUDIO INPUT IN CH1 2 CH3 4 CH5 6 CH7 8 To perform insert MAINTENANCE MENU FROM DATA TO editing of non audio signals always operate on AUDIO channel pairs If you want to perform insert editing of the audio of individual channels from channel pairs set maintenance menu item M37 AUDIO CONFIG gt M372 NON AUDIO INPUT to audio List Exists DISC CANNOT BE EDITED This appears when an edit preset command is DELETE ALL CLIP LIST BEFORE received but the inserted disc contains a clip list BEGINNING DESTRUCTIVE EDITING Exchange the disc for one that does not contain a cli
170. The input audio levels are fixed at their preset values Arrow buttons The four arrow buttons are also used as the MARKI button MARK2 button IN button and OUT button The correspondence with these buttons is as follows button MARKI button button MARK2 button button IN button button OUT button You can use these buttons for thumbnail selection menu setting operations setting In Out points and so on MARK1 button and MARK2 button IN indicator and OUT indicator MARK1 g Oe Q 6 IN button and OUT button 7 MARK2 MARKI button and 4 MARK2 button When the THUMBNAIL indicator see page 18 is lit you can use these for thumbnail selection During recording or playback a shot mark 1 or shot mark 2 is recorded as an essence mark when you press the PUSH SET S SEL knob with the MARK1 or V MARK2 button held down If you connect a Windows USB keyboard to the MAINTENANCE connector you can record shot marks from Shot MarkO up to Shot Mark9 by pressing the 0 to 9 keys on the numeric keypad Essence marks can also be deleted and modified from the Thumbnail Menu of the chapter thumbnail screen see page 66 IN indicator and OUT indicator IN indicator When an In point is set this lights If an attempt is made to set the In point after a recorded Out point this flashes OUT indicator When an Out point is set this lights If an attempt is made to set the Out point before a record
171. There are no read errors but you should take the action described in the next section This corresponds to the red channel condition indicator of aVTR C Disc This appears during cache exchange recording cache For details see page 52 a Read errors will occur if the playback condition continues to deteriorate If a read error occurs a Disc Error alarm appears in the time data display the picture freezes and audio is muted To display playback condition marks set setup menu item 012 CONDITION DISPLAY ON VIDEO MONITOR to ena and set setup menu item 005 DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT to T amp sta For details about operation see Basic menu operations page 125 Playback condition displays You can be alerted in advance to deteriorating playback conditions and to error correction rates which are approaching their limits Deteriorating playback may be due to the following causes Scratches and dust on the disc surface This includes fingerprints dust from the air tar from cigarette smoke and so on Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are not a problem because they are registered in advance as defects and recording avoids them However scratches and soiling which occur after recording can lead to deteriorating playback conditions Aging of disc recording layers Over several decades the recording layers of optical discs can age and cause deteriorating playback conditio
172. This is a quick and efficient way to review the selected clip and search for target scenes You can specify 12 144 or 1728 divisions Aid oy pos us Das The maximum number of blocks may be other than 1728 when the recorded duration of the clip is short In this case the frame interval of expanded thumbnails is fixed at 1 frame This allows you to view expanded thumbnails at equal intervals See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip that contains the scene you want to find 2 Press the EXPAND button The selected clip is divided into 12 blocks and a list appears in the expand thumbnail screen see page 68 with the first frame of each block displayed as a thumbnail 3 Select the thumbnail that you want to expand further 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 up to 2 times as required Thumbnails cannot be further expanded when they already have the minimum duration 1 frame To return to the previous expansion level Press the EXPAND button with the SHIFT button held down To display the expand thumbnail screen of the previous or next clip With the expand thumbnail screen still active press the PREV button or the NEXT button Using the chapter function to find scenes Chapters are the sections between the shot marks Rec Start marks and other essence marks Rec Start essence marks are set automatically at the start of recording
173. ack and shuttle playback by pressing the PLAY and SHTL JOG buttons alternately Playback in variable mode In variable mode you can control the speed of playback in the range of 2 to 2 times normal speed You can use setup menu item 119 VARIABLE SPEED LIMIT IN KEY to specify the speed range of variable playback To carry out playback in variable mode proceed as follows o EJECT 4858 iT D 3 2 3 1 1 Press the VAR JOG button turning it on 2 Turn the shuttle dial to the desired angle corresponding to the desired playback speed Playback in variable mode starts 3 To stop playback in variable speed mode return the shuttle dial to the center position or press the STOP button To alternate between normal speed playback and variable mode playback Set the shuttle dial to the position corresponding to the desired variable playback speed then switch between normal speed playback and variable mode playback by pressing the PLAY and VAR JOG buttons alternately To repeat playback in variable mode Set setup menu item 142 REPEAT MODE to play amp VAR fwd or force This allows you to perform repeat playback limited to variable playback in the forward direction in the range 0 to 1 times normal speed To perform manual frame sync playback During playback you can adjust the playback output phase in units of o
174. age 73 for more information about the thumbnail screen The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed according to the following order of priority Title gt User defined clip name gt Standard format clip name Therefore the display of this item changes as following depending on whether there is a title When a title has been set as a clip name on this unit for clips recorded on this unit the title is displayed The user defined name or standard format name is displayed for clips without a title Overview suoneledo ei 9 sajdeyp 109 suonejedo e 4 9 1e1deu 110 File Operations in File Access Mode for Windows File access mode operating environment Operating system requirements for file operations by file access mode called FAM below are as follows Computer operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP3 or higher Microsoft Windows Vista Business Ultimate 32 bit 64 bit SP2 or higher or Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Ultimate 32 bit 64 bit Preparations The FAM driver must be downloaded and installed on the computer beforehand For details on downloading the software see page 13 Software Downloads in Chapter 1 Use Version 2 10 or higher of the FAM driver If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer check the version To check the version For Windows XP Select ProDisc from Add or Remove Programs in the control panel and then click
175. aintenance menu item M49 RESET ALL SETUP You will need to set it again The date and time are not reset Initial Setup suoneiedejgd Jajdeyup 31 suonejedejg e Jajdeyo 32 Front Panel Tilt Mechanism The front panel of this unit has a tilt mechanism that allows you to pull the front panel out and adjust it to a convenient angle To pull the front panel out Grasp the holds small protrusions on both sides of the front panel and pull out as indicated by the arrow You can fix the angle of the front panel in position 1 15 degrees or position 2 40 degrees Return position Position 2 40 degrees ae J Position 1 15 degrees The angle cannot be fixed if you pull the front panel past position 2 all the way out to the return position To fix the front panel return it to position 0 and then pull it out to position 1 or position 2 To return the front panel to its original position Unlock the front panel by pulling it out to the return position You can then return it to position 0 Front Panel Tilt Mechanism To change the angle of the front panel To change the angle to position 2 from position 1 pull the front panel out to position 2 To change the angle to position 1 from position 2 first unlock the front panel by pulling it all the way out to the return position Then return it to position 0 and pull out again to position 1 Connections and Settings Produc
176. al over the range 200 ns The display shows 0 to 1023 P7 OTHER page F3 RUN MODE Selects the timecode run mode FREE RUN Timecode advances as long as the unit is powered on regardless of the unit s operating state REC RUN Timecode advances only during recording When you select this item also set F1 TCG on this page to INT and set F2 PRST RGN to PRESET F4 DF NDF Selects the drop frame mode for the internal timecode generator and the counter in 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode DF Drop frame mode NDF Non drop frame mode F5 PDPSET When the system frequency is set to 1080 59 94i 1080 29 97P or 720 59 94P presets the timecode of the A frame of the pulldown sequence 24F TC Reference timecode for A frame 30F TC Timecode after pulldown conversion from 24 frame timecode F6 TCR Selects the type of timecode to display in the time data display area TC Display TC VITC Display VITC Item Setting F1 CONV IMP _ Selects whether to display convert status on the display during convert operations OFF Do not display ON Display F2 ERR LOG Displays an error log screen F3 CLIP FLG Sets a clip flag for the clip being recorded or played back using the function button If a clip flag is already set for the clip Marked is displayed in the function menu item corresponding to one of the F1 to F3 buttons depending on the type of flag that has
177. al number of expanded thumbnails and the number of the selected thumbnail Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 67 Q Clip name Displays the name or a title of the expanded clip see page 66 Duration Displays the time from the selected thumbnail to the next one Chapter thumbnail screen Chapters are the sections between the shot marks Rec Start marks and other essence marks that have been recorded in clips This screen allows you to display thumbnails of the chapters in the selected clip Shot marks can be set by the user during recording and playback They can be deleted and moved Essence marks other than shot marks are set automatically They cannot be deleted or moved 2 Chapter of Clip 001 024 Eu C us Tm Eo I TC 00 23 00 25 TC 00 23 02 00 TC 00 23 04 00 cup C0001 DUR 0 00 01 05 Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 67 Clip number total clips Displays the total number of clips on the disc and the number of the clip that contains the displayed chapters If the essence mark name is a user defined name it is displayed between quotation marks for example as Chapter Touch Down see page 93 S1 S2 RS marks The S1 S2 and RS marks on the thumbnails indicate frames where Shot Mark1 Shot Mark2 and Rec Start essence marks are set Chapter number total chapters Displays t
178. ar in thumbnails Press once more turning the indicator off to return to a whole screen display See GUI screen operations page 72 for more information about how to use the thumbnail screens Q DISPLAY button Each press of this button switches between the basic operation display and video monitor display see page 21 This button is disabled unless either the basic operation display or the video monitor display is displayed SHIFT button Switches between functions for any button with two functions PAGE HOME button When pressed alone functions as the PAGE page switching button When pressed together with the SHIFT button functions as the HOME button PAGE button Displays the function menu if it is not already visible The most recently displayed page of the function menu appears HOME button When pressed with the function menu visible returns to the HOME page of the function menu EXPAND button When pressed during thumbnail display divides the selected clip into 12 blocks and displays a list of thumbnails of the first frame in each block expand function The division is repeated with each press up to 3 times for a total of 1 728 blocks When this button is pressed together with the SHIFT button the unit returns to the previous division level Press the RESET RETURN button to return to the thumbnail screen This button also becomes a function button F6 when the function menu is visible
179. ation If you move the unit from a very cold place to a warm place or use it in a damp location condensation may form on the optical pickup Then if the unit is operated in this state recording and playback may not be performed properly Do the following to prevent this from happening When you move or operate the unit in an environment where condensation may form be sure to insert a disc in advance Whenever you turn on the on standby button check that the HUMID indicator does not appear on the color LCD If it appears wait until it disappears before inserting a disc About the LCD panel LCD panels are manufactured with extremely high precision technology that yields effective pixel rates of 99 99 or higher However very rarely one or more pixels may be permanently dark or permanently lit in white red blue or green Important Notes on Operation xipueddy 155 xipueddy 156 This phenomenon is not a malfunction Such pixels have no effect on the recorded data and the unit may be used with confidence even if they are present Periodic Maintenance Periodic Maintenance Digital hours meter The digital hours meter can provide eight items of information about the operational history of the unit The information can be displayed in the time data display area and also by text superimposition on the monitor connected to the unit Use the information as a guide in scheduling periodic ma
180. but shot marks can be set at any scene during recording or playback The chapter function allows you to display thumbnails of the chapters in a clip See To set shot marks page 51 for more information See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of a clip with chapters set The S mark appears on the thumbnails of clips with chapters set 2 Press the CHAPTER button The chapter thumbnail screen see page 66 appears with thumbnails of the frames where chapters are set The S1 S2 and RS marks on the thumbnails indicate frames where Shot Mark1 Shot Mark2 and Rec Start essence marks are set To delete the shot mark at a chapter position You can delete the shot mark Shot MarkO to 9 at the chapter position in the chapter thumbnail screen Rec Start cannot be deleted 1 In the chapter thumbnail screen select the thumbnail for the frame whose shot mark you want to delete 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Delete Essence Mark A message appears asking if you are sure that you want to delete the shot mark Delete Essence Mark Delete 002 0 q 4 Select OK to delete the mark or Cancel to cancel the deletion and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To adjust the position of shot marks at chapter positions You can use the chapter thumbnail screen to adjust the position of shot marks Shot MarkO to 9 at
181. can do the following Select clips in a certain video format from a disc that contains clips in different video formats Select clips that have been set NG as a clip flag and delete all of those clips in one operation Select only clips that have been recorded on the basis of a specified planning metadata entry and transfer those clips to an external device using the Direct FTP function see page 96 To filter clips See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Display the clip thumbnail screen 2 If you want to select clips by video format select the thumbnails of clips in that format 3 Display the Thumbnail menu 4 Select Filter Clips and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Filter Clips screen appears Filter Clips Select Filter Condition Clip Flag OK g NG p Flag KP KEEP Clip Flag none Current Planning Metadata PM_001_sample AV Format of Selected Clip meea 1080SP 4ch D Select the clip filtering condition Item name Filtering condition Clip Flag OK Clip flag set in the clip OK NG Clip Flag NG KP KEEP none Clip Flag KP KEEP Clip Flag none Current Planning Metadata Clips that have been recorded according to the instructions in the currently loaded planning metadata AV Format of Selected Clip Video format of the selected clips 6 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A filter thumbnail screen appear
182. ce mark names in the sections indicated by shading in Essence mark name string example Names can be either in ASCII format up to 32 characters or UTF 8 format up to 16 characters If a name string contains even one non ASCII character the maximum length of that string is 16 characters Essence mark name string example lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt 4 PlanningMetadata xmlnsz http xmlns sony net pro metadata planningmetadata assignId H00123 creationDate 2009 04 15T08 00 00Z lastUpdate 2009 04 15T15 00 00Z version 1 00 gt 4 lt Properties propertyId assignment class original update 2009 04 15T15 00 00Z sp modifiedByz Chris e3 Overview epen Buruue d g 1e deuo 153 ejepeje u Buiuuejd 9 sajydeyo 154 Title usAscii Football Game xml lang en gt Football Game 15 04 2009 Title e Meta name _ShotMark1 pcontent Goal gt Meta name _ShotMark2 peontent Shoot gt H4 Meta name _ShotMark3 pceontent Corner Kick gt 4 Meta name _ShotMark4 peontent Free Kick gt 4 Meta name _ShotMark5 pceontent Goal Kick gt 4 Meta name _ShotMark6 peontent Foul gt Meta name _ShotMark7 pceontent PK gt 3 Meta name _ShotMark8 pceontent Ist Half gt H Meta name _ShotMark9 peontent 2nd Half gt 4 Meta name _ShotMarkO peontent Kick Off gt Properties 4 PlanningMetadata 4
183. censes Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 4 Sun Microsystems Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright O 2003 Sun Microsystems Inc 4150 Network Circle Santa Clara California 95054 U S A AII rights reserved Use is subject to license terms below This distribution may include materials developed by third parties Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
184. clip 2 Sub clip 3 In the above example the whole of clip 2 has been added as sub clip 1 and the whole of clip 4 has been added as sub clip 2 Sub clip 3 is part of clip 3 Therefore when clip list E0001 is played back clip 4 is played after clip 2 and then the part of clip 3 shown in gray color is played Clip list editing current clip list To edit a clip list you need to load the clip list from the disc into the unit s internal memory The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory is called the current clip list The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation and editing Clip list playback also uses the current clip list After creating and editing a clip list you need to save it to disc Unit memory Clip list playback and thumbnail display Current clip list Can be edited adding deleting and reordering sub clips LOAD C0001 Clip 1 C0002 Clip 2 C0003 Clip 3 E0001 Clip list 1 E0002 Clip list 2 E0003 Clip list 3 i E0099 Clip list 99 Clip list playback Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc To play a clip list insert a disc into the unit load the clip list that you want to play and press the PLAY button Clips are played according to the data in the clip list Creating and editing clip lists The following table lists the steps in the creation and editing of clip lists wi
185. code to eliminate the discrepancy between timecode value and actual time by dropping two frames from the timecode value at the beginning of each minute except every tenth minute E E mode Electric to Electric mode When you operate a VDR in E E mode input video and or audio signals pass through electric circuits only and then come out from the output connectors without passing through electromagnetic conversion circuits such as recording heads Essence mark A type of metadata that may be set for a specified frame For more efficient searches XDCAM equipment records essence marks as part of Non RealTime metadata and uses them to display thumbnails HD tri level sync An HDTV analog reference signal that applies to 59 94 50Hz systems A sync signal defined in SMPTE 274M with positive negative and zero values HDSDI signal Abbreviation of HD Serial Digital Interface A signal in the HDTV serial interface defined by SMPTE 292M Metadata Information about the properties of video and audio content XDCAM records metadata such as UMIDs and essence marks titles and comments MXF Material eXchange Format A file exchange format developed by the Pro MPEG Forum Equipment from different manufacturers can exchange files in this format Non audio General term for audio signals other than linear PCM such as Dolby E D and Dolby Digital AC 3 XDCAM can record non audio as an input signal 1 Dolby i
186. consumption AC operation 80 W DC operation 65 W Power saving mode 55 W Peak inrush current 1 Power ON current probe method 45 A 240 V 18 A 100 V 2 Hot switching inrush current measured in accordance with European standard EN55103 1 11 A 230 V Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C 41 F to 104 F Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Operating relative humidity 25 to 90 System Recording playback format Video MPEG HD 422 50 Mbps Proxy video MPEG 4 Specifications xipueddy 169 xipueddy 170 Audio Proxy audio 24 bits 48 KHz 8 channels A law 8 bits 8 kHz 8 channels Recording playback times PFD23A discs Approx 43 minutes PFD50DLA discs Approx 95 minutes The recording and playback times listed above are approximate Maximum recording times may vary depending on recording conditions Search speed Jog mode Variable mode 2 to 2 times normal speed 20 to 20 times normal speed or maximum speed as selected by an extended menu setting D to 1 times normal speed Shuttle mode F FWD mode 35 times normal speed or maximum speed as selected by an extended menu setting F REV mode 35 times normal speed or maximum speed as selected by an extended menu setting 1 1 Maximum speed is about 50 times normal speed However the maximum speed may vary depending on the state of the clip and the playback position on the disc Video pe
187. ct Reconnect and press the PUSH SET S SEL knob to reconnect to that host The host is selected automatically and the screen changes directly to the Connecting Status screen see step 9 in the procedure The Reconnect button is not enabled if the most recent operation failed to connect to a remote host Select gt and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Select Remote Host screen appears Upload Clips via Direct FTP Select Remote Host Remote Host 2 Remote Host 3 Remote Host 4 UPnP Hosts Discovered via UPnP Network Config Cancel nd SU9BINS MD ui suonejedo g Ja deyD Select the remote host the target device to which you want to transfer the clips You can register up to four remote hosts Remote Host 1 to 3 Register these in the settings screen Remote Host 4 UPnP A remote host that supports UPnP universal plug and play is detected and registered automatically see To enable the UPnP function page 97 To check remote hosts discovered by the UPnP function Select Hosts Discovered via UPnP and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob If the UPnP function of this unit is disabled a confirmation screen appears prompting you to enable it Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The UPnP function will Transferring Clips Direct FTP Function 97 SueeiJoS IND ul suoneiedo g 1e1deuo 98 be enabled when you power the unit off and then on again
188. ct a frame with the PLAY button or the jog dial 5 Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To select index pictures by using the expand and chapter functions After using the expand function see page 74 or chapter function see page 74 to find a frame you can set that frame as the index picture of the clip The following example explains how to do so from the expand thumbnail screen See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the expand thumbnail screen select the thumbnail to set as the index picture 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Set Index Picture A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to set the current frame as the index picture Set Index Picture Cancel 4 Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob After pressing the RESET RETURN button to return to the clip thumbnail screen check to make sure that the newly selected frame is displayed as the index picture Checking clip properties You can check clip properties such as the title timecode duration date and time of creation and date and time of the more recent modification See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail screen 2 Select Clip Properties The Clip Properties screen appears Clip Properties Clip No 001 035 Name T l visionLCD Title1 Capping Literally years of spe
189. ction button F5 The message NOW SAVING appears on the video monitor display and Saving appears in the time data display area while the settings of all items are returned to their factory default settings These factory default settings are saved in memory If you power off the unit while settings are being saved settings may not be correctly returned to their factory default settings Wait until the saving is completed before powering off the unit To abandon the resetting operation Instead of pressing the SAVE function button F5 press the RESET RETURN button The display returns to the top level of the setup menu leaving the settings unchanged To customize the display of setup menu items You can select the menu items displayed in the setup menu 1 Set maintenance menu item M41 CUSTOMIZE to ENABLE See page 149 for information about how to use the maintenance menu Hold down the MENU button for about three seconds The SETUP CUSTOMIZE screen appears SETUP CUSTOMIZE XH01 0PE HOURS HO2 LASERO LASER1 OPE HOURS r SEEK HOURSOr SPDL HOURS r LOAD COUNT r SEEK HOURS1r P ROLL TIME CHARA H POS CHaRa U POS 3 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob so that the mark appears next to the item you want to hide or display in the setup menu SETUP CUSTOMIZE H01 0PE HOURS LASERO LASER1 OPE HOURS r SEEK HOURSOr SPDL HOURS r LOAD COUNT r SEEK
190. d of the file Input example SITE REPFL Clip sakura 0001 MXF 5 150 Transfer sakura 0001 MXF Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame 150 SITE FSTS Acquires the system status of this unit One of the following status codes is sent 0 Initial state or no disc is loaded 1 File system mount is OK 3 File system mount is not OK Command syntax SITE FSTS lt CRLF gt SITE MEID Acquires the media ID of the disc loaded in this unit Command syntax SITE MEID lt CRLF gt SITE FUNC Acquires the function and version of the extended commands Information is sent in the following format Command syntax main function SP branch function SP branch function version For XDCAM sent in a format like 200 MXF DISK 1 200 is a response code Command syntax SITE FUNC lt CRLF gt FTP File Operations SITE UMMD When a C MXF file is sent with the STOR command the copy source UMID is saved if this command is invoked immediately before the STOR command Command syntax SITE UMMD lt CRLF gt SITE DF Acquires the amount of free disc space Command syntax SITE DF lt CRLF gt SITE CHMOD Locks and unlocks clips Also sets permissions for directories and files in the General directory Command syntax SITE CHMOD lt SP gt lt flag gt lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Specify one of the following values in lt flag gt according to the specification in lt path nam
191. d with CNTR SEL on the HOME page of the function menu see page 44 Display Type of time data TC Timecode COUNTER Elapsed recording playback time UB User bits VITC VITC VIUB VIUB TCG Timecode generator value UBG User bits generator value Time data Normally displays timecode or VITC according to the selection made with TCR on page P5 TC of the function menu Recording mode indication This appears when setup menu item 150 REC MODE is set to disc exchange cache or clip continuous rec see page 130 See page 52 for more information about the disc exchange cache function See page 53 for more information about the Clip Continuous Rec function Q Disc information Disc loaded indication usable format 59 941 J B System frequency f 422 1080 Video format I 50MbPs j 18CH 24BIT Audio format Disc loaded indication usable format When a disc is loaded in this unit a disc loaded indication appears When no disc is loaded the usable formats are displayed The background color of the disc loaded mark indicates one of the following disc states Blue Disc capable of recording and playback Yellow Disc capable of playback only Red Disc incapable of recording and playback Even if the background is blue recording is not possible in the following cases When a disc with recording inhibited is loaded When REC INH on
192. de input to any of the TIME CODE IN connector can be selected To record timecode after setting an initial value Internal Preset Proceed as follows with the function menu For setting the timecode set TCG on page P5 TC of the function menu to INT and PRST RGN to PRESET Time data display area Function menu Function buttons Setting an initial timecode value 1 Press the CNTR SEL function button on the HOME page of the function menu and select TC Setting System Frequency Setting Timecode suonejedejgd e je deu 39 suonejedejg e Jajdeyo 40 2 Press the TCG SET function button F5 The first digit of the time data display starts flashing 3 Press the or function button F1 or F2 to select a digit to be set The selected digit starts flashing I Use the PUSH SET S SEL knob or or function button F3 or F4 to set the value for the selected digit To set the next most significant digit 10s place Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob while holding down the SHIFT button Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set all digits that should be set To set to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET RETURN button 5 Press the SET function button F5 If RUN MODE on page P5 TC is set to FREE RUN the timecode starts running To cancel a setting Press the EXIT function button F6 Any new sett
193. der controlling through REMOTE 9P connector iet e terere estu Sue re ne va ERU due d YR es 37 Connections for pool coverage 0 0 eeeeceeeseceesteceeseceeaeceeaeceeaeesaeeees 37 Synchronization Reference Signals 38 Setting System Frequency cessere 39 Setting TImecode incon iiai aiaiai ub sa Du OG EE 39 Superimposed Text Information sss 41 Basic Operations of the Function Menu 44 Function menu operations iine cie ee ter testas tos e PY ES Ren See E Ve eed ne YE ee g 44 Function menu settings oe oca cte olss e otelscu dee uetus e qi eid nd 44 Handling DISCS iuisei ois nini int xdi awe cx vg bn an naana nasasaad iania 48 Discs used for recording and playback sess 48 Notes on handling uc ees oh tote Co OU ori Ipse ier Ted 48 Table of Contents 5 WEA Prot Cl GISCS 15 n eoe Eti pae ee su iue DD EE DRM S 49 Loading and unloading a d186 4 ure Gere e nde eret ta ER Panes 49 Formatting d dise asd dct ETE EE RR Gane Mui cornea Maen 49 Chapter 4 Recording and Playback FROGCONGIIG e nananana indana rannan ania 50 Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc 50 Preparations for recording 5 5 0 225c 55 duce bo leote e noe oth No tes hcho los te 50 Carry OUETECOTOIWB os suene Poe ipid ptu Oleo coi NR 51
194. disabled st amp ej stop amp eject Only the STOP button and EJECT button are enabled ena all enable All buttons and switches are enabled 007 DISC TIMER DISPLAY Determine whether to display the counter in 12 hour mode or 24 hour mode 12H 12H 12 hour mode 24H 24 hour mode 009 CHARACTER TYPE Determine the type of characters such as timecode output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector for superimposed display on the monitor white White letters on a black background black Black letters on a white background W out White letters with black outline B out Black letters with white outline Set this item by selecting the required type while viewing the monitor 011 CHARACTER V SIZE Determine the vertical size of characters such as timecode output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector for superimposed display on the monitor x1 Standard size x2 2 times standard size Set this item by selecting the required size while viewing the monitor 012 CONDITION DISPLAY ON Select whether to display disc condition marks in external monitor output VIDEO MONITOR output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector dis disable Do not display ena enable Display Setup
195. display B Data indication nara nara SS SS Oe Bee e N Level bars Reference level Audio channel D Monitor channel F1600 Mixing Meter display mode FINE B Meter display mode DATA DATA SS ESE Se Moms Ji 8 o JUUDUULULLY AAA Input signal display Displays the audio input signal Front Panel 21 Sud Jo suonoun J pue seweN z Jeideuo Sued Jo suonounJ pue seuieN z Jeideuo 22 Display Input signal ANA 1 Analog audio Channel 1 3 ANA 2 signal Channel 2 4 MIC 1 Input signal from Channel 1 3 the microphone MIC 2 porinBctad in Channel 2 4 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT connector AES EBU AES EBU format digital audio signal flashes when there is no input signal HD SDI HDSDI audio signal flashes when there is no input signal SD SDI SDSDI audio signal flashes when there is no input signal SG Test signal from the internal signal generator No indication Undefined audio signal or no audio input Data indication Appears when the input signals are non audio signals F1600 Mixing Displays the input channels used for audio mixing These channels are selected with setup menu item 819 AUDIO INPUT ARRANGE D Monitor channel Displays the audio monitoring channels set with MONITR L and MONITR R on page P2 AUDIO of the function menu see page 45
196. dix 155 Area of use setting 30 Arrow buttons 16 Audio input display 21 Audio level adjustment section 16 meters 21 AUDIO MONITOR R L connectors 28 Basic menu 120 changing settings 126 items 121 operations 125 returning to factory default settings 126 Battery attaching a battery pack 29 checking the remaining power 30 removing 30 C CH 1 ALL CH CH 2 to CH 4 adjustment knobs 16 Chapter function 74 thumbnail screen 68 CHAPTER button 19 Clip 84 changing index picture 78 continuous playback mode 60 deleting 82 duration 67 finding 74 information 22 locking 82 playback screen 65 properties 79 selecting by type 76 single clip playback mode 60 thumbnail screen 65 67 transferring 96 unlocking 82 user defined name 108 Clip Continuous Rec function 53 Clip List Move screen 87 Trim screen 87 user defined name 108 Clip list 84 changing start timecode 88 clearing 90 creating and editing 85 current clip list 84 deleting 90 loading 89 managing 89 playback screen 65 previewing 84 saving 89 sorting 90 thumbnail screen 65 68 Clip Properties screen 79 Closed caption data 175 Command list 114 Communications speed 151 COMPOSITE OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER connectors 27 Connections 33 cut editing system 34 editing control unit settings 35 FAM connection 33 for pool coverage 37 FTP connection 33 using the editing function of recorder 37 Current clip list 84 D Date time setting 31 DC IN 12V connector 26 Delete C
197. e Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob To skip quickly through thumbnails Skip Scroll function When you have a large number of thumbnails like in expand thumbnail screen you can use the Skip Scroll function to skip through them quickly See page 72 for more information about operations in thumbnail screens Inthe screens like clip thumbnail screen or expand thumbnail screen display the Thumbnail Menu 2 Select Skip Scroll and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A small popup window appears on the scrollbar to indicate the position of the currently selected thumbnail within the set of all thumbnails Expand 007 235 An AR NE DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 A NE NB 4 1 m Skip Scroll DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 007 235 KE NE AE iU DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 cup Seashore DUR 0 00 00 01 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob The current position moves by an amount equal to 10 of the total number of thumbnails When you reach a point that is close to the thumbnail you want turn the jog dial to move the selection frame in units of 1 thumbnail Thumbnail Operations su 19 MD ui suonejedo G Ja deyD 73 SU99J9S IMD ui suonejedQ s Je1deu 74 4 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob at the new position The thumbnail at the position indicated in the small popup window appears in a thumbnail screen like the following E
198. e _ represents a space ORGANIZATION organization code Enter a 4 byte alphanumeric string for the organization code There are no problems in recording or playing back audio video signals even if the ORGANIZATION is not set Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the SMPTE registration office When no organization code has been acquired it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary string As a rule the code 00 must be entered Freelance operators who do not belong to an origination should enter USER user code Enter a 4 byte alphanumeric string to identify the user The user code is registered with each organization locally It is usually not centrally registered When the user code is less than 4 bytes enter the user code at the beginning of the 4 bytes and fill the remainder of the string with the space character 20h This user code is determined by the organization The methods used depend on the organization User code cannot be entered when no organization code has been entered Using UMID Data xipueddy 173 xipueddy 174 Ancillary Data This unit can play and record ancillary data multiplexed into HDSDI signals It can also input and output ancillary data in MXF files when transferring files via FAM or FTP connections Transferable auxiliary data includes text data captions and metadata and control signals Ancillary data in HDSDI SDSDI signals This unit can rec
199. e addition in that screen 7 Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips 8 Save the clip list see page 89 In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the PUSH SET S SEL knob with the SHIFT button held down To add clips from the clip playback screen quick insertion This method allows you to decide the range to use and add that range as a sub clip while viewing the video in the clip playback screen It does not use GUI screens You can do this during recording playback including pauses and searches 1 Find the point that you want to make the start point of the sub clip and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob with the IN button held down An In point is set and the IN indicator lights 2 Find the point that you want to make the end point of the sub clip and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob with the OUT button held down An Out point is set and the OUT indicator lights This determines the range of the sub clip to be added To check the timecode of the In point or Out point Press the IN button or the OUT button To cue up the In point or Out point Press the PREV button or the NEXT button with the IN button or OUT button held down To check the duration time from In point to Out point Press the IN and OUT buttons at the same time To delete the In point or Out point Press the RESET RETURN button with the IN or OUT button held down 3 With the SHIFT bu
200. e editing only SD upconvert function The unit can output HD signals while playing discs recorded as SD allowing SD material to be utilized in an HD environment P HD1500 When the PDBK S1500 or PDBK F1500 option is installed HD downconvert function The unit is provided with a downconvert function HD disc playback signals can be downconverted to SD signals and then output as SDSDI or composite signals This allows you to use SD nonlinear editors and monitors for editing and program output 1080 720 cross conversion This unit supports cross conversion output It can output 720 while playing discs recorded as 1080 and output 1080 while playing discs recorded as 720 HDSDI remote recording HDSDI connections can be made to camcorders with remote HDSDI support PDW 700 XDCAM HD422 camcorder HDW 730 7308 750 790 F900R HDCAM P camcorders to enable recording synchronized to REC and STOP operations on the camcorder 1 HDCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation Clip Continuous Rec function Normally a clip is generated as an independent file every time recording starts and stops The Clip Continuous Rec function allows you to continue recording to the same clip until the function is stopped or turned off regardless of how many times recording starts and stops This is convenient if you want to avoid generating a large number of short clips or if you want to record without worrying about the limit on the
201. e gt When a clip is specified in lt path name gt 444 Lock 666 Unlock When a directory in the General directory is specified in path name b55 Forbid writing to the directory 777 Allow writing to the directory When a file in the General directory is specified in path name gt 444 Forbid writing to and execution of the file 555 Forbid writing to the file but allow execution 666 Allow writing to the file but forbid execution 777 Allow writing to and execution of the file Input example SITE CHMOD 444 Clip C0001 MXF Lock clip C0001 MXF SITE TCPR Presets the starting timecode of a clip copied with the STOR command Specify the timecode in the format ffssmmhh ff frames ss seconds mm minutes hh hours This command remains in effect until a STOR command is executed or if no STOR command is executed until the FTP connection is terminated If a SITE UMMD command is executed after this command the SITE UMMD command takes priority and this command is discarded f this command is executed several times in sequence the last command takes priority Command syntax SITE TCPR SP lt timecode gt lt CRLF gt Input example SITE TCPR 00050001 The starting timecode is preset to 01 00 05 00 Recording Continuous Timecode with FAM and FTP Connections When you are connected to the unit by FAM or FTP you can create new clips with timecode that is continuou
202. e the 1080 23 98P system lines setting of this unit or enable mixed 720 59 94P format recording mode 720 50P Troubleshooting xipueddy 167 xipueddy 168 Alarm message in time data display area Alarm message in video monitor screen Action HD422 1080 DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED This appears when mixed format recording mode is HD422 720 VIDEO REC MODE SELECTION disabled and the video recording format of this unit DIFFERENT FROM VIDEO ON DISC does not match the video recording format of the HD420 1080 inserted disc Insert a disc with a video recording format that HD420 720 matches the video recording format of this unit or IMX50 Clip change the video recording format of this unit IMX40 Clip IMX30 Clip 8CHx16 Clip DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED This appears when mixed format recording mode is 4CHx24 Cli AUDIO REC MODE SELECTION disabled and the audio recording format of this unit p DIFFERENT FROM AUDIO ON DISC does not match the audio recording format of the 2CHx16 Clip inserted disc Insert a disc with a audio recording format that matches the audio recording format of this unit or change the audio recording format of this unit System FREQ RECORDING AND PLAYBACK IS NOT POSSIBLE SYSTEM FREQUENCY SELECTION DIFFER FROM IT ON DISC This appears when mixed format recording mode is disabled and the system frequency setting of this unit does not match the system f
203. e thumbnail of the locked clips In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down To lock all clips 1 Display the Disc Menu Thumbnail Operations 2 Select Lock or Delete All Clips and then select Lock All Clips A message appears asking you to confirm locking all clips 3 Select OK to lock all clips or Cancel to cancel it and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To unlock a specific clip See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to unlock 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu Select Lock Unlock Clip A message appears asking you to confirm the unlocking Unlock Clip C0004 Unlock this Clip e q 4 Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down To unlock clips 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Lock or Delete All Clips and then select Unlock AII Clips A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to unlock all clips 3 Select OK to execute the unlock or Cancel to cancel it and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Deleting clips You can delete clips while checking their contents Clips cannot be deleted when the write inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position or when
204. e thumbnail of the first sub clip 2 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To play using the clip list playback screen 1 Display the clip list playback screen 2 Press the PREV button or the NEXT button to display the sub clip that you want to play To start play from the first sub clip Press the SHIFT PREV buttons to move to the start of the clip list 3 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To change the starting timecode of clip lists The timecode of clip lists is continuous timecode unrelated to the timecode of the original clips By default the timecode LTC of the start of the clip list is 00 00 00 00 but it can be set to any value See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Thumbnail Menu 2 Select Set Start Time Code and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Set Start Time Code screen appears Set Start Time Code TC Ble 3 S N EC Preset TC 00 00 00 00 Cancel 3 Press the IN or amp OUT button to select the di git that you want to change 4 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the jog dial to change the value of the digit 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required To reset the timecode to 00 00 00 00 Select Reset to Zero in the Thumbnail Menu and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To preset the frequently used timecode Select Save Preset TC in the Thumbnail Menu and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The timecode set
205. e total optical output time Superimposed Text Information suonejedejgd e je deu 43 Basic Operations of the Function Menu The function menu provides access to frequently used settings such as input video signal selection and timecode settings Menu settings are stored in nonvolatile memory and are preserved even after the unit is powered off suonejedejg e Jaydeyo 44 Function menu operations The function menu appears on the color LCD of this unit The following figure shows the buttons F1 to F6 beginning at the top used in function menu operations Function buttons F1 to F6 Function menu PUSH SET S SEL w01 500 001 001 000 00 li 5 TL 0t T TCG SET L 4 12 34 47 12 ud i PUSH SET S SEL knob DISPLAY button PAGE HOME button To display the function menu The function menu is made up of the HOME page and pages P1 to P7 P8 P HOME2 P If the function menu is not already visible press the PAGE HOME button to display it The most recently accessed function menu page appears 1 If a menu item is assigned using maintenance menu item M38 F KEY CONFIG To display a different page Each press of the PAGE HOME button displays the next function menu page in the order HOME gt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 HOME2 P HOME 1 If a menu item is assigned using maintenance menu item M
206. ears if you press the PREV button or conduct a high speed reverse search when the unit is stopped at the start of the disc Use forward search or playback instead Disc End 9 DISC END This appears if you press the NEXT button or conduct a forward high speed search when the unit is stopped at the end of the disc Use reverse search or playback instead Clip Top CLIP TOP This appears in single clip playback mode if you execute a reverse search when the unit is stopped at the first frame of a clip To move to another clip press the PREV NEXT SHIFT PREV or SHIFT NEXT button or perform a thumbnail search Clip End CLIP END This appears in single clip playback mode if you execute a forward search when the unit is stopped at the last frame of a clip To move to another clip press the PREV NEXT SHIFT PREV or SHIFT NEXT button or perform a thumbnail search MAX Clips DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO Delete unneeded clips or insert a disc with enough FOR MORE RECORDING DELETE free space SOME CLIPS MAX Files DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO Delete clips or GENERAL files FOR MORE RECORDING SPACE DELETE CLIPS OR NON AV DATA GENERAL FILES Disc Full DISC FULL Delete unneeded clips or insert a disc with enough FOR MORE RECORDING DELETE SOME CLIPS free space Troubleshooting Alarm message in time data display area This appears when an attempt is made to add sub MAX SB CLP D Alarm messa
207. ed In point this flashes IN button and OUT button When the THUMBNAIL indicator see page 18 is lit you can use these for thumbnail selection An In or Out point is set when you press the PUSH SET S SEL knob with the IN or OUT button held down The In or Out point setting is deleted when you press the RESET RETURN button with the IN or OUT button held down Shuttle jog variable control section Q SHTL JOG button VAR JOG button Jog shuttle transport indicators SHTL JOG VAR JOG Z Jog dial Shuttle dial For details of playback operations with these buttons and dials see Playback operation on page 61 SHTL JOG button Press this button turning it on to perform shuttle playback with the shuttle dial or jog playback with the jog dial When pressed during recording stops recording and selects shuttle jog mode If you do not want to stop recording when this button is pressed set setup menu item 145 MODE KEY ENABLE DURING RECORDING to stop VAR JOG button Press this button turning it on to perform variable playback with the shuttle dial or jog playback with the jog dial When pressed during recording stops recording and selects variable jog mode If you do not want to stop recording when this button is pressed set setup menu item 145 MODE KEY ENABLE DURING RECORDING to stop Jog shuttle transport indicators These show the playback direction
208. ed to audio output channels 1 and 2 gt tr3 4 Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 E tr5 6 Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 5 tr7 8 Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 2 CH3 CH4 tr1 2 Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4 tr3 4 Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4 tr5 6 Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4 tr7 8 Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4 828 SDI AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT Select the audio signals to assign to SDI audio output channels Sub item 1 CH1 CH2 tr1 2 Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 tr3 4 Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 tr5 6 Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 tr7 8 Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 1 and 2 2 CH3 CH4 tr1 2 Tracks 1 and 2 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4 tr3 4 Tracks 3 and 4 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4 tr5 6 Tracks 5 and 6 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4 tr7 8 Tracks 7 and 8 assigned to audio output channels 3 and 4 831 TS OUT AUDIO MODE P Select the number of output channels for i LINK TS HDV signals 4ch 4 channels 2ch 2 channels Setup Menu 1 39 snue WN 4 Ja deup 140 Menu items in the 800s relating to audio control Item number Item name 834 AUDIO INPUT LEVEL Sub item Settings Select the analog
209. editing functions of the recorder controlling through REMOTE 9P connector The following figure shows a cut editing system comprising this unit as a player and an HDW M2000 M2000P unit as a recorder In this example video and audio signals are connected by HDSDI and control signals are transferred via the REMOTE 9P connector HD video monitor To HDSDI input connector PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 i unit player a REF VIDEO it 9 gt Reference i U ES AD video signal HDW M2000 recorder REF VIDEO HDSDI INPUT INPUT To HDSDI input connector HD video monitor 759 coaxial cable not supplied _ _ 9 pin remote control cable not supplied D HDW M2000 recorder Settings on this unit setting REMOTE 1 9P button Remote control switch Unlit REMOTE see page 16 Setup menu item 214 REMOTE INTERFACE 9PIN For details of HDW M2000 M2000P settings refer to the HDW M2000 M2000P Operation Manual Connections for pool coverage The following figure shows an example of connections for pool coverage with the PDW 700 Professional Disc Camcorder connected PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 this unit
210. ee page 68 Clip flag icon Displays the corresponding icon when a clip flag OK NG KP KEEP is set in the clip Clip and frame information Displays the clip or frame information selected with the Clip Information item in the Thumbnail Menu see Overview SU88J0S MD ul suoneiado s Ja deyD 67 SU99J9S IMD ui suonejedQ s Je1deu 68 page 78 The factory default selection is the timecode of the first frame or the timecode of the thumbnail frame Q Lock icon This icon appears when the clip is locked protected see page 82 Clips cannot be deleted and their clip information cannot be changed when this mark is displayed Q N A clip mark This appears on N A clips when an N A disc is inserted The display of the lock icon takes priority Clip list thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of the clips in the current clip list You can use this screen to create and edit clips lists N RI Pa TC 00 00 12 04 TC 00 00 20 13 TC 00 00 00 00 TC 00 00 04 14 i oe PS E LL EU TC 00 00 28 08 TC 00 00 46 08 TC 00 00 35 15 TC 00 00 53 22 amd mo as TC 00 00 59 16 TC 00 01 06 18 TC 00 01 13 11 TC 00 01 17 27 DATE amp TIME 28 JUL 2006 19 55 00 01 31 16 Q Clip list name Displays the name or a title of the clip list see page 66 Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 67 Q Sub clip number number of sub clips Displays the total number of s
211. eir entire length Use channel pairs CH1 2 CH3 4 CH5 6 CH7 8 for non audio insert editing Non audio editing is not executed unless a channel pair is specified See page 125 for more information about setup menu operations See page 149 for more information about maintenance menu operations Settings required for editing The following table shows the settings required for editing Item Audio digital signal processor Setting With the maintenance menu item M39 OTHER CONFIG M393 AUDIO DSP select linear edit Video input signal Select the video input signal with V INPUT on page P1 VIDEO of the function menu Connections Make connections in the same way as for a cut editing system see page 34 When making the connections also refer to the operation manuals provided with the equipment to be connected Audio input signal Select the audio input signal with A1 INPUT and A2 INPUT on page P2 AUDIO and A3 INPUT to A8 INPUT on page P3 AUDIO of the function menu Input audio level Adjust the input audio level with the CH 1 ALL CH and CH 2 to CH 4 knobs Edit point transition type With setup menu item 317 AUDIO EDIT MODE select cut edit or cross fade Audio mix See the next section To set up mixing of audio input signals Preparations for editing Recording format settings Before performing clip editing you need to set the
212. ejdeup 28 3 and whether the signal input to connector 2 is assigned to audio channel 2 or 4 You can set the reference input level with the maintenance menu item M37 AUDIO CONFIG see page 145 Factory default setting 4 dB Microphone settings If you have connected a microphone to this unit you can set input level AGC and limiter values for the microphone with setup menu items 834 839 840 and 841 see page 140 An unpleasant sound may be output if you have connected a microphone to the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT 1 or 2 connector and power the microphone on with the input level too high Check the input level setting before connecting a microphone ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT 1 2 connectors XLR 3 pin male These output analog audio signals When the unit is shipped from the factory the 1 connector is set to audio channel 1 and the 2 connector is set to audio channel 2 You can change these settings with setup menu item 824 ANALOG LINE OUTPUT SELECT see page 139 You can set the output level with the maintenance menu item M37 AUDIO CONFIG see page 145 Factory default setting 4 dB Non audio signals are muted AUDIO MONITOR R L connectors XLR 3 pin male This outputs an audio signal for monitoring The monitored channel is selected with MONITR L and MONITR R on page P2 AUDIO of the function menu See Basic Operations of the Function Menu page 44 for more information Digital audio signa
213. elect Drive even though the USB memory is not connected Not Loaded This appears when a command related to planning metadata is executed with no planning metadata loaded Load planning metadata and try again Syntax Error This appears when loading of planning metadata fails because of a syntax error Correct the syntax error and try loading the metadata again Irregular Disc is Used Use Professional Disc This appears when the unit is unable to record or play the inserted disc This unit can record and play Professional Discs Insert a Professional Disc The Disc Write Protect TAB is set to Save This appears when an attempt is made to format a write protected disc Try formatting the disc after moving the write protect tab away from the Save position The REC Inhibit Mode is Selected Check Function Menu This appears when an attempt was made to format when function menu item HOME gt F3 REC INH is set to ON Set F3 REC INH to OFF and try formatting again Auto Formatting was not Completed This appears when auto formatting fails Video Resolution Differ from it on Clip List This appears when an attempt is made to add a clip to a clip list containing clips with a different video resolution number of system lines It is not possible to add clips to clip lists containing clips with a different video resolution No Clip Meets the Condition This appears when no clip is
214. ent format on an external monitor In OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 this case the external monitor values are shown in SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector is input An abbreviated name appears in the time data display area when you press the NEXT button parentheses Underlined values are the factory defaults Menu items in the 100s relating to the control panels Item number 101 Item name SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE Settings Select how the unit enters the shuttle jog or variable speed mode dial dial direct Press the SHTL JOG or VAR JOG button or except during recording editing turn the jog dial or shuttle dial key via search key Press the SHTL JOG or VAR JOG button 102 MAXIMUM SPEED Specify the search speed in F FWD F REV mode forward and reverse high speed search and shuttle mode 35 20 F FWD F REV mode 35 times normal speed Shuttle mode 20 times normal speed MX 20 F FWD F REV mode Maximum speed Shuttle mode 20 times normal speed MAX F FWD F REV mode Maximum speed Shuttle mode maximum speed Maximum speed is about 50 times normal speed However the maximum speed may vary depending on the state of the clip and the playback position on the disc 105 REFERENCE SYSTEM ALARM Select whether to display a warning when the reference video signal is not being supplied or when it differs from this unit s system frequency off
215. enu item 035 CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT for clip names plan Use the name specified in planning metadata B01 RECALL SETUP BANK 1 Set to on to recall menu settings from menu bank 1 B02 RECALL SETUP BANK 2 Set to on to recall menu settings from menu bank 2 B03 RECALL SETUP BANK 3 Set to on to recall menu settings from menu bank 3 Setup Menu Item number Item name B11 SAVE SETUP BANK 1 Settings Set to on to save current menu settings to menu bank 1 off B12 SAVE SETUP BANK 2 Set to on to save current menu settings to menu bank 2 B13 SAVE SETUP BANK 3 Set to on to save current menu settings to menu bank 3 B20 RESET SETUP MENU Set to on to return the settings of the current menu to the factory default settings Set to bank 4 to set the current menu to the settings saved in menu bank 4 on Return the current menu to the factory default settings bank 4 Set the current menu to the settings saved in menu bank 4 a HD1500 When the PDBZ UPG02 Software Upgrade Key is installed b HD1500 When the PDBK S1500 or PDBK F1500 option is installed Basic menu operations The setup menus are displayed in the time data display area of the basic operation display or on the video monitor display If you have connected an external monitor they are also superimposed over the picture shown on that monitor
216. esidential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation For customers in Canada This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 3 4 For the customers in Europe This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC Directive issued by the Commission of the European Community Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the following European standards e EN55103 1 Electromagnetic Interference Emission EN55103 2 Electromagnetic Susceptibility Immunity This product is intended for use in the following Electromagnetic Environments E1 residential E2 commercial and light industrial E3 urban outdoors E4 controlled EMC environment ex TV studio The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku T
217. evice 0001 to 9999 Other files Files other than the above No 7 No oe a The unit can handle files with user defined names in the C part g When the C part of a C MXF file name is changed a C MOI XML b Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length in a format matching file and a C MO2 KLV file with the same name in the C part is also the format system frequency and recording format MPEG HD and number of audio channels of the recorded sections of the disc and which can be overwritten by XDCAM Partial writing is not possible c Overwriting is not possible d Only when sub item NAMING FORM of setup menu item 036 is set to free e Any clip may be selected and deleted f Only files which can be written by XDCAM Component directory changed automatically h When a C MXF file is created a C MO01 XML file with the same name in the C part is created automatically i When a C MXF file is deleted a C MO1 XML file and a C M02 KLV file with the same name in the C part is also deleted automatically Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory File name Content Operations Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete P MXF9 Audio clip files MXF files generated Yes Yes P No9 No 9 Nof when you execute voice over editing on the PDW HR1 0001 to 0099 Other files Files other than the above No No a
218. f the same line is specified with M3BO and M3B1 the setting with M3B1 is ignored When VANC data is output to HDSDI playback signals the number of the output VANC line is the same as that of the input VANC line When a UMID or essence mark line is selected with M3B1 or M3B2 UMID or essence mark output takes priority To disable UMID or essence mark output set setup menu item 651 or 657 to off Sub item 1 LINE Selects the LINE for the VANC to be received OFF 9LINE to 20LINE 59 94i 50i 29 97P 25P 23 98P mode OFF 9LINE to 25LINE 59 94P 50P mode 2 DID Specification of the DID of the VANC to receive 00h FFh 3 SDID Specification of the SDID of the VANC to receive 00h FFh M3B1 LINE1 SEL Selects the LINE to be received for the HDSDI VANC data OFF 9LINE to 20LINE 59 94i 50i 29 97P 25P 23 98P mode OFF 9LINE to 25LINE 59 94P 50P mode M3B2 LINE2 SEL Selects the LINE to be received for the HDSDI VANC data OFF 9LINE to 20LINE 59 94i 50i 29 97P 25P 23 98P mode OFF 9LINE to 25LINE 59 94P 50P mode M3C POWER SAVE CONTROL Specification of whether to enable the power saving function OFF ON M3D DATE TIME PRESET Specifies the year month day time and time zone M3E USB MEMORY UTIL For installation of software upgrade For details refer to the Maintenance Manual M3F FACTORY SETUP For details refer to the Maintenance Manual a HD1
219. f use system frequency recording format and current date and time still unset Therefore you need to make initial setup settings before using the unit You cannot use the unit without setting it up Once the unit has been set up the settings are retained even when the unit is powered off Use the following procedures 1 Power the unit on The INITIAL SETUP screen appears on the display INITIAL SETUP UC J MODEL SELECT NONE INC DEC CTRL KNOB CANCEL amp PREV F1 RET SET amp NEXT F5 SET 2 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select the area of use Display UC for regions outside Japan or J for Japan and then press the SET function button F5 The system frequency screen appears 3 Tur the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select the system frequency RETURN INITIAL SETUP SYSTEM FREQUENCY SELECT 1080 50i INIT INC DEC CANCEL amp PREV SET amp NEXT CTRL KNOB F1 RET FS SET Display the system frequency that you want to use and then press the SET function button F5 The recording format selection screen appears Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select the recording format RETURN INIT INITIAL SETUP RECORDING FORMAT SELECT HD422 INC DEC CANCEL amp PREVU SET amp NEXT CTRL KNOB F1 RET FS SET Display the recording format that you want to use and then press the SET function b
220. following icons on the remote computer s task bar Windows XP ues Windows Vista or Windows 7 The remote computer is now able to perform file operations when a disc is inserted into this unit You will not be able to log in if you put the unit into the state described in step 1 after connecting the cable To log in disconnect the cable put the unit into the state described in step 1 and connect it again When you make your first FAM connection The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog appears when you connect this unit to your computer Select Install the software automatically Recommended and then click the Next button Click the Finish button when the software installation finishes Operation limitations during FAM connections Front panel operations are disabled except for operations with the EJECT button This unit cannot be controlled from devices connected to the REMOTE 9P connector D sub 9 pin and i LINK S400 connector Signal input to this unit and signal output from this unit are stopped Operating on files 1 start Explorer Check that a drive letter has been assigned to this unit The drive letter will differ depending on the number of other peripherals connected to the remote computer 2 Use Explorer to perform file operations on the disc loaded in this unit You can operate in the same way that you operate on local drives and files on network computers f you power this unit
221. for recording channel 2 To mix multiple audio input signals For each of the recording channels turn any two input channels on To make sound on sound settings In addition to the input channels also turn PB on Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set up mixing for all of the required channels Press the SAVE function button F5 The settings are saved and the unit exits the audio setup mode Set MIX SW AP on page P4 AUDIO of the function menu to ON The setting of setup menu item 819 AUDIO INPUT ARRANGE is enabled Editing operations When the In and Out points are not set in the same clip insert editing is performed only for the clip containing the In point IN point OUT point Edit execution segment f the OUT point is set within the final clip in assemble editing the length of the clip does not change Carrying out clip editing To carry out clip editing use an RM 280 or similar editing controller Requirements for use of editing controllers Model name Requirement RM 280 Software version 2 04 or higher On this unit set setup menu item 501 STILL TIMER to 1 min 1 minute or longer RM 450 Set to player synchronization For details of how to set edit points and carry out editing refer to the operation manual for the editing controller If an assemble edit command is received while maintenance menu item M393 AUDIO DSP is set to AGC limi
222. format from a disc that contains clips in different video formats Select only clips with NG bad clip flags and delete all of those clips in one operation Select only clips that were recorded according to planning metadata and use the Direct FTP function to transfer those clips to an external device Features Usability features AC DC and battery 1 power support The unit can be used even where AC power is not available for example outdoors or in cars or helicopters 1 BKP L551 Battery Adaptor is required Color LCD display The unit is equipped with a 16 9 4 3 inch color LCD which allows you to check the contents of the disc and use the menu system without connecting an external monitor Built in speakers The unit features built in speakers allowing you to check recorded audio You can check your clips and editing results on the color LCD and speakers even when no monitors or separate speakers are available Tiltable front panel The front panel is tiltable for easy rack mount and desktop operation You can adjust the panel to the angle that makes the buttons easiest to use Cache recording for seamless disc exchanges About 30 seconds this duration may differ depending on the state of a disc of video and audio data can be recorded to the unit s internal memory cache during a disc exchange and then written back to the newly loaded disc This allows seamless recording across extended recording sessions including
223. found to meet clip filtering conditions xipueddy 166 Alarms relating to audio and video signals Alarm message in time Alarm message in video monitor screen Action data display area No INPUT 9 INPUT VIDEO IS NOT DETECTED Checkthe setting of V INPUT on Page P1 VIDEO of CHECK THE VIDEO INPUT MODE AND the function menu see page 45 SUPPLY A VIDEO SIGNAL TO VIDEO Input an HDSDI signal INPUT EMPHASIS 9 INPUT AUDIO EMPHASIS IS NOT Check the emphasis of the audio input signal SUPPORTED CHECK THE EMPHASIS OF THE AUDIO INPUT SIGNAL Troubleshooting Alarm message in time data display area REF NON STD Alarm message in video monitor screen A NON STANDARD REF SIGNAL IS BEING USED FOR REF VIDEO USE A STANDARD SIGNAL Action Input a standard signal a Displayed only when setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY is set to on Alarms relating to sensors and drives Alarm message in time data display area FAN Stopped Alarm message in video monitor screen FAN MOTOR STOPPED Action Contact your Sony service representative DR FAN Stop DRIVE FAN MOTOR STOPPED N FAN Stop FAN MOTOR ON NET 4 BOARD The unit will not stop operating but if you continue to STOPPED use it in this state temperatures inside the unit or the i drive will rise possibly resulting in failure or fire High TEMP HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH TEMPERATURE IN DR
224. g Continuous Timecode with FAM and FTP CONNECTIONS aen amice recep e ra aa r aga ck aeaaaee n Oa oed 119 Table of Contents 7 Chapter 7 Menus Menu System Configuration eeeeeeeeeeeeee 120 Setup MON p M 120 Items in th Dasic MENU uerb uestes edidi nha cen ded Ree a 121 Basic ment oOperat OHS consu Here DS ren HR Ed USER YE ee ART Quota 125 Items in the extended menu 155r nde dote eo be epi Net ARA 128 Extended menu operations 2 osos ua FER Ces Ra ene 143 Maintenance Menu e eeeeeeeeee eere eeeeeree 145 Items in the maintenance mietiu uie eode eee ei eee deae er seeds 145 Maintenance menu operations oae eerie eee Soares 149 Chapter 8 Planning Metadata OVER VICW P M 152 Manipulating planning metadata eene 152 Setting clip names by using planning metadata 152 Setting essence mark names by using planning metadata 153 Setting volume labels by using planning metadata 154 Appendix Important Notes on Operation eeeeessss 155 AC ONCE MS ALON 32 4 epe ctu eise iq esteso deos 155 About the LCD panel 22 eret n rel toit g vada 155 Periodic Maintenarca uiuecc iiec esik rriv ae ana uasa eani aiias Gu cn eun EE E cRRY 156 Digital hours MiG ter x
225. ge enhancer Set the sharpness of edge enhancement 0 to 40H to 7FH 7 LIMITER Adjust the up converter image enhancer Set the maximum detail level added to emphasize the original signal 0 to 20H to 3FH 8 CRISP Adjust the up converter image enhancer Set the threshold amplitude at p which low amplitude signals are not emphasized 0 to 8 to FH g 9 DEPEND Adjust the up converter image enhancer Set the luminance range for 8 edge enhancement N 0 to 8 to FH z 10 H DETL F Adjust the up converter image enhancer Set the center frequency and o frequency properties for edge enhancement 3 2MHz 3 2 MHz 1 1 MHz 4 5MHz 4 5 MHz 1 4 MHz 5 0MHz 5 0 MHz 0 7 MHz 4 0MHz 4 0 MHz 2 0 MHz 11 HV RATIO Adjust the up converter image enhancer Set the horizontal vertical ratio for edge enhancement 0 to 3 to7 a HD1500 When the PDBK S1500 or PDBK F1500 option is installed To enable display of the extended menu Proceed as follows to use the maintenance menu Extended menu operations 1 Holding down the PAGE HOME button and the SHIFT button press the MENU button The extended menu can be used with the same procedures P as in the basic menu The maintenance menu appears on the video monitor However since with the factory default settings the display extended menu is not displayed it is first necessary to enable display of the extended menu Setup Menu 1 43 snue N 4 1ejdeuj MO CHECK E MAINTENANCE MENU MI aDJUST M2 SERU
226. ge in video monitor screen NO MORE SUB CLIPS CAN BE ADDED TO CLIP LIST Description action clips when 300 sub clips have already been registered Limit the creation of sub clips to 300 or fewer CL OVER DUR P DURATION OF ONE CLIP LIST MUST BE LESS THAN 24 HOURS This appears when you try to add a sub clip when the total duration of sub clips in a clip list has already reached 24 hours Create clip lists so that the total duration is within 24 hours Run Salvage EXECUTE SALVAGE PROGRAM This appears when recording E E display essence mark recording or sub clip addition for quick scene selection is attempted on a disc that needs to be salvaged Try again after salvaging the clips on the disc see page 54 CNT mode 9 COUNTER MODE IS SELECTED SET COUNTER SELECT MENU TO TC OR UB This appears when CNTR SEL on the HOME page of the function menu is set to COUNTER and you try to preset timecode or user bits To use timecode or user bits set CNTR SEL to TC or UB see page 44 TC ExT D TC EXTERNAL IS SELECTED SET TC INTERNAL MODE IN FUNCTION MENU This appears when TCG on page P5 TC of the function menu is set to EXT and you try to preset timecode or user bits by setting PRST RGN to PRESET Set TCG to INT see page 47 REGEN mode TCG REGEN MODE IS SELECTED SET TC PRESET MODE IN FUNCTION MENU This appears when PRST RGN on page P5 TC of the
227. generator Once the internal timecode generator is synchronized with the external timecode generator the internal timecode generator continues to run even if the external timecode generator connection is removed The timecode advance mode is set automatically to Free Run The frame count mode for system frequency 59 941 59 94P 29 97P only is set to the same mode as the external timecode signal drop frame or non drop frame To check the synchronization to the external signal Press the STOP button to stop this unit then press the REC button Check that the timecode value shown in the time data display coincides with the external timecode value To record external timecode directly External Preset When you use this method the internal timecode generator advances without being affected by the external timecode To directly record timecode input to the TIME CODE IN connector Input the timecode output of an external device to the TIME CODE IN connector and make the following settings on page P5 TC of the function menu Set TCG to EXT Set PRST RGN to PRESET Superimposed Text Information The video signal output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector contains superimposed text information including timecode menu settings and alarm messages Adjusting the text display You can adjust the position size and type of the
228. gular position of the shuttle dial Playback in variable mode Variable speed playback with the speed finely determined by the angular position of the shuttle dial Normal playback First insert a disc For details of how to insert a disc see Loading and unloading a disc page 49 Playback yoeghe q pue Bulpiovey v Jeydeyo 61 xoeg e g pue BuipiooeH y 1e1deuo 62 6 SHEGRGIIE o FFWD N ost way mo PREV button PLAY button NEXT button STOP button Jog dial Shuttle dial MARK1 button and MARK2 button To start playback Press the PLAY button Playback starts When two or more clips are recorded on the disc they are played back continuously No audio is output when non audio signals are played back To jump to the next or previous clip then start playback Use the PREV button NEXT button jog dial or shuttle dial To stop playback Press the STOP button If you play back to the end of the last clip playback automatically stops If in this state you press the PLAY button the message Disc End appears on the display To carry out playback again move back to the desired clip using the PREV button jog dial or shuttle dial To set shot marks While playing back a disc you can set essence marks such as Shot Mark1 and Shot Mark2 i
229. h press of a button changes the setting of the corresponding item in the menu For convenience this manual refers to these buttons as buttons F1 to F6 in order from the top Display Displays menus audio level meters and data such as time data or clip information The DISPLAY button lets you switch to the video monitor display For details see Display window on page 21 Front Panel PUSH SET S SEL knob Use for menu and GUI screen operations Turn the knob to select items and press it to confirm the selection This button is also used to set numerical and timecode values You can also change the playback speed by pressing the PLAY button and turning this knob during playback see page 63 See GUI screen operations page 72 for more information about how to use the thumbnail screens MENU button Displays the setup menu or the GUI screen menu The setup menu appears when no GUI screen is visible The same information is also superimposed on the display on a monitor connected to the unit Press once more to return to the original display See GUI screen operations page 72 for more information about how to use the thumbnail screens Q RESET RETURN button Functions as the RESET button or the RETURN button RESET button Reset counters or the setting values of the timecode generator This button is also used to abort or cancel setup menu scene selection and thumbnail search operations RETURN bu
230. he disc on which recording did not end normally The message Salvage appears on the display To cancel the clip salvage Press the RESET RETURN button The message EJECT appears when REC INHI is displayed If the disc is write protected eject the disc set the Write Inhibit tab to enable recording and then insert the disc again If REC INH on HOME page of the function menu is set to ON set it to OFF see page 44 This operation cannot be cancelled once it begins 2 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Processing begins and the message Executing appears When processing finishes a message appears to display the results If the message reads Incomplete the clips that failed were lost Recording xXoeg e g pue Buipiooeu v 1e deu 55 Linear Editing Overview You can perform the following types of editing on recorded clips Type of editing Editing target Insert editing Video tracks in a single clip Audio tracks in a single clip Split editing is also possible But the Out point must be shared with the video tracks Timecode in a single clip 9 Assemble editing Final clip a HD1500 This function only can be performed when the PDBZ UPG02 xXoeg e g pue BuipiooeH p 1e1deuo 56 Software Upgrade Key is installed A disc which contains clip lists cannot be used as a disc for editing However it
231. he focus to Cancel Tab Moves the focus between OK and Cancel USB mouse functions You can use the mouse to move the cursor on the software keyboard You can also left click on a key to enter the character for that key To change the speed of the mouse pointer Select the desired speed using Settings gt Select Mouse Pointer Speed in the Disc Menu Select the speed that works best with the connected mouse To exit the software keyboard from a USB keyboard 1 With the cursor in an edit box press the Enter key to move the focus to OK 2 Doone of the following To confirm the edit and then exit the software keyboard While OK is selected press the Enter key To discard the edit and then exit the software keyboard On the USB keyboard press the key or the Tab key to move to Cancel and then press the Enter key To continue editing Press any key except the Enter key the Esc key and the Tab key Setting clip flags You can set three types of clip flags OK NG KP KEEP during recording or playback Setting these flags in each clip that you record makes it easy for editors and other colleagues to find and select the clips that they need See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip where you want to set a flag 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Set Clip Flag The clip flag setting screen appears
232. he total number of chapters and the number of the selected chapter The total number of chapters is the total number of chapters in the specified clip only Q Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 67 Clip name Displays the name or a title of the clip whose chapter is displayed see page 66 Duration Displays the time from the first frame of the selected chapter to the first frame of the next chapter Essence mark thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of the specified essence mark found by searching all clips on the disc Ze W I TC 00 25 07 01 NE zs um TC 00 24 45 25 TC 00 25 40 24 TC 00 26 22 11 p d diu TC 00 27 19 25 TC 00 27 51 25 TC 00 28 06 17 TC 00 28 35 00 TC 00 28 55 02 30 NOV 2006 19 55 TC 00 29 10 05 Essence mark name Displays the name of the essence mark Shot Mark1 here If the shot mark name has been defined by the user it is enclosed in quotation marks in the display see page 93 Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 67 Essence mark number total essence marks Displays the total number of essence marks and the number of the selected essence mark The total number of essence marks is the total number of essence marks that have been set in all clips on the disc Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 67 Clip date and time Displays
233. header metadata area when an MXF file is input If the data is identified as the data created by the device other than XDCAM at this time one file KLVE file is created 1 The header metadata area contains the metadata information about the entire file See SMPTE377M for details For details see Directory structure page 103 and Clip directory page 105 Closed caption data This section explains the closed caption data that can be recorded played back and output during EE output Legend gt Signal I O by standard function gt Signal I O by optional function Standard functions Normal EIA 708 608 recording and playback In response to closed caption input data that complies with the EIA 708 608 standards record play and output that data with no changes However settings are required for recording of closed caption data in HDSDI signals For details see To record and playback EIA 708 B standard closed caption data in HDSDI signals page 174 or To record EIA 608 B standard closed caption data in HDSDI signals page 174 EIA 708 608 standard closed caption data recorded in HD video is output as HDSDI signals regardless of menu settings EIA 608 standard closed caption data in SDSDI line 21 signals are recorded and played back output as SDSDI or composite signals regardless of menu settings EIA 708 608 recording and playback HDSDI VANC input Baos a SDSD
234. his product safely avoid prolonged listening at excessive sound pressure levels VAROITUS LAITTEEN KAYTTAMINEN MUULLA KUIN TASSA KAYTTOOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KAYTTAJAN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTAVALLE NAKYMATTOMALLE LASERSATEILYLLE VARNING OM APPARATEN ANVANDS PA ANNAT SATT AN DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS KAN ANVANDAREN UTSATTAS FOR OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING SOM OVERSKRIDER GRANSEN FOR LASERKLASS 1 When installing the installation space must be secured in consideration of the ventilation and service operation Do not block the ventilation slots at the left side right side and bottom of front side panels and vents of the fans Leave more than 25 cm of space in the rear of the unit Leave more than 2 cm of space in the left side right side and top of the unit WARNING Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine fire or the like For the customers in the USA This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a r
235. his unit and the unity value Meaning of abbreviations within parentheses in the table HD HDSDI output during playback of HD format video DC Down conversion output to SD D1 SDI COMPOSITE during playback of HD format video SD SD D1 SDI COMPOSITE output during playback of SD format video UC Up conversion output to HDSDI during playback of SD format video Correspondence between Setting Items of the HKDV 900 and Setup Menu of This Unit xipueddy 179 List of Supported USB Keyboards When the area of use is set to UC and Select the corresponding language by selecting Settings the font setting is European Alphabet gt Select USB Keyboard Language in the Disc Menu see page 80 On this unit you can enter any of the characters and symbols supported by the keyboards listed below 1 When the font setting is Simplified Chinese or Traditional Chinese a keyboard with the same layout as the English United States keyboard is selected automatically English United Kingdom
236. i Poba ter Ctrl Alt RER E 2557 Alt Ctrl 0 E o 525 Se Y ad Ins Del xipueddy 1 82 List of Supported USB Keyboards Trademarks and Licenses MPEG 4 visual patent portfolio license THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG 4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR i ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG 4 VISUAL STANDARD MPEG 4 VIDEO AND OR ii DECODING MPEG 4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG 4 VIDEO NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA LLC SEE HTTP WWW MPEGLA COM MPEG LA is offering licenses for i manufacturing sales of any storage media storing MPEG 4 Visual video information ii distribution broadcasting of MPEG 4 Visual video information in any manner such as online video distribution service internet broadcasting TV broadcasting Other usage of this product may be required to obtain license from MPEGLA Please contact MPEG LA for any further information MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 http www mpegla com MPEG 2 video patent portfolio license ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN CONSUMER PERSONAL US
237. ibit PC REMOTE IS DISABLED This appears when an attempt is made to change the CHECK MAINTENANCE MENU M33 setting of PC RMT ENABLE DISABLE on page P7 OTHER of the function menu while maintenance menu item M33 FILE I F CONFIG PC REMOTE is set to ENABLE PC REMOTE IS DISABLED This appears when an attempt is made to change the CHECK SETUP MENU 215 setting of PC RMT ENABLE DISABLE on page P7 OTHER of the function menu while setup menu item 215 i LINK mode is set to the value other than FAM GUI Inhibit GUI OPERATION IS INHIBITED This appears when the THUMBNAIL button or the CHECK SETUP MENU DISC MENU SHIFT SUB CLIP button is pressed while setup menu item 151 GUI OPERATION is set to dis Mixed REC THIS DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED This appears if a disc containing clips recorded in TWO OR MORE AUDIO OR VIDEO different recording formats is inserted while mixed FORMATS ARE RECORDED ON THE format recording mode is disabled Enable mixed DISC format recording mode or insert another disc Mixed REC P DISC CANNOT BE EDITED This appears when an edit preset command is MIXED AUDIO VIDEO MODE ON DISC received but the inserted disc contains clips with mixed recording formats Exchange the inserted disc for a disc that does not contain clips with mixed recording formats Resolution THIS CLIP CANNOT BE ADDED Clips can be registered in clip lists only if their THE CLIP S RESOLUTION DOES NOT resolution number of system lines matches the MA
238. ignal output when down converter output is set to squeeze mode thru through Do not add auto Add Notes To add wide picture information to the output signal another setting is required in addition to this item In setup menu item 703 set line 16 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P mode J line 20 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P mode UC or line 23 50i 50P 25P mode to thru n 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P mode J output of wide picture information is given priority if the VITC insertion line is set to line 16 in setup menu item 601 or 602 n 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P mode UC output of wide picture information is given priority if the VITC insertion line is set to line 20 in setup menu item 601 or 602 740 MASTER LEVEL HD Adjust the high definition video signal output from the HDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER connectors This adjusts the Y PB and PR levels simultaneously 2048 to 0 to 846 741 Y LEVEL HD Adjust the Y level of the high definition video signal output from the HDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER connectors 2048 to 0 to 846 742 PB LEVEL HD Adjust the PB level of the high definition video signal output from the HDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER connectors 2048 to 0 to 846 743 PR LEVEL HD Adjust the PR level of the high definition video signal output from the HDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER connectors 2048 to 0 to 846 745 SETUP LEVEL HD Adjust the setup level of the high definition video signal output from the HD
239. ignals When editing with two PDW HD1500 units connect a cable between these connectors on the player unit and the SD HDSDI INPUT connector on the recorder unit You can superimpose timecodes menu settings error messages or other information on the output of the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector with the setting for CHAR SEL on the HOME page of the function menu or with the setting for setup menu item 028 HD CHARACTER You can always disable to superimpose the data independent of the setting for CHAR SEL with the setting for setup menu item 028 See Basic Operations of the Function Menu page 44 for more information about the CHAR SEL settings See page 123 for more information about the setup menu item 026 HD CHARACTER To treat the input and output signals of these connectors as non audio signals set the maintenance menu item M37 AUDIO CONFIG gt M372 NON AUDIO INPUT recording see page 145 and setup menu item 823 NON AUDIO FLAG PB playback COMPOSITE OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER analog composite video output 1 2 superimpose connectors BNC type Output analog composite video signals You can superimpose timecodes menu settings or error messages on the output of the 2 SUPER connector when CHAR SEL on the HOME page of the function menu is set to ON See Basic Operations of the Function Menu on page 44 for more information about the CHAR SEL setting REF VIDEO INPUT reference video signal input con
240. in jog shuttle or variable speed mode lt green Lights during playback in the reverse direction gt green Lights during playback in the forward direction Bl red Lights during still image display Jog dial Turn this for playback in jog mode Turn clockwise for forward direction playback and counterclockwise for reverse direction playback In jog mode the playback speed varies from 1 to 1 times normal speed according to the rotation rate of the jog dial There are no detents Normally you press the SHTL JOG or VAR JOG button before turning the jog dial but it is also possible to make a setting to enable jog mode directly by turning the dial set setup menu item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE to dial Shuttle dial Turn this for playback in shuttle mode or variable speed mode Turn clockwise for forward direction playback and counterclockwise for reverse direction playback In shuttle mode the playback speed varies in the range 20 times normal speed or in the maximum speed range as selected by an extended menu setting according to the angular position of the shuttle dial In variable speed mode you can finely adjust the playback speed from 2 to 2 times normal speed according to the angular position of the shuttle dial The shuttle dial has a detent at the center position for still image playback Normally you press the SHTL JOG button before turning the shuttle dial but i
241. in one of the locations shown below and insert the media into this unit Up to 99 planning metadata files can be saved on one Professional Disc or USB Flash drive Professional Disc General Sony Planning directory P USB Flash drive General Sony Planning directory 1 Created automatically when a disc is formatted Manipulating planning metadata This unit allows you to perform the following operations on planning metadata using the GUI screen To load planning metadata files To sort planning metadata e To check planning metadata properties To clear planning metadata To switch the title display in the video monitor screen See Using planning metadata page 91 for details Setting clip names by using planning metadata The following two types of clip name strings can be written in a planning metadata file The ASCII format name that appears in the video monitor screen The UTF 8 format name that is actually registered as the clip name 2 1 It is also possible to display the UTF 8 format name or no name see page 93 Overview Chapter 2 When no UTF 8 format name string is specified the ASCH format name string is registered as the actual clip name By loading a file from one of the following locations into the unit s memory before starting to record you can register the names in the file as clip names There are two ways to load files Automatically load a file that has been writte
242. ing metadata to set it see page 154 To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a lt or gt mark is displayed for an item you can press the IN or OUT button to scroll the display by one character for each press The 4 MARKI and MARK2 buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view To return to the previous screen Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To edit disc information You can edit the user disc ID title and title2 by using a software keyboard 1 Only ASCII characters can be used for the title1 See To edit clip information page 79 for more information about operations Using planning metadata Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata about the clips to be shot and recorded To use planning metadata you will need to save a file in advance in the specified location of a media and insert the media into this unit See Setting clip names by using planning metadata page 152 for details To load planning metadata files See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Load Planning Metadata Select Drive and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A media selection screen appears Disc Menu fig Load Planning Metadata Select Drive Return to Upper Menu 4 D Professional Disc gt lt gt USB Flash Drive gt 3 Select the media where your planning metadata file is stored and then press the PUSH SET S S
243. ings to that point are canceled and the setting operation is terminated Setting the timecode to the current time 1 Set RUN MODE on page P5 TC to FREE RUN and DF NDF to DF in 59 941 59 94P 29 97P mode only 2 Perform steps 1 to 4 of Setting an initial timecode value to set the timecode to a time slightly ahead of the current time 3 Press the SET function button F5 at the instant when the current time matches the displayed timecode Setting user bits You can record up to 8 hexadecimal digits of information date time event number etc on the timecode track Setting Timecode Select UB by pressing the CNTR SEL function button F4 in step 1 of Setting an initial timecode value and carry out steps 2 to 5 Settings are made in hexadecimal 0 9 A F You can record ID codes in user bits To record timecode that follows sequentially upon the last recorded timecode Internal Regen You can record timecode so that it is continuous from one clip to the next on the disc Set TCG on page P5 TC of the function menu to INT and PRST RGN to TC or VITC When this setting is in force the unit reads the timecode of the last frame of the last recorded clip on the disc before starting to record and internally generates timecode that follows upon the recorded timecode The frame count mode for system frequency 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P only is set to the same mode as the last recorded timecode on the disc drop frame
244. intenance For periodic maintenance consult a Sony service representative Display modes of the digital hours meter H01 OPERATION HOURS mode Displays the total number of hours the unit has been powered on in units of 1 hour H02 LASER PARAMETER 0 mode not resettable Of the two optical heads this shows a counter of the cumulative light output time by one optical head in units of hours This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace the optical head 1 The counter advances at different rates during recording and playback It is also affected by the ambient temperature H03 LASER PARAMETER 1 mode not resettable Same as H02 Of the two optical heads this shows a counter of the cumulative light output time by the other optical head in units of hours P 1 The counter advances at different rates during recording and playback It is also affected by the ambient temperature H11 OPERATION HOURS mode resettable Same as HO1 except that the count is resettable This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace parts H13 SEEK RUNNING HOURS 0 mode resettable Of the two optical heads this shows the cumulative seek operation time for one optical head in units of hours The count is resettable This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace the seek motor H14 SPINDLE RUNNING HOURS mode resettable This shows the cumulative spindle rotation time in units of hours The count i
245. ion 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 as required T Savethe clip list see page 89 To adjust the In and Out points of sub clips trim Proceed as follows to define the range of a scene by changing the positions of the In and Out points See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen select a thumbnail 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Trim Sub Clip and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Clip List Trim screen appears Clip List Trim 001 034 Total 00 13 48 24 DUR 00 00 21 27 IN 01 17 33 08 ul OUT 01 17 55 05 TCR 01 17 33 08 cup 019 035 OK Cancel Like the clip playback screen this screen allows you to play and search all clips on the disc To display a list of In and Out point operations that you can perform Press the MENU button 4 When you find the point that you want to make the start point select IN and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The timecode of the new In point appears in the timecode display and the Total total duration and DUR clip duration displays are updated D When you find the point that you want to make the end point select OUT and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The timecode of the new Out point appears in the timecode display and the Total total duration and DUR clip duration displays are updated Scene Selection Clip List Editing SU9BINS MD ul suonejedo s Ja deyD
246. ion on this unit set maintenance menu item M59 UPnP to ENABLE and then power the unit off and on again For the settings on other XDCAM devices refer to the operation manuals supplied with the devices Uploading clips To upload entire clips Proceed as follows to upload selected clips or all clips and clip lists on the disc See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 nthe clip thumbnail screen select the clip to upload P multiple selections possible To upload all clips and clip lists on the disc start from step 2 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Upload Clips via Direct FTP and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Select Transfer Type screen of the Upload Clips via Direct FTP command appears Upload Clips via Direct FTP Select Transfer Type Selected Clips 2 Clips 9 All Clips amp ClipList 42 Clips 19 ClipLists UMID Unchange Cancel 4 Select the type of clip transfer Selected Clips Clips selected in step 1 All Clips amp ClipList All clips and clip lists on the disc To transfer while preserving the UMID of the transfer source clips Check the UMID Unchanged option If the remote host is a computer clips are transferred with the UMID unchanged regardless of this setting To reconnect to a remote host The Reconnect button is enabled if the most recent operation successfully established a connection to a remote host You can sele
247. isc For details see Managing clip lists page 89 Clip lists can be created and edited even when the write inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording disabled and when REC INH on the HOME page of the function menu is set to ON However if you need to save the clip list set write inhibit tab and REC INH to enable recording before you create or edit the clip list To add sub clips You can add sub clips to clip lists from with the clip thumbnail screen or the clip list thumbnail screen However you must use the clip list thumbnail screen to edit clip lists Adding sub clips from the clip thumbnail screen The following procedure explains operations in the clip thumbnail screen You can proceed in the same way in the expand thumbnail screen and the chapter thumbnail screen Expanded blocks are added as sub clips in the expand thumbnail screen and chapters are added as sub clips in the chapter thumbnail screen See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip thumbnail screen select the clip that you want to add as a sub clip multiple selections possible 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Add Sub Clips and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Add Sub Clip screen appears The clip s selected in step 1 appear in the upper part of this screen and the clip list appears in the lower Scene Selection window The I cursor in the Scene Selection window indicates the location where
248. ith the same operation as step 1 and use the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the MARK1 and MARK2 buttons to change the setting 3 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the SELECT function button F2 to confirm the setting change 4 Press the SAVE function button F5 The message NOW SAVING appears on the video monitor display and Saving appears in the time data display area while the new settings are saved in memory When the saving operation is completed the video monitor display and the time data display area return to their normal indications Maintenance Menu To cancel changing a setting Before pressing the SAVE function button F5 press the MENU button The menu disappears from the video monitor display without saving the new setting To change network settings To change network settings carry out the procedure described in the previous section To display the maintenance menu to display the NETWORK menu item then carry out the following operations For details of the settings consult your network administrator When the IP address is assigned automatically Check that the network cable is connected to this unit before carrying out the operation Follow the procedure as shown in previous section To change a menu item setting to set maintenance menu item M5 NETWORK gt M50 DHCP to ENABLE To check the assigned IP address Select maintenance menu item M5 NETWORK gt M51 IP ADDRES
249. ition After recording The unit stops at the position where recording ended To play back a clip press the PREV button to move to the start frame of any clip or press the PREV button with the PLAY button held down to move to any position After disc insertion The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most recently ejected Press the PLAY button to resume playback at the most recent position The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is ejected which allows playback to start at that position whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM player This function is not available when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position and when REC INH on HOME page of the function menu is set to ON The REC INHI indicator may light when neither of the above is true if the format of recorded sections on the disc is not the same as the recording settings of this unit In this case the playback position can be saved to the disc 1080 720 cross convert function You can output 720 while playing discs recorded as 1080 and output 1080 while playing discs recorded as 720 When the system frequency of the loaded disc 59 941 59 94P 29 97P 501 50P 25P or 23 98P matches the system frequency of the unit but the system line settings 1080 or 720 do not match then an FC mark appears and disc playback is cross converted automatically E E output is not cross converted SD up convert
250. ity None disc full C indications in superimposed text information and their meanings Indication Meaning C flashes once per second Recording to the cache C flashes twice per second Remaining memory capacity Low An alarm message appears instead of Remaining memory capacity None disc full To stop disc exchange cache recording Do any of the following during cache recording Press the STOP button Set setup menu item 150 REC MODE to normal fthe disc becomes full while setup menu item 150 REC MODE is set to D EXC the disc is ejected and the unit continues to record to its internal memory for about 30 seconds depending on the state of a disc Recording and playback operations by all buttons and dials other than the STOP button are disabled during cache recording If the amount of cache data exceeds the capacity of the unit s internal memory during a disc exchange an alarm message appears and the data in cache memory is overwritten The internal memory always contains the latest cache data so the clip data will be continuous after the next disc is inserted and recording to the disc resumes If you insert a disc that cannot be recorded it is ejected automatically Insert a disc that can be recorded The Disc Exchange Cache function cannot be enabled when the Live Logging function is set to Live View mode Recording with the HDSDI remote con
251. l input output section DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN 1 2 3 4 connectors DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU oOo 1 2 ua D DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU OUT 1 2 3 4 connectors Q DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN digital audio input 1 2 3 4 connectors BNC type These input AES EBU format digital audio signals The left connector 1 2 corresponds to audio channels 1 and 2 Rear Panel and the right connector 3 4 corresponds to audio channels 3 and 4 DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU OUT digital audio output 1 2 3 4 connectors BNC type These output AES EBU format digital audio signals When the unit is shipped from the factory the 1 2 connector is set to audio channel 1 2 and the 3 4 connector is set to audio channel 3 4 You can change these settings with setup menu item 827 AES EBU AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT see page 139 To treat the input and output signals of these connectors as non audio signals set the maintenance menu item M37 AUDIO CONFIG gt M372 NON AUDIO INPUT recording see page 145 and setup menu item 823 NON AUDIO FLAG PB playback 4 Timecode input output section TIME CODE IN connector TIME CODE OUT connector E TIME CODE IN connector BNC type This inputs an SMPTE timecode generated by an external device TIME CODE OUT connector BNC type This outputs the following timecode depending on the operating state of this unit During playback Playback timec
252. lay area of SD output on the color LCD off Do not display on Display 142 REPEAT MODE Put the unit into repeat playback mode or exit from repeat playback mode off Exits from repeat playback mode play amp VAR fwd Perform repeat playback during normal playback and 0 to 1 times normal speed variable playback in the forward direction To select repeat playback in this mode from a device connected to the REMOTE 9P connector send the REPEAT PLAY command or the REPEAT VAR FWD command force Perform repeat playback during normal playback and 0 to 1 times normal speed variable playback in the forward direction To select repeat playback in this mode from a device connected to the REMOTE 9P connector send the PLAY command or the VAR FWD command Set to off to perform linear editing 143 INDEX PICTURE POSITION Select the frame of the clip to use as the thumbnail image index picture when recording Osec to 10sec Can be set in the range from 0 seconds first frame of the clip to10 seconds in units of 1 second 145 MODE KEY ENABLE DURING RECORDING Select whether the STOP button is the only button that stops recording ena all enable Recording stops when the EJECT button 9 PLAY button STOP button SHTL JOG button and VAR JOG button P are pressed stop Recording stops only when the STOP button is pressed Setup Menu snue wN Z Je deuj 1
253. layed only when setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY is set to on or limit During playback Alarm message in time data display section Alarm message in monitor video section Description action ILL PLAY 9 ILLEGAL PLAYBACK Check the disc being played by this unit MEM Empty 9 MEMORY EMPTY Check the disc being played by this unit Disc Error DISC ERROR DETECTED Use another disc a Displayed only when setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY is set to on or limit During thumbnail search scene selection and clip list operations Alarm message in GUI screen Description action Cannot Expand Clip any Further The clip cannot be expanded into more blocks This appears when the EXPAND button is pressed when the number of block is maximum or when the duration of an expanded thumbnail is 1 frame Selected Essence Mark does not Exist The selected essence mark does not exist This appears in the essence mark selection screen when the specified essence mark does not exist on the disc Sub Clip is Invalid Set Appropriate IN OUT Points The temporal relationship between the specified In and Out points in sub clip trimming is not correct Reset so that the value of the Out point timecode is larger than the value of the In point timecode Duration of One Clip List must be Less than 24 Hours The total duration of the current clip list is greater than 24 ho
254. le mixed format recording mode CONFIG DISABLE Do not enable ENABLE Enable M391 VITC REC Select whether to record the VITC in the input HDSDI signals in the LTC user bits area DIS Do not record ENA Record M392 PB POS When you switch between the clip playback screen and the clip list playback screen specifies the clip or sub clip playback start position KEEP Play from the position where playback stopped FORCED TOP Play from the first frame of the first clip or sub clip M393 AUDIO DSP Select the function for which the audio digital signal processor shall be used linear edit Use for linear editing microphone input is disabled AGC limiter Use for microphone input linear editing is disabled It is not possible to use the audio digital signal processor for multiple functions at the same time M394 HD L EDIT 9 Specify the linear editing mode Standard Software version 1 51 compatible editing mode standard mode Extra Editing mode that supports normal HD422 clips extra mode Clips edited in extra mode cannot be edited on XDCAM devices with software versions earlier than 1 51 or on this unit when this unit is set to standard mode f you want to use extra mode select extra mode on every PDW F1600 HD1500 that you connect to the editing system M395 24PARAREC P Select whether to perform synchronized recording on two or more PDW HD1500 F1600 units in 23 98P mode
255. lip 83 Delete Clip amp Clip List 83 DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN 1 2 3 4 connectors 28 OUT 1 2 3 4 connectors 28 Digital audio signal input output section 28 Digital hours meter 156 display modes 156 displaying 157 exiting 157 Direct FTP function 96 DISC MENU button 18 65 indicator 18 65 Disc Menu 70 Discs 91 ejecting with the unit powered off 169 formatting 49 93 handling 48 information 23 loaded indication 23 loading unloading 49 properties 91 reconstructing 54 remaining capacity alarm 20 salvage functions 54 slot 16 usable discs 48 volume labels 154 write protecting 49 DISPLAY button 19 Display 18 21 basic operation display 21 video monitor display 25 window 21 Display menu control section 18 E Editing control unit 34 controller 35 EJECT button 16 Ejecting a disc manually 169 Error messages 169 Essence mark search 75 setting 51 62 thumbnail screen 69 Expand function 12 74 thumbnail screen 68 EXPAND button 19 Extended menu 120 display 143 items 128 operations 143 External synchronization 38 F Features 10 File access mode FAM connections 33 File operations 103 Index xepu 189 xepu 190 Clip directory 105 Component directory 105 directory structure 103 Edit directory 105 General directory 106 root directory 104 Sub directory 106 File Operations in File Access Mode for Macintosh 112 exiting file operations 112 making FAM connections 112 operating on files
256. lips and clip lists use the same names the C or E part of the following file names Clips Metadata files C MO1 XML user metadata files C M02 KLV proxy AV data files C S01 MXF Clip lists Metadata files E M01 XML The following names cannot be assigned Clips CO000 MXF Clip lists E0000E01 SMI E0100E01 SMI to E9999E01 SMI E0000 SMI E0100 SMI to E9999 SMI The following names should be avoided Clips C5000 MXF to C9999 MXF Clip lists E0001 SMI to E0099 SMI To assign clip names on this unit The title assigned to clip becomes its clip name file name When the first letter of the title setting with setup menu item 035 CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT is a space or period the clip name is the title string minus the first letter e An FTP client that supports UTF 8 is required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII characters Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF 8 f TITLEO0001 When the AUTO NAMING sub item of setup menu item 036 is set to C ON TITLEO0001 MXF a TITLE00001 When the AUTO NAMING sub item of basic menu item 036 is set to title i Before you start set the TITLE sub item of setup menu item 035 CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT to enable and set a title see the previous section Press the MENU button Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select setup menu item 036 Turn the
257. log out after finishing file operations enter QUIT at the command prompt and press the Enter key Command list The FTP protocol commands supported by this unit include standard commands see the next section and extended commands see page 117 To execute FTP commands you must install application software with FTP function on your computer The commands supported by application software vary An FTP client that supports UTF 8 is required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII characters Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF 8 Standard commands In the command syntax SP means a space entered by pressing the space bar and lt CRLF gt means a new line entered by pressing the Enter key USER Send this command to begin the login process Command syntax USER SP user name gt lt CRLF gt Input example USER admin PASS After sending the USER command send this command to complete the login process Command syntax PASS SP password lt CRLF gt Input example PASS pdw hd1500 QUIT Terminates the FTP connection If a file is being transferred terminates after completion of the transfer Command syntax QUIT lt CRLF gt PORT Specifies the IP address and port to which this unit should connect for the next file transfer for data transfer from this unit Command syntax PORT SP lt h1 h2 h3 h4 p1 p2 gt lt CRLF gt h1 most significant byte to h4 least significant byte
258. m 145 Formatting a disc Unused discs are formatted automatically when they are loaded into this unit To format a recorded disc use the GUI screen For details see Formatting discs page 93 Handling Discs suonejedejgd e Jajdeyp 49 xoeg e g pue BuipiooeH p 1e1deuo 50 Recording and Playback Chapter Recording This section describes video and audio recording on the unit See page 44 Basic Operations of the Function Menu in Chapter 3 for more information See page 120 Menus in Chapter 7 for more information about setup menu operations Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc As long as the frame frequency group is the same clips in different recording formats can be recorded or written to the same disc P In this manual this is referred to as mixed format recording mode 1 The recording format is regarded as different whenever the system frequency video resolution video codec bit rate or number of audio channels or number of bits does not match Regardless of frame frequency group matching it is not possible to mix clips with different video resolutions number of system lines in the same clip list When the unit is in a mode that calls for playback across clips that were recorded in different recording formats video and audio playback may stop at the point where the format changes from one format into another and then start again If a transi
259. menu 44 maintenance menu 145 returning to default settings 126 setup menu 120 MENU button 18 Metadata 172 Microphone settings 28 Mixed format recording mode 50 Move Shot Mark screen 75 N Names and functions of parts 15 Network assigning IP address automatically 150 connector 27 setting IP address 150 settings 150 NEXT button 19 Normal speed playback 61 O On standby button and indicator 15 OUT button 17 indicator 17 P PAGE button 19 PHONES jack 16 Planning metadata 91 152 PLAY button 19 Playback 60 clip list 84 jog mode 62 normal speed 61 settings 60 shot mark settings 62 shuttle mode 62 start position 61 variable mode 63 Playback condition display 43 mark 42 Power supply section 27 POWER switch 27 Preparation Initial Setup 30 PREV button 19 Professional Disc 48 Proxy AV data 11 Pulldown playback 60 PUSH SET S SEL knob 18 R Rear Panel 26 REC button 20 REC INHI indicator 20 Recording 50 format 22 HDSDI remote control function 53 level adjustment 51 salvage 54 settings 50 shot mark settings 51 time 29 91 Recording and playback control section 19 REF VIDEO INPUT connectors 27 Reference signal 24 REMOTE connector 26 Remote control switch 16 REMOTE 9P connector 26 Repeat playback 129 RESET RETURN button 18 Returning to factory default settings 127 S Salvage function 54 Scene finding 74 75 Scene Selection 84 Scrollbar 67 SD HDSDI INPUT connector 26 SDSDI OUTPUT 1
260. mode 9 H 9 line 10 H 10 line 12 H 12 line 13 H 13 line 14 H 14 line 15 H 15 line 16 H 16 line 17 H 17 line 18 H 18 line 50i 50P 25P mode See Using UMID Data page 172 for more information about UMID 653 UMID HD VANC LINE Select the line in which UMID is output when menu item 651 is set to on 9H to 17H to 20H 59 94i 50i 29 97P 25P 23 98P mode 9H to 17H to 25H 59 94P 50P mode See Using UMID Data page 172 for more information about UMID Setup Menu Menu items in the 600s relating to the timecode metadata and UMID Item number Item name Settings 657 ESSENCE MARK SDI OUTPUT Select whether to output essence marks in the SDI output VANC off Do not output on Output 660 ESSENCE MARK SD VANC LINE 9 Select the line to which to output essence marks when menu item 657 is set to on 12 H 12 line 13 H 13 line 15 H 15 line 16 H 16 line 17 H 17 line 18 H 18 line 19 H 19 line 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode 9 H 9 line 10 H 10 line 12 H 12 line 13 H 13 line 14 H 14 line 15 H 15 line 16 H 16 line 17 H 17 line 18 H 18 line 50i 50P 25P mode 665 ESSENCE MARK HD VANC LINE Select the line to which to output essence marks when item 657 is set to on 9H to 17H to 20H 59 94i 50i 29 97P 25P 23 98P mode 9H to 17H to 25H 59 94P 50P mode 666 METADATA ITEM OUT Specify whether to include the inf
261. mode UC LB Up converter letter box mode UC SQ Up converter squeeze mode Sud Jo suonoun J pue seweN z Jedeu 25 Sued Jo suonounJ pue sewen z Jeideuo 26 Rear Panel NACIN POWER E EASE WXWEWESI Power supply section see page 27 li LY a Ej S9 DC IN 12V connector 2 L REMOTE connector Q SD HDSDI INPUT connector output section see amp page 28 3 2 Analog audio signal input D y output section see eie Se S page 27 Za A T 2 Me WOOK CT OUTPUT ke 3 Digital audio signal input J ea m PEDES 8 HDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER connectors COMPOSITE OUTPUT1 2 SUPER connectors REF VIDEO INPUT connectors saco VIDEO CONTROL e B i LINK S400 connector 4 Timecode input output section see page 28 VIDEO CONTROL connector REMOTE 9P connector SIE et SES E QD network connector MAINTENANCE connectors D SDSDI OUTPUT1 2 SUPER connectors i LINK S400 connector 6 pin IEEE1394 compliant Connect a computer or other device using an i LINK cable When the PDBK 201 option board is installed i LINK TS HDV signals can be input and output via this connector When this unit is connected to a device with a 6 pin i LINK con
262. n SUB CLIP Expand Thumbnail display expand thumbnail screen EXPAND Chapter Thumbnail display chapter thumbnail screen CHAPTER Essence Mark Thumbnail display essence mark thumbnail screen SHIFT THUMBNAIL Add Sub Clip add sub clip SHIFT PUSH SET S SEL knob Delete Clip delete clip SHIFT RESET RETURN Lock Unlock Clip lock or unlock clip SHIFT STOP Set Inpoint set In point IN PUSH SET S SEL knob SU9919S ND ui suoneiado g 1e1deu 102 Set Outpoint set Out point OUT PUSH SET S SEL knob Cue up Inpoint cue up In point IN PREV or IN NEXT Cue up Outpoint cue up Out point OUT PREV or OUT NEXT Reset Inpoint reset In point IN RESET RETURN Reset Outpoint reset Out point OUT RESET RETURN Cue up cue up PUSH SET S SEL knob 9 Cue up amp Play cue up and play PLAY Page Down switch to next page SHIFT MARK2 Page Up switch to previous page SHIFT MARK1 Go To End go to the last item SHIFT NEXT Go To Top go to the first item SHIFT PREV Select Multi Clip select multiple clips SHIFT OUT or SHIFT IN Exit exit the current thumbnail screen THUMBNAIL a If Settings gt SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is set to Cue up amp Play then playback starts as soon as cueup is ready b If Settings gt SET Key
263. n TO ADD AN ESSENCE MARK EXIT FROM SUB CLIP MODE FIRST Description action This appears when an attempt is made to manipulate the essence mark while the SUB CLIP DISC MENU indicator is lit or to set a clip flag while the clip list is being played back SUB CLIP indicator is lit Perform the operation after pressing the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button to turn it off SUB CLIP NG D SUB CLIP IS INVALID Set the In and Out points again SET APPROPRIATE IN OUT POINTS No List D NO CLIP LIST This appears when you try to delete a clip list when there is no clip list saved on the disc Load the disc that contains the clip list you want to delete Loading List LOADING CLIP LIST This appears if the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button is pressed while a clip list is loading Wait for the clip list to finish loading and try again STOP ONCE D STOP ONCE THEN EXECUTE This appears when the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button is pressed while the clip list is being played back or when an attempt is made to open the GUI screen with setup menu item 151 GUI OPERATION set to stop Perform the operation after stopping playback No EM space ESSENCE MARK NOT RECORDED Delete unneeded shot marks in the chapter thumbnail NO SPACE AVAILABLE TO RECORD Screen ESSENCE MARK EM Full NO MORE ESSENCE MARKS CAN BE RECORDED Disc Damage DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED TO USE ANOTHER DISC FOR RECORDING Use another disc NON
264. n By performing page 174 or To record EIA 608 B standard closed down convert playback you can also play and output EIA caption data in HDSDI signals page 174 608 standard closed caption data However settings are required for output of ELA 608 standard closed caption data HDSDI VANC output 1080 playback EIA 608 Playback of HD discs Down convert playback EIA 608 SDSDI line 21 output Composite line 21 output 1080 clip Cross convert and playback EIA 608 720 clip HDSDI VANC output 720 playback EIA 608 D Down convert playback xipueddy EIA 608 SDSDI line 21 output Composite line 21 output 1 78 Ancillary Data Correspondence between Setting Items of the HKDV 900 and Setup Menu of This Unit Setting item of Menu item of this unit s setup HKDV 900 menu HD Master 740 MASTER LEVEL HD 9 HD Y 741 Y LEVEL HD 9 HD Pb 742 Pb LEVEL HD 9 HD Pr 743 Pr LEVEL HD 9 HD Setup 745 SETUP LEVEL HD 9 HD Sync Phase 746 SYNC PHASE HD UC 9 HD Fine 747 FINE HD UC 9 D1 Master No menu item corresponds to this setting item D1 Y No menu item corresponds to this setting item D1 B Y No menu item corresponds to this setting item D1 R Y No menu item corresponds to this setting item D2 VIDEO 715 VIDEO GAIN CONTROL DC SD 9 D2 CHROMA 716 CHROMA GAIN CONTROL DC SD 9 D2 HU
265. n appears 9 select Hosts Discovered via UPnP and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The detected connection destination device the PDW HD1500 appears in the Select Host Discovered via UPnP screen 10 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Detailed information about the connection destination device the PDW HD1500 appears 11 With Connect selected press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Transfer of the clip begins as soon as the connection is established During transfer of the clip NETWORK appears in the display of the connection destination device the PDW HD 1500 When transfer of the clip completes an Uploading Result Report appears on the screen Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob to return to the clip thumbnail screen 12 check the copied clip in the clip thumbnail screen of the connection destination device the PDW HD1500 SueeJog MH ui suonejedo G JaydeyD Transferring Clips Direct FTP Function 1 01 Shortcut List You can access many functions from the buttons without displaying a menu shortcut operations Shortcuts are available for the following functions The plus sign indicates that one button is held down while another is pressed for example SHIFT RESET RETURN The same shortcut may access different functions depending on the screen that is active when it is executed Function Operation Clip List Thumbnail display the clip list thumbnail scree
266. n desired frames To set a Shot Markl or Shot Mark2 hold down the MARKI or V MARK2 button and press the PUSH SET S SEL knob If you connect a Windows USB keyboard to the MAINTENANCE connector you can set shot marks from Shot Mark0 up to Shot Mark9 by pressing the 0 to 9 keys on the numeric keypad You can also delete and modify essence marks from the Thumbnail Menu of the chapter thumbnail screen see page 74 Playback When setup menu item 669 ESSENCE MARK RECORD MODE is set to rec shot marks cannot be set during playback Shot marks cannot be set to a locked clip To set a clip flag You can set one of the three types of flag OK NG or KEEP for the clip while it is being played back by viewing its video image and using the function menu see page 47 Playback in jog mode In jog mode you can control the speed of playback by the speed of turning the jog dial The playback speed range is to 1 times normal speed To carry out playback in jog mode proceed as follows SH SETS SEY wwe com 5 KIEL Ds 1 Press the SHTL JOG button or VAR JOG button turning it on 2 Turn the jog dial in the desired direction at the speed corresponding to the desired playback speed Playback in jog mode starts 3 To stop playback in jog mode stop turning the jog dial When setup menu item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH
267. n to the following directory on a Professional Disc via an FTP or FAM connection Use a GUI screen to load a file that has been written to the following directories on a Professional Disc or a USB flash drive see page 91 File creation rules File location File name Format that can be used in the General directory see page 106 Extension XML ASCII characters up to 63 characters including the extension Extension XML Professional Disc General Sony Planning directory 9 USB memory General Sony Planning directory a General Sony Planning directory is created automatically when a disc is formatted Automatically when a disc is formatted Do not save more than 100 planning metadata files in the above save locations The unit may fail to load the files correctly if more than 100 are saved Clip name string format In a text editor modify the two fields in the Title tag that contain the clip name strings the shaded fields in Clip name string example below Enter a name in the first field in ASCII format up to 50 characters and enter another name in the second field in UTF 8 format up to 50 bytes Clip name string example xml versionz 1 0 encoding UTF 8 3 lt PlanningMetadata xmIns http xmins sony net pro metadata planningmetadata assignId P0001 creationDate 2008 01 20T17 00 00 09 00 plastUpdate 2008 03 28T10 30 00 09 00 load
268. nal to assign to audio channel 1 SDI Audio signal embedded into SDI signal ANALOG 1 Analog 1 audio signal AES EBU 1 Signal input to the DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN 1 2 connectors SG Test signal from internal signal generator Normally this item is not displayed It appears when you hold the button down for 3 seconds The test signal is assigned to audio channels 1 to 8 simultaneously Press one of the function buttons corresponding to A1 INPUT to A8 INPUT again to stop output of the test signal i LINK i LINK signal when the PDBK 201 option board is installed F4 CHROMA Sets the output level for HD SD chroma signals range lt to 3 dB PRESET Set the chroma signal output level to a preset value regardless of manual setting Manual setting While the setting value is flashing turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to adjust the chroma SETUP signal output level F2 A2 INPUT Selects the audio input signal to assign to audio channel 2 SDI Audio signal embedded into SDI signal ANALOG2 Analog 2 audio signal AES EBU2 Signal input to the DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN 1 2 connectors F3 MONITRL Selects the channel to monitor as the left monitor channel CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH1 2 CH3 4 CH5 6 CH7 8 MIX F4 MONITR R Selects the channel to monitor as the right monitor channel CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH1 2 CH3 4 CH5 6 CH7 8
269. nce menu and then open it again M52 SUBNET MASK PRESET Set the subnet mask 255 255 255 000 Subnet mask cannot be set when DHCP is set to ENABLE To check the automatically acquired subnet mask close the maintenance menu and then open it again Maintenance Menu M5 NETWORK Items relating to network settings Item Setting M53 DEFAULT GATEWAY PRESET 000 000 000 000 Set the address of the default gateway The address of the default gateway cannot be set when DHCP is set to ENABLE To check the automatically acquired address of the default gateway close the maintenance menu and then open it again M54 LINK SPEED Set the communications speed AUTO 10Mbps 100Mbps 1000Mbps M55 DUPLEX Set the communications method AUTO Full Duplex Half Duplex For how to set the communication method see To change network settings page 150 M56 JUMBO FRAME 9 9014 4088 OFF 1514 Set the size of jumbo frames This value does not include the 4 bytes of the FCS Frame Check Sequence DISABLE Disable the UPnP function ENABLE Enable the UPnP function M5F RESET NET CONFIG Reset network settings to the factory defaults SAVE function button F5 Reset MENU button Return to the next highest menu level without executing the reset a A jumbo frame is a frame larger than the maximum 1514 bytes not including FCS of the standard Ethernet frame
270. ne 12 through line 20 You can insert VITC signals in two places To insert in two places set both item 601 and item 602 e n 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode J output of wide picture information is given priority if OUTPUT in setup menu item 731 is set to auto and the VITC insertion line is set to line 16 In 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode UC output of wide picture information is given priority if OUTPUT in setup menu item 731 is set to auto and the VITC insertion line is set to line 20 In 50i 50P 25P mode Select the line into which to insert VITC signals SD output 9H 21H 22H Any line from line 9 through line 22 You can insert VITC signals in two places To insert in two places set both item 601 and item 602 605 TCG REGEN MODE Select the signal to be regenerated when the timecode generator is in the regeneration mode TC amp UB Both the timecode and user bits are regenerated TC Only the timecode is regenerated UB Only the user bits are regenerated 607 U BIT BINARY GROUP FLAG Select the user bits to be used in the timecode generated by the timecode generator 000 000 not specified Character set not specified 001 001 iso character 8 bit characters compliant with ISO 646 and ISO 2022 010 010 unassigned 1 Undefined 011 011 unassigned 2 Undefined 100 100 unassigned 3 Undefined 101 101 page line SMPTE 262M page line multiplex system 110 110 una
271. ne frame To do so hold down the PLAY button and turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob in either direction To speed up the phase Turn clockwise To delay the phase Turn counterclockwise Playback operations using thumbnails Playback operations that you can perform with thumbnails include searching for clips displaying clip information playing clip lists created with the scene selection function and locking and deleting clip This allows you to check the actual video as you work Playback yoeghe q pue Bulpiovey v Jaydeyo 63 yoeq elq pue BuipiooeH p 1e1deuo 64 See Thumbnail Operations page 73 for more information about thumbnail operations and Scene Selection Clip List Editing page 84 for more information about the scene selection function Playback Operations in GUI Screens Chapter Overview You can perform scene searches play the searched scenes and select scenes edit clip list in Graphical User Interface GUI screens The GUI screens are your gateways to discs and the data saved on discs The GUI screens can display European languages Japanese Korean Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese for clip names and titles Switching between GUI screens The most important GUI screens are Clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails of clips on the disc Clip is displayed as the title at the upper left of the screen see page 66 Clip list thumbnail screen dis
272. nector by an i LINK cable before unplugging the i LINK cable first power off the device and disconnect the power plug from the outlet If the i LINK cable is unplugged with the device power plug still connected a current from an excessive voltage 8 to 40 V output from the i LINK connector of the device flows into this unit This may cause a failure of the unit When connecting this unit to a device with a 6 pin i LINK connector connect to the 6 pin i LINK connector of the other device first VIDEO CONTROL connector D sub 9 pin Connect an HKDV 900 video control unit See page 179 for correspondence between setting items of HKDV 900 and setup menu of this unit REMOTE 9P remote control 9 pin connector D sub 9 pin To control this unit from a controller or VTR supporting the RS 422A Sony 9 pin VTR protocol connect the device to this connector Rear Panel DC IN 12V connector XLR 4 pin male Connect to a DC power source of 12 V When using the BKP L551 Battery Adaptor to mount a battery pack connect the power cable of the BKP L551 For details see Supplying power on page 29 Q REMOTE connector 4 pin Supplies power to the RM 280 Editing Controller Q SD HDSDI INPUT SDSDI HDSDI signal input connector BNC type This inputs an SDSDI or HDSDI format video audio signal HDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER HDSDI signal output 1 2 superimpose connectors BNC type These output HDSDI format video audio s
273. nectors BNC type The two connectors form a loop through connection when a reference video signal is input to the left connector the same signal is input from the right connector A4A IN to a connected device When no connection is made to the right connector the left connector is automatically terminated with an impedance of 75 ohms network connector RJ 45 type This is a 1OBASE T 100BASE TX 1000B ASE T connector for network connection For safety do not connect the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this port Follow the instructions for this port MAINTENANCE connectors These are the USB connectors for maintenance Connect a Windows USB keyboard or mouse see page 80 or a USB flash drive to access planning metadata stored on the drive see page 91 D SDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER SDI signal outputs 1 2 superimpose connectors BNC type These output SDSDI format video audio signals When the unit is shipped from the factory audio signal output is eight channels with no switching and RP188 timecode output is set to on You can change these settings with setup menu item 828 SDI AUDIO OUTPUT SELECT and setup menu item 920 SD SDI H ANC CONTROL The output from the 2 SUPER connector can have timecode menu settings alarm messages and other text information superimposed To turn superimposition off set CHAR SEL on the HOME page of the function menu to OF
274. nob to select enable and press the knob The automatic title generation function is enabled Overview suoneledo ei4 9 saydeyp 107 suonejedo aji4 9 1e1deu 108 6 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to move the asterisk on the left of the menu items to the item you want to select and press the knob PREFIX A string of up to 10 characters The allowable characters are alphanumeric characters symbols 1 96 amp _ and the space character NUMERIC A five digit number 00001 to 99999 to serve as the initial value of the serial number T Tur the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select the character position to set and press the knob 8 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select the character to set 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 as required When you are setting the NUMERIC item you can press the RESET RETURN button to return the initial value of the serial number to 00001 factory default setting 1 Ocarry out steps 7 to 9 to set the other item 11 Press the SAVE function F5 button The title is saved To check the titles of recorded clips Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen and select the clip whose title you want to check The title of the selected clip appears at the upper left of the screen See Thumbnail Operations page 73 for more information about the thumbnail screen The value of the serial number is incremented by 1 every time a title is
275. ns You can use this function to check archival discs and other discs which have been stored for extended periods so that you can take action before the deterioration progresses further Deteriorating laser diodes performance The performance of the laser diodes used in optical heads can worsen with age leading to deteriorating playback conditions For details see Digital hours meter page 156 about this setting Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate guide to when it is time to replace optical heads To prevent playback conditions from deteriorating Pay attention to the following points when handling discs Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with your hands Do not store for long periods in locations which are dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or in locations exposed to direct sunlight If playback conditions have deteriorated If a yellow or red playback condition mark appears check the following points Whether the disc displays the same playback condition on other XDCAM devices If so the surface of the disc may be dirty or scratched or the performance of the recording layers on the disc may have worsened due to age Do not use discs with these symptoms Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device displays the same playback conditions If so the performance of the laser diodes may have deteriorated Check th
276. ntrol unit Using BVE 700 700A The following figure shows a cut editing system comprising this unit as a player an HDW M2000 M2000P unit as a recorder and a BVE 700 700A as an editing control unit 75Q coaxial cable not supplied If 9 pin remote control cable not supplied PDW F1600 or REF VIDEO INPUT VIDEO CONTROL REMOTE SP PDW HD1500 this unit player iM REF VIDEO Reference video signal oma 9CJo L9 OUTPUT 3 pen REMOTE 1 IN 9P To HDSDI input connector HD video monitor Connections and Settings REF VIDEO IN CJ 90 M RECORDER BVE 700 700A editing control unit HDW M2000 recorder settings REMOTE 1 9P button Lit REF VIDEO INPUT connector 75 Q termination switch OFF Audio selection function switching button INPUT button HDSDI Function menu HOME gt F1 VID IN SDI Function menu page 1 gt F1 TCG INT Function menu page 1 F2 PR RGN PRESET Function menu page 1 gt F3 RUN FREE BVE 700 700A editing control unit setting SYNCHRONIZE menu OFF Settings on this unit Remote control switch REMOTE see page 16 Setup menu item 214 REMOTE I
277. number of clips maximum 300 This function is available only when you are operating equipment connected to the REMOTE 9P or SD HDSDI INPUT connector It is not available on the front panel Recording of proxy AV data Proxy AV data is a low resolution 1 5 Mbps video 64 kbps per audio channel MPEG 4 based version of a full resolution data stream Whenever this unit records full resolution MPEG HD422 data it simultaneously generates and records low resolution proxy AV data Because of its Features 11 MBIAJOAC JE deUD MeIAJOAQ 1e1deuo 12 small size proxy AV data can be transferred quickly over computer networks easily edited in the field with laptop computers and readily used in a wide variety of applications such as content management on small scale servers High speed searches with the jog and shuttle dials The jog and shuttle dials can be used to find scenes inside clips in the same way as the jog and shuttle dials on conventional VTRs In jog and variable modes you can search in field units at from 2 to 2 times normal speed In shuttle mode you can perform high speed searches at either 20 times normal speed or maximum speed as selected by an extended menu setting High speed F FWD and F REV searching is possible at either 35 times normal speed or maximum speed 1 1 Maximum speed is about 50 times normal speed However the maximum speed may vary depending on the state of the clip and the
278. nvolatile memory and markers recorded on the disc Processing time is about 5 seconds Quick salvage executes automatically if the unit is powered on with a disc still loaded after recording was interrupted by power off Full salvage Clips are reconstructed on the basis of markers recorded on the disc Nonvolatile memory cannot be used so processing takes longer than for a quick salvage about 30 seconds although it depends on the state of the disc You are prompted to execute a full salvage whenever you insert a disc that was removed manually from a powered off device after interruption of recording by power off Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the on standby button on the front panel is set to standby during recording because the unit does not enter standby mode until after the end of recording processing Even after recording finishes do not set the POWER switch on the rear panel to off until the ACCESS indicator has gone out These functions salvage as much recorded material as possible after an unforeseen accident but 100 restoration cannot be guaranteed When recording on the PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 does not end successfully you can use another XDCAM system to perform a full salvage of the disc As the other system use the PDW F800 or PDW 700 The following alarm message see page 159 may appear when you insert a disc DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED FORMAT DISC OR CONTACT SERVICE TO RUN CLIP SALVAGE PR
279. nybsc com Asia Pacific http pro sony asia com Korea http bp sony co kr China http pro sony com cn India http pro sony co in Sony Creative Software software download page http www sonycreativesoftware com download software_for_sony_equipment Features MBIAJOAC J deUuD 13 System Configurations MSIAJOAQ 1e1deuo 14 Professional Discs PDW 700 3 PFD23A PFD50DLA IWE HKDV 900 video control unit 9 VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU OUT IN aS ANALOG AUDIO 029 OUTPUT NPUT 08000000 O69 SZ PDW 1500 ii Sony BP L808S battery SDSDI OUTPUT CONTROL BKP L551 battery RM 280 editing al 5 adaptor REMOTE controller REMOTE 9P gg AUDIO OUTPUT INPUT AUDIO AES EBU OUT IN Microphone C Headphones REMOTE 9P 9 EBay ooo o ooog o HDW 2000 series 2o agi sabo o 6 a 700000 10 PDW F75 a If an HKDV 900 is connected be sure to check that the version of the HKDV 900 is 2 00 or higher b For HDW 2000 series only Owe DC IN 12V REMOTE 9P 8 85
280. o be recorded next appears The following characters can be displayed as clip names in this area Digits 0 to 9 Alphabetic characters a to z A to Z The following symbols amp comma period colon semicolon lt gt 50 LL l Space Recording format Displays the system frequency and the video and audio HD422 1080 SOMbPSH formats 8CH 24B1T Audio format Video format System frequency Q Time data display area amp Remaining disc recording capacity REC RUN FREE RUN Timecode generator mode VITC Time data type VITC Time data Recording mode indication Remaining disc recording capacity Displays the amount of recording capacity remaining on the disc REC RUN FREE RUN Displays the timecode run mode The run mode is set with RUN MODE on page P5 TC of the function menu see page 47 Timecode generator mode Displays the timecode source and generation method preset or regenerate These are set with PRST RGN and TCG on page P5 TC of the function menu see page 47 D VITC Lights in the following cases When VITC is read in playback mode This has no relations to the display in the time data display area When VITC recording is possible Time data type Displays the type of time data displayed in the time data display area The type of time data is selecte
281. o not allow assignment on Allow assignment See Assigning user defined clip titles page 107 for more information about assigning titles 1 TITLE Specify whether to assign titles to recorded clips disable Do not assign titles to clips enable Assign titles to clips 2 PREFIX Set the prefix of the title up to 10 characters The allowable characters are alphanumeric characters symbols amp _ and the space character TITLE 3 NUMERIC Set the initial value of the numeric part of the title 00001 to 99999 five digit number 00001 036 FILE NAMING Sub item 1 NAMING FORM Specify whether to allow use of clip and clip list files with user defined names See Alarms relating to audio and video signals page 166 for details about how to make the settings Specify the clip and clip list naming format Specify whether to allow use of files with user defined names C Standard format Do not allow use of files with user defined names free Free format Allow use of files with user defined names 2 AUTO NAMING When free is selected under the sub item NAMING FORM specify the format of the names of clips recorded on this unit Specify the standard name format or the same name as the title listed below or the name specified in planning metadata C Use the standard format for clip names title Use the title set in setup m
282. oaxial cable not supplied p I 9 pin remote control cable not supplied HDSDI OUTPUT 2 PDW PDW F1600 SD HDSDI recorder INPUT gt HD1500 player Reference video signal REMOTE 9P RECORDER DEVICE2 HDSDI To HDSDI input gUTPUT2 connector SUPER HD video monitor REFVIDEO RM 280 INPUT editing controller REF VIDEO REMOTE 9P REF IN OUT RECORDER DEVICE1 PDW F1600 recorder settings Remote control switch REMOTE RM 280 editing controller settings EDITOR REMOTE CONTROL selector switch EDITOR PDW HD1500 player settings Remote control switch REMOTE see page 16 Setup menu item 214 REMOTE INTERFACE 9PIN Setup menu 01 PREROLL 5s Setup menu item 214 REMOTE INTERFACE 9PIN Function menu page P1 VIDEO gt V INPUT HD SDI Setup menu 05 SYNC SEL ON Function menu pages P2 and P3 AUDIO gt A1 to A8 INPUT SDI Setup menu 06 SYNC VTR RECORDER Function menu page P5 TC gt TCG INT Setup menu 09 EDIT DLY 7 Function menu page P5 TC gt PRST RGN PRESET Setup menu 10 R ST DLY AUTO Function menu page P5 TC gt RUN MODE FREE RUN Setup menu 11 P ST DLY AUTO Connections and Settings Using the
283. ob Functions of special keys Key Function gt Move the cursor one character forward or back le gt i Move the cursor to Home or End position Back Space Deletes the character in front of the cursor CapsLock Turns the Shift key on permanently until pressed again and enables input of capital letters and symbols 4 Shift Enables input of capital letters and symbols Turns off after entry of one character Enter Confirms the edit and enables the OK and Cancel buttons 4 Select OK and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Thumbnail Operations You return to the Clip Properties screen and the results of the editing are reflected in the clip information To enter text using a USB keyboard or USB mouse You can connect a Windows USB keyboard or a Windows USB mouse to the MAINTENANCE connector see page 27 and use them together with the software keyboard to enter text Connect a Japanese keyboard if you have set the area of use to J for Japan 2 Connect a keyboard that corresponds to the font selected with Disc Menu item Settings gt Select Font if you have set the area of use to UC for regions outside Japan 1 Some USB keyboards or USB mice may not be recognized In this case the message Unknown USB appears 2 Only ASCII characters can be entered from a Japanese keyboard To change the display language font for clip names clip list names and ti
284. ock to persons This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance WARNING THIS WARNING IS APPLICABLE FOR USA ONLY If used in USA use the UL LISTED power cord specified below DO NOT USE ANY OTHER POWER CORD Plug Cap Parallel blade with ground pin NEMA 5 15P Configuration Cord Type SJT three 16 or 18 AWG wires Length Minimum 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in Less than 2 5 m 8 ft 3 in Rating Minimum 10 A 125 V Using this unit at a voltage other than 120 V may require the use of a different line cord or attachment plug or both To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock refer servicing to qualified service personnel WARNING THIS WARNING IS APPLICABLE FOR OTHER COUNTRIES 1 Use the approved Power Cord 3 core mains lead Appliance Connector Plug with earthing contacts that conforms to the safety regulations of each country if applicable 2 Use the Power Cord 3 core mains lead Appliance Connector Plug conforming to the proper ratings Voltage Ampere If you have questions on the use of the above Power Cord Appliance Connector Plug please consult a qualified service personnel CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT This Professional Disc Recorder is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Laser diode properties Wave length 400 to
285. ode During recording The timecode from the internal timecode generator or the timecode input to the TIME CODE IN connector When setup menu item 611 TC OUTPUT PHASE IN EE MODE is set to muting no timecode is output Preparations Preparing Power Sources This unit can be powered by AC power DC power or a battery pack For safety use only the Sony battery pack listed below Lithium ion battery pack BP L80S If you load or remove a battery pack incorrectly it may fall and cause bodily injury Follow the procedures described below to load or remove them Supplying power AC power supply Connect the AC IN connector to an AC power source using the specified AC power cord To supply AC power to the unit set the on standby button on the front panel to ON and the POWER switch on the rear panel to I ON DC power supply Connect the DC IN 12V connector to a DC power source To supply DC power to the unit set the on standby button on the front panel to ON and the POWER switch on the rear panel to OFF If the POWER switch on the rear panel is set to l ON AC power is supplied Battery power supply The battery pack that can be used with this unit is as follows To use a battery pack a BKP L551 Battery Adaptor and a BC L160 Battery Charger are also required e BP L80S Chapter Continuous recording time at room temperature BP L80S lithium ion battery pack 60 minutes 70 minutes when used in power save
286. of HD discs 1080 clip EIA 708 playback 720 clip D Down convert playback Cross convert and HDSDI VANC output 1080 playback EIA 708 EIA 608 SDSDI line 21 output Composite line 21 output HDSDI VANC output 720 playback EIA 708 Down convert playback EIA 608 SDSDI line 21 output Composite line 21 output Ancillary Data xipueddy 177 Playback and down convert playback of HD discs containing EIA 608 data only EIA 608 standard closed caption data recorded in HD clips For details see To record and playback EIA 708 B is played and output without conversion By performing standard closed caption data in HDSDI signals down convert playback you can also play and output EIA page 174 or To record EIA 608 B standard closed 608 standard closed caption data caption data in HDSDI signals page 174 However settings are required for output of ELA 608 standard closed caption data by down convert playback Playback of HD discs HDSDI VANC output EIA 608 EIA 608 2 Down convert playback EIA 608 SDSDI line 21 output Composite line 21 output Cross convert playback of HD discs containing EIA 608 data only When 1080 or 720 clips are played after cross conversion For details see To record and playback EIA 708 B EIA 608 standard closed caption data recorded in the clips standard closed caption data in HDSDI signals is played and output without conversio
287. off during a FAM connection the data transferred thus far is discarded All file operations are not possible for some types of files For details see File operation restrictions page 104 To eject discs from a remote computer Right click the icon representing this unit in Explorer and select Eject from the menu which appears Exiting file operations For Windows XP or Windows Vista Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to 3 1 Do one of the following on the e or icon displayed in the remote computer s taskbar Double click e Right click and select the Safely Remove Hardware The Safely Remove Hardware dialog appears 2 Select Sony XDCAM PDW IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device F1600 or HD1500 and click Stop The Stop a Hardware device dialog appears 3 select Sony XDCAM PDW IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device F1600 or HD1500 and click OK Windows XP Sony XDCAM PDW JEEE 1394 SBP2 Device F1600 or HD1500 is deleted from the Hardware devices list Windows Vista A message appears to inform you that you can now safely remove the device from your computer This unit can now resume normal operations The limitations described in Operation limitations during FAM connections no longer apply 4 Disconnect the i LINK cable as required For Windows 7 Do not disconnect the cable before performing step
288. okyo Japan The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Germany For any service or guarantee matters please refer to the addresses given in separate service or guarantee documents For kundene i Norge Dette utstyret kan kobles til et IT stremfordelingssystem Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt F r kunderna i Sverige Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag Suomessa asuville asiakkaille Laite on liitett v suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan For the Customers in Taiwan only Bees Has OWN For the State of California USA only Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate For the customers in the U S A SONY LIMITED WARRANTY Please visit http www sony com psa warranty for important information and complete terms and conditions of Sony s limited warranty applicable to this product For the customers in Canada SONY LIMITED WARRANTY Please visit http www sonybiz ca solutions Support do for important information and complete terms and conditions of Sony s limited warranty applicable to this product For the customers in Europe Sony Professional Solutions Europe Standard Warranty and Exceptions on Standard Warranty Please visit http www pro sony eu warranty for important information and complete terms and conditions For the custome
289. on the computer beforehand For details on downloading the software see page 13 Software Downloads in Chapter 1 To check the FAM driver version Connect this unit to your computer with an i LINK cable and then with a disc loaded start the system profiler utility of the application The version appears to the right of prodisk fs when you select Advanced Functions under Software Making FAM connections 1 ifihere is a disc loaded in this unit put the unit into the following state Recording playback search and other disc operations see page 50 Stopped THUMBNAIL button see page 18 Off Disc access by clip deletion disc formatting etc Stopped MENU button see page 18 Off Unsaved current clip list Save or clear Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function Disconnected Setting of setup menu item 258 LIVE LOGGING Values other than live view mode off or live mode 2 Connect the i LINK S400 connector on this unit to the i LINK IEEE1394 connector on the remote computer using an i LINK cable see page 33 When a disc is inserted into this unit the remote computer recognizes this unit as a removable disc The following icon appears in the Finder on the remote computer indicating that the computer is now able to perform file operations File Operations in File Access Mode for Macintosh M1 Untitled Operation limitations during FAM c
290. onnections e With the exception of the EJECT button recording buttons and playback control buttons are disabled Do not use the EJECT button to eject discs Always eject discs from the computer Do not disconnect the i LINK cable during a FAM connection Doing so may result in unstable operation Always eject any loaded disc before disconnecting the i LINK cable Operating on files Proceed as follows 1 Start the Finder Check to be sure that a drive has been assigned to this unit 2 Operate from the Finder on the files on the disc in this unit You can operate in the same way that you operate on local drives and files on network computers If you power this unit off during a FAM connection the data transferred thus far is discarded All file operations are not possible for some types of files For details see File operation restrictions page 104 To eject discs from a remote computer Click the eject button to the right of the icon for this unit in the Finder or drag the icon for this unit from the Finder to the Trash Exiting file operations Proceed as follows Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 and 2 1 Eject the disc by clicking the eject button to the right of the icon for this unit in the Finder or by dragging the icon for this unit from the Finder to the Trash 2 Disconnect the i LINK cable as required To make a reconnection To reconnect after exiting file
291. or non drop frame To record with the internal timecode generator synchronized to external timecode External Regen Use this method to synchronize the timecode generators of a number of recorders to record the playback timecode of external VTRs or to record while maintaining synchronization between the source video and timecode When the Live Logging function is set to Live View mode the run mode is always Free Run regardless of the setting of RUN MODE on page P5 TC of the function menu It is not possible to preset the timecode to be recorded Use either of the following procedures according to the type of external timecode Synchronizing with timecode input to the TIME CODE IN connector 1 Connect the timecode output of an external device to the TIME CODE IN connector and input a reference video signal to the REF VIDEO INPUT connector 2 Make the following settings on page P5 TC of the function menu Set TCG to EXT Set PRST RGN to TC Synchronizing with embedded LTC input to the SD HDSDI INPUT connector 1 Input an HDSDI signal containing embedded LTC to the SD HDSDI INPUT connector and a reference video signal to the REF VIDEO INPUT connector 2 Make the following settings on page P5 TC of the function menu Set TCG to SDP Set PRST RGN to TC Executing either of these procedures starts the internal timecode generator running in synchronization with the external timecode
292. ord and play back closed captions conforming to the ELA 708 B D standard and EIA 608 B standard and text data conforming to the ARIB TR B 23 2 standard which comprise the VANC Vertical ancillary data packets 1 EIA Electronic Industries Alliance 2 ARIB Association of Radio Industries and Businesses To record ancillary data In maintenance menu item M3B VANC RX PARAMETER set the lines where ancillary data is inserted the DID Data Identifier word and the SDID Secondary Data Identifier word see page 147 To record and playback EIA 708 B standard closed caption data in HDSDI signals Set the following items e Sub items of maintenance menu item M3B0 VANC RX PACKET LINE line for the VANC to be received 9LINE example DID data identification word 61h SDID secondary data identification word 01h To record EIA 608 B standard closed caption data in HDSDI signals Set the following items Sub items of maintenance menu item M3B0 VANC RX PACKET LINE line for the VANC to be received 9LINE example DID data identification word 61h SDID secondary data identification word 02h To record EIA 608 B standard closed caption data in SDSDI line 21 signals after conversion to the EIA 708 B standard Set the following items Sub items of maintenance menu item M3B0 VANC RX PACKET LINE line for the VANC to be received 9LINE example Ancillary Data DID data identification word 61h S
293. ore the menu bank 2 settings in menu bank 4 BANKS TO BANK4 Store the menu bank 3 settings in menu bank 4 RESET BANK4 Reset menu bank 4 M48 AUTO RECALL Select whether to recall settings automatically from a menu bank when the system is powered on and if so which menu bank to recall from off Do not recall settings from a menu bank from BANK1 Recall settings from menu bank 1 from BANK2 Recall settings from menu bank 2 from BANK3 Recall settings from menu bank 3 from BANK4 Recall settings from menu bank 4 M49 RESET ALL SETUP Reset the current menu settings to the factory settings SAVE function button F5 Reset MENU button Return to the next highest menu level without resetting The system frequency setting is also cleared If you execute this item reset the system frequency see page 30 Date and time settings are not cleared but the time zone setting is cleared After executing this item reset the time zone see page 30 snus Z Ja deup 148 M5 NETWORK Items relating to network settings Item M50 DHCP Setting Set whether to assign an IP address automatically with the DHCP server DISABLE Do not assign automatically ENABLE Assign automatically M51 IP ADDRESS PRESET Set the IP address of this unit 192 168 001 010 IP address cannot be set when DHCP is set to ENABLE To check the automatically acquired IP address of this unit close the maintena
294. ormation from recorded VANC packets in data items in the DATA ITEM section of MXF files off Do not include VANC packet information in DATA ITEM on Include VANC packet information in DATA ITEM 668 USER META DATA OUTPUT IN Select whether to output user metadata to MXF files MXF off Do not output on Output 669 ESSENCE MARK RECORD MODE Specify when essence marks can be recorded during connections to a switcher normal Always allow essence marks to be recorded rec Allow essence marks to be recorded only during recording a Not displayed when the unit is in 23 98P mode b LHD1500 c HD1500 When the PDBZ UPG02 Software Upgrade Key is installed When the PDBK S1500 or PDBK F1500 option is installed Setup Menu snue wN z 1 deyo 135 Menu items in the 700s relating to video control Item number 703 Item name BLANK LINE SELECT Sub Item Settings Switch blanking of the video output signal on or off for individual lines in the vertical blanking interval The Y C signal and odd even fields are blanked simultaneously ALL LINE Specify the blanking for each line separately bink blank Regardless of the setting of other sub items blank all lines which can be specified in this menu item thru throu Regardless of the setting of other sub items switch off blanking for all lines which can be specified in this menu item In 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode
295. osite signals regardless of menu settings EE output of closed caption data in HDSDI signals is delayed by 1 frame with respect to EE output of the video signals HDSDI VANC output EIA 708 608 EIA 608 SDSDI line 21 output Composite line 21 output Recording and playback after EIA 608 708 conversion and down convert playback In response to closed caption input data that complies with the EIA 608 standard record play and output that data after conversion to EIA 708 format By performing down convert playback you can also play and output EIA 608 standard closed caption data However settings are required for output of E A 608 standard closed caption data by down convert playback For details see To record and playback EIA 708 B standard closed caption data in HDSDI signals page 174 EIA 708 recording and playback EIA 608 708 HDSDI VANC output conversion EIA 708 EIA 708 EIA 608 EIA 608 Down convert SDSDI line 21 input gt gt playback SDSDI line 21 output EE output after EIA 608 708 conversion In response to closed caption input data that complies with the EIA 608 standard output that data to EE after conversion to EIA 708 format However settings are required for EE output of EIA 708 standard closed caption data For details see To record EIA 608 B standard closed caption data in SDSDI line 21 signals after conversion to the EIA 708 B standard page 174 Ancillary Data
296. ot displayed This setting is valid only for channels where mic is selected with setup menu item 834 AUDIO INPUT LEVEL Regardless of this setting AGC is off for channels where line is selected 841 AUDIO LIMITER SELECT Select the limiter saturation level for limiting large input signals for use in manual adjustment of audio input levels off The limiter does not operate 6dB 9dB 12dB 15dB 17dB The limiter operates when the VARIABLE switch is set to PRESET To display this item on the PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 with the PDBZ UPGO02 Software Upgrade Key installed set maintenance menu item M393 AUDIO DSP to AGC limiter When maintenance menu item M393 AUDIO DSP is set to linear edit this item is not displayed This setting is valid only for channels where mic is selected with setup menu item 834 AUDIO INPUT LEVEL Regardless of this setting the limiter is off for channels where line is selected a HD1500 When the PDBZ UPGO2 Software Upgrade Key is installed b When the PDBK 201 option board is installed Menu items in the 900s relating to digital process Item number Item name 920 SD SDI H ANC CONTROL Sub item Settings Select whether to add information to the SDI output 1 AUDIO 5CH 8CH off Do not add digital audio data channels 5 to 8 on Add digital audio data channels 5 to 8 RP188 ATC off Do not add RP18
297. other disc and then try again Linear Editing HD422 clips recorded with the Interval Rec Picture Cache Disc Exchange Cache or Slow amp Quick Motion functions HD422 clips that have been partially transferred by an FTP or FAM connection Clips for which disc defects have been detected Clips for which errors have been detected such as when the unit s primary power was turned off during linear editing Clips recovered by the salvage function Normally linear editing on this unit can target only clips that have been created on XDCAM devices It may not be possible to edit clips that been created by other software applications and uploaded to this unit as files In rare cases errors may occur on the recorder side if you execute a first edit on an unrecorded disc If this occurs execute the first edit again Editable clip recording formats This unit supports editing of the following recording formats e MPEG HD422 1080 59 941 29 97P 501 25P 23 98P MPEG HD422 720 59 94P 50P e MPEG IMX 59 941 50i e DVCAM 59 94i 50i Editing of the MPEG HD420 format is not supported Editable video and audio signals This unit supports editing of the following signals on video and audio tracks Video HD SDI for HD recording SD SDI for SD recording Audio SDI Analog AES EBU e Video and audio signals input to the amp i LINK S400 connector cannot be edited Editing cannot be done with a File Acces
298. out easily on this unit Clip lists editing data created with the scene selection function can be used on XPRI and other full feature nonlinear editing systems Clips Material recorded with this unit is managed in units called clips A clip contains the material from a recording start point to a recording end point Clips have numbers beginning with C for example C0001 Recording start point of Recording end clip 2 point of clip 2 Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Clip 4 C0001 C0002 C0003 C0004 You can also assign titles to your clips and use the titles to manage them instead of the clip numbers For more information Assigning user defined clip titles page 107 Clip lists You can use the scene selection function to select clips from the clips saved on a disc and create a cut edit list called a clip list Clip lists have numbers beginning with E for example E0001 Up to 99 clip lists can be saved on a disc Scene Selection Clip List Editing Sub clips clips in clip lists Clips or parts of clips that have been added to a clip list are called sub clips Sub clips are virtual editing data that specify ranges in the original clips You can use them without modifying the original data The following figure illustrates the relation between clips and sub clips Clips on disc Clip 1 C0001 i Clp3 i C0003 Clip 2 C0002 Clip list E0001 l Sub clip 1 Sub
299. p list or delete all clip lists from the disc N A Clip CANNOT EDIT AV MATERIAL This appears when an edit preset command is CHECK REC FORMAT IN CLIP received for an HD420 clip or another clip that cannot be edited Check the recording format of the edit target clip see page 56 Mode Err D CANNOT EDIT AV MATERIAL This appears when an edit preset command is CHANGE SNGL CLIP PB TO OFF AND REC MODE TO NORMAL IN SETUP MENU received but the unit is in Single Clip Playback mode Disc Exchange Cache mode or Clip Continuous Rec mode Set setup menu item 154 SINGLE CLIP PLAY MODE to off or set setup menu item 150 REC MODE to normal Troubleshooting xipueddy 163 Alarm message in time data display area Alarm message in video monitor screen Description action LOGGING N A Disc P DISC CANNOT BE EDITED This appears when an edit preset command is USE PFD23A OR PFD50DLA received but linear editing is not possible for the inserted disc Insert a disc that can be edited by linear editing see page 56 Live Logg EXIT LIVE VIEW MODE OF LIVE This appears when an attempt is made to preset timecode or establish a FAM or FTP connection while the Live Logging function is set to Live View mode a Displayed only when setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY is set to on b Displayed only when setup menu item 016 ALARM DISPLAY is set to on or limit
300. page 130 200 to 299 control interface Items Settings relating to editing page 131 300 to 399 operations Items Settings relating to preroll page 132 400 to 499 Items Settings relating to disc page 132 500 to 599 protection Item group Function Refer to Items Settings relating to the page 133 600 to 650 timecode generator Items Settings relating to the page 134 651 to 699 metadata and UMID Items Settings relating to video page 136 700 to 799 control Items Settings relating to audio page 138 800 to 899 control Items Settings relating to digital page 140 900 to 999 processing Items in the basic menu The basic menu items excluding the items related to the digital hours meter are listed in the following table tem names are the names which appear on the video monitor screen of this unit and an external monitor when the input signals to the monitor are the video signals output from the COMPOSITE OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector the SDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector or the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector An abbreviated name appears in the time data display area when you press the NEXT button The values in the Settings column are the values which appear in the time data display area The values may appear in a different format on an external monitor In this case the external monitor values are shown in parentheses Underlined values are the factory defaults Item number Item name 001 PREROL
301. plays thumbnails of sub clips in a clip list Clip List is displayed as the title at the upper left of the screen see page 66 There are also two playback screens Clip playback screen playback screen for normal video Clip list playback screen playback screen for clip list video You will use the THUMBNAIL button and the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button to switch between these four screens Each press of these buttons switches between the screens as shown in the following figure The THUMBNAIL and SUB CLIP DISC MENU indicators light as follows according to the type of screen that is currently displayed To switch between these four screens a disc with recorded clips must be loaded in the unit Overview SU991J9S ND ui suonejedo g JaydeyD 65 SU99J9S IMD ui suonejedo s Je1deu 66 Clip playback screen 9 TCR 00 23 00 26 JOG STILL 001036 THUMBNAIL o C e Unlit SUB CLIP eS e Unlit DISC MENU e Clip list playback screen gt TCR 00 00 18 01 SHUTTLE STILL F0008 003 005 THUMBNAIL o e Uniit SUB CUT N 6 L Soe Lit DISC MENU 4 LI Clip thumbnail screen 006 040 H LO Clip Coe i TC 00 23 40 07 El e TC 002622 10 ALS TC 00 28 06 09 TC 00 28 22 02 i DATE amp TIME 30 NOV 2005 13 38 DUR R O 00 10 23 TC 00 23 00 25 THUMBNAIL 9 C Wo Lit ue ye NV 0 t Je Unit DISC
302. puts HDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER BNC type x2 complying with SMPTE 292M SDSDI OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER BNC type x2 complying with SMPTE 259M Analog video outputs COMPOSITE OUTPUT 1 2 SUPER BNC type x2 1 0 Vp p 75 Q sync negative complying with SMPTE 170M Analog audio outputs ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT 1 2 XLR 3 pin male x2 4 dBu 600 Q load low impedance balanced AUDIO MONITOR XLR 3 pin male x2 4 dBu 600 Q load low impedance balanced Stereo phone jack x1 ee to 13 dBu 8 Q unbalanced PHONES Digital audio outputs DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU OUTPUT 1 2 3 4 BNC type x2 1 2 ch 3 4 ch complying with AES 3id 1995 Timecode output TIME CODE OUT BNC type x1 SMPTE timecode 1 0 Vp p 75 Q unbalanced Remote control connectors REMOTE 9P D sub 9 pin female x1 complying with RS 422A VIDEO CONTROL D sub 9 pin female x1 complying with EIA RS 423 4 pin female x1 DC 12 V 7 5 W RJ 45 type x1 1000BASE T complying with TEEE802 3ab 100BASE TX complying with TEEE802 3u 10BASE T complying with IEEE802 3 REMOTE Network Other MAINTENANCE connectors High Speed USB USB 2 0 Type A Accessories supplied Operation guide 1 CD ROM manual 1 Installation manual 1 Connector caps Accessories not supplied AC power cord For the customers in the U S A and Canada Part number 1 551 812 41 125 V 10 A about 2 4 m For the customers in the United Kingdom
303. r transportation service pack it in the shipping carton of the unit Care of the unit If the body of the unit is dirty clean it with a soft dry cloth In extreme cases use a cloth steeped in a little neutral detergent then wipe dry Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinners as these may cause discoloration or other damage to the finish of the unit In the event of operating problems If you should experience problems with the unit contact your Sony service representative Use and storage locations Store in a level ventilated place Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places n excessive heat or cold operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C 41 F to 104 F Remember that in summer or in warm climates the temperature inside a car with the windows closed can easily exceed 50 C 122 F In damp or dusty locations Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain Locations subject to violent vibration Near strong magnetic fields Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong electromagnetic fields n direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and interference with audio and video signals It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this unit be powered off Condens
304. r the same name The following procedure saves the current clip list under its current name the name that appears in the clip list thumbnail screen See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu see page 71 2 Select Save Clip List and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The clip list is saved However Save Clip List as is executed when the name displayed in the clip list thumbnail screen is no name If you press the EJECT button or the on standby button before saving a new or edited clip list a message appears asking if you want to discard your changes and continue Follow the instructions in the message to continue or cancel the operation Managing clip lists To load clip lists The following procedure loads a clip list stored on the disc into the unit s internal memory as the current clip list See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu 2 Select Load Clip List and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A list of clip lists stored on the disc appears Scene Selection Clip List Editing SU9BINS f15 ul suonejedo s Ja deyD 89 SU99J9S IMD ui suonejedo s JeydeyD 90 Disc Menu ip List Name amp Date Sorted by Name 20 jam zm 03 AUG2007 17 51 03 AUG2007 17 51 03 AUG2007 17 51 03 AUG2007 17 51 18 MAY2006 10 25
305. r thumbnail screen Playing the scene you have found After finding a clip with one of the methods explained in the previous section Searching with thumbnails see page 74 you can cue up and play the clip that you have found Thumbnail Operations To search for a thumbnail position and cue it up See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 select the thumbnail that you want to cue up Clip C0010 S A la 010 041 OK 1 TC 00 23 00 25 TC 00 25 49 23 26 22 1600271804 T6002751 09 P a MF m n E i we d TC 00 28 06 09 TC 00 28 22 02 TC 00 23 34 18 TC 00 23 54 22 DATE amp TIME 30 NOV 2005 13 40 pur 0 00 04 14 TC 00 23 40 07 TC 00 24 45 11 E B E TC 00 25 06 14 2 Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob To play clips with the PUSH SET S SEL knob In the Disc Menu set Settings gt SET Key on Thumbnail to Cue up amp Play Playback begins from the selected frame when you press the PUSH SET S SEL knob in the same way as when you press the PLAY button To search for a thumbnail position and play from there See page 72 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 select the thumbnail that you want to play 2 Press the PUSH SET S SEL button TCR 00 26 22 10 PLAY C0010 010 041 Selecting clips by type Filter Clips function You can select clips of a certain type from among all of the clips on a disc Filter Clips function For example you
306. re keyboard is highlighted when a USB keyboard has been recognized and enabled for use with this unit and the mouse icon is highlighted and a mouse pointer appears when a USB mouse has been enabled Set Title of Clip 001 041 ES EIS ee qwe s x CapsLock 4Shift z English USA OK osnan U cun Use the proper keyboard for the area of use Some characters may not be entered correctly if you use a keyboard designed for use in another area t is not possible to enter Japanese even on a Japanese keyboard USB keyboard special functions keys In addition to the special function keys of the software keyboard you can use the following special function keys on a USB keyboard Key 4 4 Function When the cursor is in an edit box Move the cursor to the start or end When OK or Cancel has the focus Moves the focus between OK and Cancel Delete Deletes the character after the cursor Shift Shift Selects the string before or after the cursor Ctrl C X V A Z Ctrl C Copies the selected string Ctrl X Cuts the selected string Ctrl V Pastes a copied or cut string Ctrl A Selects the entire string Ctrl Z Undoes the immediately preceding operation Enter When the cursor is in an edit box Moves the focus to OK When OK or Cancel has the focus Exits the software keyboard Esc When the cursor is in an edit box moves t
307. recording of video feeds with no important scenes lost while discs are being exchanged Cart system support With its compact body this unit can replace the SD PDW 1500 unit You can mount this unit in the PDJ C1080 and PDJ A640 XDCAM cart systems IT friendly Computer access to files file access mode Video and audio clip data are recorded as files The FAM function enables quick random access by computers to the video audio and metadata files stored on Professional Discs with the ability to display thumbnail lists on the computer screen and perform file based reads and writes Equipped with network connector The unit features a Gigabit Ethernet connector as standard equipment Via this connector you can connect the unit to computers and networks to enable listing of the video audio and metadata files recorded on the Professional Disc and rapid file transfers Support for FTP commands makes it easy to carry out network file transfers from remote locations The unit has two optical pickups for high speed transfers Direct FTP function You can use this unit as a local FTP host to send and receive MXF files to and from other XDCAM devices without using a computer This function is available through simple operations on the GUI screen Supports SNMP for maintenance and service This unit supports Sony s SNMP based remote maintenance and monitoring software This software allows you to monitor the status of the hardware via
308. reen Upload Clips via Direct FTP operations Uploading Result Report Uploaded 3 3 Clips 1 Display the Disc Menu 0 0 ClipLists 2 Select Download Clip via Direct FTP and then press Not Uploaded 0 3 Clips 0 0 ClipLists the PUSH SET S SEL knob P All Clips Uploaded Successfully The Select Remote Host screen of the Download Clip via Direct FTP command appears Download Clip via Direct FTP To upload part of a clip Select Remote Host You can select part of a clip in the expand thumbnail Remote Host 1 screen or the chapter thumbnail screen and upload that eee este P P Remote Host 3 part Remote Host 4 UPnP Expand thumbnail screen The clip is divided arbitrarily SU99J9S IMD ui suonejedo s je1deu into parts of equal length regardless of content Use this method if you do not need to specify the transfer range precisely Chapter thumbnail screen Use this method if you want to transfer a specific range By setting essence marks at the start point and end point of the transfer range you can specify the range with a precision of one frame In the clip thumbnail screen select a clip and press the EXPAND or CHAPTER button The expand thumbnail screen or the chapter thumbnail screen appears Select the transfer range To select multiple thumbnails While holding the SHIFT key down turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob or press the IN or OUT button The duration of the transfer range appears
309. requency of voice over clips on the inserted disc Insert a disc with a system frequency that matches the system frequency of this unit or change the system frequency setting of this unit Troubleshooting Error messages Error codes appear in the time data display when an error usually a hardware problem occurs In addition both error messages and error codes appear in the monitor video section and on the video monitor connected to the unit When an error message appears follow the instructions in the error message to resolve the problem Error code Error50 010 Error code in time data display area ERROR AN ERROR HAS BEEN DETECTED INFORM SERVICE OF FOLLOWING CODE 50 010 PRESS EJECT KEY TO EJECT DISC Error code Example error in video monitor screen To eject discs with the unit powered off As an emergency measure disc cartridges can be removed with the unit powered off This operation should always be done by a trained service technician Specifications General External dimensions w h d excluding projections 210x132x396 mm 8 3 gx5 4x15 g inches ina p oc n 396 15 5 9 C7 leo 309 a T 8885 o osmu CJ CJ 132 5 1 4 210 8 3 9 in mm inches Mass 6 5 kg 14 Ib 5 oz Power requirements 100 V to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 12 V DC Power
310. rformance Sampling frequency Y 74 25 MHz R Y B Y 37 125 MHz 8 bits sample MPEG 2 422PGHL Quantization Compression Composite output Frequency response 0 5 to 5 75 MHz40 5 2 0 dB S N Y 53 dB or more Y C delay 20 ns or less K factor K2T 1 0 or less Processor adjustment range Video level co to 3 dB Chroma level co to 3 dB Set up black level 30 IRE 210 mV 30 SYNC 15 us SC 0 to 400 ns Chroma phase System phase Specifications Audio performance Sampling frequency 48 kHz Quantization 24 bits Headroom 20 18 16 12 dB selectable Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 5 1 0 dB 0 dB at 1 kHz Dynamic range 90 dB or more Distortion 0 0546 or less at 1 kHz Input connectors Digital video inputs SD HDSDI INPUT BNC type x1 complying with SMPTE 259M SD SMPTE 292M HD amp LINK S400 6 pin type x1 complying with IEEE 1394 Analog video inputs REF VIDEO INPUT BNC type x2 loop through HD Tri level sync 0 6 Vp p 75 Q sync negative SD black burst or SD composite sync 0 286 Vp p 75 Q sync negative Analog audio inputs ANALOG AUDIO INPUT 1 2 XLR 3 pin female x2 4 dBu high impedance balanced Digital audio inputs DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU IN 1 2 3 4 BNC type x2 1 2ch 3 4ch complying with AES 3id 1995 Timecode input TIME CODE IN BNC type x1 SMPTE timecode 0 5 to 18 Vp p 10 KO unbalanced Output connectors Digital video out
311. rial Using the Extended UMID You have to enter a country code organization code and user code Set the country code referring to the table in ISO 3166 and set the organization code and user code according to the guidelines of your organization For details see Setting UMID ownership information page 173 Using UMID Data t t Material source ID detecting material Metadata pack that identifies the source of material unit by defining the when where and who of the material unit with which it is associated Functions of UMID data UMID data enables the following Addition of a globally unique ID to every clip of audio visual material The unique ID is used to detect the material source and to link it with the original source material Distinguishing between original material and copied material 00 is added to the Instance Number for original material Recording with UTC time UTC coordinated universal time is used when recording the UMID Use of a universal time system enables uniform management of source material recorded all over the world Calculation of date differences Source material is recorded using modified Julian dates MJD which enables easy calculation of date differences between different source material items Setting UMID ownership information Proceed as follows 1 Set setup menu item 029 STORED OWNERSHIP to on see page 124 See page 125 for more information about setup menu
312. ring recording for example because the HDSDI cable is disconnected or the controlling camcorder is powered off When HDSDI signal input is restored the unit resumes operation according to the embedded REC or STOP command Exchanging discs Even during recording it is possible to eject discs by pressing the EJECT button on the front panel After a disc is exchanged the unit resumes operation according to the embedded REC or STOP command This unit begins recording operation about one second after the camcorder Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function Normally a clip is generated as an independent file every time recording starts and stops The Clip Continuous Rec function allows you to continue recording to the same clip until the function is stopped or turned off regardless of how many times recording starts and stops This is convenient if you want to avoid generating a large number of short clips or if you want to record without worrying about the limit on the number of clips maximum 300 A Rec Start essence mark is recorded whenever recording starts which makes it easy to find the recording start points see page 76 A new clip may be created the next time you start recording if it is impossible to continue recording to the same clip because of signal noise or some other reason The Clip Continuous Rec function cannot be enabled when the Live Logging function is set to Live View mode xoeg e g pue
313. rmation on the video signal output from the HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER connector off Do not superimpose f key Follow the function menu setting Setup Menu snue wN Z Je deuj 123 snus Z Ja deup 124 Item number 029 Item name STORED OWNERSHIP Settings Specify whether to enable changing UMID ownership information settings COUNTRY ORGANIZATION and USER off Do not enable on Enable See Using UMID Data page 172 for more information about UMID 031 RECORDING FORMAT Set the recording format HD422 HD422 420HQ HD420HQ 420SP HD420SP IMX50 IMX50Mbps MPEG IMX 50 Mbps P IMX40 IMX40Mbps MPEG IMX 40 Mbps P IMX30 IMX30Mbps MPEG IMX 30 Mbps P DVCAM DVCAM 033 BATTERY END VOLTAGE Sets the voltage to shut down the unit in the battery operation The battery near end indicator flashes at 0 7 V of the set voltage 10 5V to 13 5V 10 5 V to 13 5 V in 0 5 V unit 034 MENU STATUS DISPLAY ON VIDEO MONITOR Specify whether to display the setup menu status at the left edge of the status display line when setup menu item 005 DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT is set to T amp sta dis disable Do not display ena enable Display The display is visible only when no disc is loaded and during insertion and ejection of a disc 035 CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT Sub item Specify whether to allow user definition of the titles assigned to clips off D
314. rs in Korea SONY LIMITED WARRANTY Please visit http bpeng sony co kr handler BPAS Start for important information and complete terms and conditions of Sony s limited warranty applicable to this product Table of Contents Chapter 1 Overview Marks for Model Specific Functions 10 au 10 Features of this Unities tete M Pose De URP e TE KE SR ETUR eus 10 System Configurations eeiinr nice asina atus a ain nn nara tanda hnaaa 14 Chapter 2 Names and Functions of Parts Front Panel uiui on ceiiieecieoc aal ceres eate t cacaza eal en Pan oo rese oo soo suaeteeceiee 15 Display WHO o cue ait e ier iot aei a idea oe oo a eras a ante 21 Rear Panel isco ccsacsiecsecccdacecauectscccse dace aneccavececsusececasudustdecsccndadveastsece 26 Chapter 3 Preparations Preparing Power Sources eere 29 Suppivmg DOWOEGGSs eed es wees deu QU eR soda Vost s edi E EORR ERA 29 Attaching a battery Da ku cesse dt e DARE M HO eti hc n huseenied 29 Initial SUP cr P POP MPS 30 Front Panel Tilt Mechanism 32 Connections and Settings eese 33 Connections for using the supplied application software 33 Connections for cut CCI osse condere err sedie redde odis 34 Using the editing functions of the recor
315. s page 91 Menu System Configuration Setup Menu Chapter Setup Menu The setup menu system of this unit comprises the basic setup menu and extended setup menu Basic menu This menu is used to make settings relating for example to the following the digital hours meter the preroll time the text information superimposed on the video output to the monitor the menu banks for retaining menu settings Extended menu This menu is used to make a wide range of settings relating to the functions of this unit for example the control panel functions video and audio control and digital data processing Configuration of the basic menu The basic menu comprises the following groups of items Item group Function Refer to Items Display of the total number of page 156 H01 to H17 hours the unit has been powered on and other information collected by the digital hours meter Items Settings relating to the preroll page 121 001 to 099 time superimposed text information switching between 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P and 50i 50P 25P 23 98P modes etc Items Settings relating to the menu page 124 B01 to B20 banks for saving menu settings Configuration of the extended menu The extended menu comprises the following groups of items Item group Function Refer to Items Settings relating to control page 128 100 to 199 panels Items Settings relating to the remote
316. s Displays the current setting status of setup menu Display Description BANK1 The current menu settings are the same as the settings in menu bank 1 BANK2 The current menu settings are the same as the settings in menu bank 2 BANK3 The current menu settings are the same as the settings in menu bank 3 DEFAULT The current menu settings are the same as the factory defaults No display The current menu settings are different from all of the above Remote interface When the remote control switch is set to REMOTE displays the name of the interface selected with setup menu item 214 REMOTE INTERFACE Clip playback mode The clip playback mode appears as follows according to the settings of setup menu items 142 REPEAT MODE and 154 SINGLE CLIP PLAY MODE Display Setup menu setting Description Item 142 Item 154 REPEAT play amp off Repeat playback VAR fwd mode Perform or force repeat playback of all clips on the disc SINGLE off on Single clip playback mode Play the currently selected clip once SNGL play amp on Single clip repeat RPT VAR fwd playback mode or force Play the currently selected clip repeatedly No off off Continuous display playback mode Perform continuous playback of all clips on the disc playing each clip once E Jog shuttle dial mode Appears when the unit is in shuttle jog or variable mode
317. s contains a space Use the SITE REPFL command instead Command syntax SITE REPF SP lt path name gt SP lt start frame gt SP lt transfer size gt lt CRLF gt lt start frame gt specifies an offset from the start of the file Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset the first frame is 0 lt transfer size gt specifies the number of video frames to transfer specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file FTP File Operations suolyesado aji4 9 Jeydeyp 117 suoneJedo e 4 9 1e1deu 118 Input example SITE REPF Clip C0001 MXF 5 150 Transfer C0001 MXF Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame 150 SITE REPFL Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to the remote computer This command allows you to specify a segment in the body of the MXF file composed of video and audio data for transfer of the required segment only A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified Command syntax SITE REPFL SP lt path name gt SP start frame SP lt transfer size gt lt CRLF gt path name specifies the path name of the file to transfer Enclose the path name in double quotation marks lt start frame gt specifies an offset from the start of the file Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset the first frame is 0 lt transfer size gt specifies the number of video frames to transfer specify 0 to transfer to the en
318. s showing only clips that meet the specified condition The filtering condition appears at the lower left of the screen Filter C0010 ET I is LI i NG NG NG 005 005 S xi Li a TC 00 2 TC 00 23 40 07 TC 00 24 45 11 TC 00 25 06 14 Clip Flag NG 30 NOV 2005 13 40 pun 0 00 04 14 7 if you want to filter the clips again with a different filtering condition to narrow down the filtering results repeat steps 2 to 6 The command name selected in step 4 changes to Filter Clips Narrowing To play selected clips continuously Register all of the filtered clips in an automatically generated clip list and play the clip list 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu in the filter thumbnail screen 2 Select Copy to Clip List and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A clip list thumbnail screen appears showing filtered clips that have been registered in the clip list 001 007 LECT au 1 M Q TC 00 00 20 13 Clip List no name ars TC 00 00 04 14 TC 00 00 12 04 E S Bac TC 00 00 28 08 TC 00 00 35 15 TC 00 00 46 08 New File 0 00 52 15 3 Press the PLAY button The screen changes to the clip playback screen and playback starts Operations on filtering results You can use the Thumbnail Menu in the filter thumbnail screen to perform the following operations Item name Function Select the information to be displayed at the bottom of the thumbnails Clip Informa
319. s Mode FAM connection Recording of upconverted SD is not supported Discs that can be used Use the following Professional Discs Model number Capacity Data transfer rate writing PFD23A 23 3 GB 2 4 times normal PFD50DLA 50 0 GB A PFD23 Professional Disc with a 2 times normal data transfer rate cannot be used for linear editing When a disc that cannot be edited is inserted the following indications appear in the time data display area on the front panel When an N A disc is inserted VITC UITC INT PRESET R RUN REM 020m 00 04 59 01 N A N A files can be determined by an N A clip mark see page 68 on the thumbnail display When a mixed format recording disc is inserted VITC UITC INT PRESET R RUN REM 020m 00 08 04 27 Mixed When a disc with a clip list is inserted VITC UITC INT PRESET R RUN REM 020m 00 00 00 00 5 List Item Recording format Setting Check the recording format of the clip with the display window see page 22 and select the same format with setup menu item 031 RECORDING FORMAT Audio Non audio data To perform insert editing of non audio data set maintenance menu item M37 AUDIO CONFIG gt M372 NON AUDIO INPUT to data When you insert non audio into a clip the channels containing the non audio are treated as non audio across th
320. s a trademark of Dolby Laboratories Non drop frame mode A mode of advancing timecode which ignores the difference in frame values between real time and the timecode Using this mode produces a difference of approximately 86 seconds per day between real time and timecode which causes problems when editing programs in units of seconds using the number of frames as a reference Proxy AV data Low resolution data with a video bandwidth of 1 5 Mbps and an audio bandwidth of 64 kbps per channel This unit records proxy AV data automatically whenever high resolution MPEG HD data is recorded Reference video signal A video signal that contains a sync signal or sync and burst signals used as a reference for synchronization of video equipment SDSDI signal SD Serial Digital Interface An interface standardized as SMPTE 259M which enables the transmission of an uncompressed digital component stream S N Signal to Noise ratio The relation of the strength of the desired signal to the accompanying electronic interference the noise If S N is high sounds are reproduced with less noise and pictures are reproduced clearly without snow Sub clip One of the sections which make up a clip list A sub clip may be part of a clip or an entire clip Thumbnail image A reduced still picture of video for display on a GUI screen XDCAM creates thumbnail images from proxy video and displays them as index pictures on GUI screens
321. s button 1 When setup menu item 153 FIND MODE is set to clip amp rec start mark this button jumps to the frame where the previous Rec Start essence mark is set and displays the video of that frame PLAY button To start playback press this button turning it on When pressed during recording stops recording and enters stop mode If you do not want to stop recording when this button is pressed set setup menu item 145 MODE KEY ENABLE DURING RECORDING to stop Q NEXT button Press this button turning it on to jump to the next clip and show the first frame This button is also used together with other buttons for the following operations Forward direction high speed search Hold down the PLAY button and press this button A high speed search in the forward direction is carried out Displaying the last frame of the last clip Hold down the SHIFT button and press this button Front Panel Sud Jo suonounJ pue seweN z Jeideu 19 Sued Jo suonounJ pue sewen z Jejdeup 20 1 When setup menu item 153 FIND MODE is set to clip amp rec start mark this button jumps to the frame where the next Rec Start essence mark is set and displays the video of that frame STOP button To stop recording or playback press this button turning it on The frame at the stop point appears The unit enters standby off mode when you press this button with the SHIFT button held down It returns from standby off mode
322. s directory contains individual files recorded on the disc To display the PROAV directory set maintenance menu item M33 FILE I F CONFIG gt PROAV DISPLAY to ENABLE Assigning user defined clip titles By default clips on each disc are assigned names in the range C0001 MXF to C9999 MXF For this reason two discs can contain clips with the same names The automatic title generation function allows you to assign titles to all of the clips on several discs which facilitates clip management For example if the titles TITLE00001 to TITLE00020 are assigned to clips CO001 MXF to C0020 MXF on disc 1 then the titles TTTLEO0021 to TITLE00037 are assigned to clips CO001 MXF to C0017 MXF on disc 2 mrmr Eo0002 TITLE00001 2 Clips recorded on Disc 2 f TITLE00020 L TITLE00037 Proceed as follows to specify a title and assign it to recorded clips 1 Press the MENU button 2 Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select setup 3 menu item 035 and press the knob Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to select on and press the knob The clip title naming screen appears RETURN SELECT ITEM 035 CLIP TITLE NAMING SELECT disable TITLE 00001 PREFIX NUMERIC Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to move the asterisk on the left of the menu items to TITLE and press the knob The asterisk indicates the selected item Turn the PUSH SET S SEL k
323. s far unit bytes Input example STAT Clip C0001 MXF ABOR Requests this unit to abort a file transfer currently in progress Command syntax ABOR lt CRLF gt SYST Displays the system name of this unit Command syntax SYST lt CRLF gt HELP Displays a list of the commands supported by this unit or an explanation of the specified command Command syntax HELP SP lt command name gt lt CRLF gt The following data is transferred depending on whether a command name is specified with lt command name gt Command name specified Explanation of the specified command No specification Command list Input example HELP RETR NOOP Does nothing except return a response Used to check whether this unit is running Command syntax NOOP lt CRLF gt PWD Displays the current directory if the directory is the root directory Command syntax PWD lt CRLF gt CWD Changes the current directory moves from the current directory to another directory Command syntax CWD SP path name lt CRLF gt Moves to a directory as follows depending on whether a directory is specified with lt path name gt Directory specified To the specified directory No specification To the root directory Input example CWD General CDUP Moves one level up in the directory structure makes the parent of the current directory be the current directory Command syntax CDUP lt CRLF gt MKD Crea
324. s resettable This can be used as a guide in determining when to replace the spindle motor H15 LOADING COUNTER mode resettable Display the total number of times disc has been loaded in the unit The count is resettable H17 SEEK RUNNING HOURS 1 mode resettable Same as H13 Of the two optical heads this shows the cumulative seek operation time for the other optical head in units of hours The count is resettable To display the digital hours meter Press the MENU button to display the setup menu then turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to display the required item in the time data display area and on the monitor connected to the unit To exit from the digital hours meter Press the RETURN function button F1 to return to the setup menu Press the EXIT function button F5 to return to the screen that was displayed before you entered the setup menu Periodic Maintenance xipueddy 157 xipueddy 158 Troubleshooting Alarms An alarm warning message appears in the time data display area when an operation is attempted which is inappropriate for the settings on this unit or the state of the disc Both the alarm message and the action to take to resolve the problem appear in the monitor video section and on the screen of the external video monitor connected to the unit When the unit is powered on REMOTE Example alarm in time data display area ALARM REMOTE MODE IS SELECTED SE
325. s with the timecode of the last frame of the last clip on the disc To record continuous timecode set TCG on page P5 TC of the function menu to INT and set PRST RGN to TC Then proceed as follows Continuous timecode cannot be recorded if PRST RGN on page P5 TC of the function menu is set to VITC See Extended menu operations page 143 for more information FAM connection Write clip files to the unit from the computer or other device that is connected to this unit FTP connection Use the STOR command to transfer clip files from the computer that is connected to this unit If you issue the SITE UMMD command immediately before the STOR command the original timecode of the transferred file is recorded regardless of the setting of TCG on page P5 TC of the function menu Recording Continuous Timecode with FAM and FTP Connections suoneiedo aji4 9 1e1deu 119 snus Z Ja deup 120 Menus Menu System Configuration The settings for this unit use the following menus Setup menu The setup menu system of this unit comprises the basic setup menu and extended setup menu Maintenance menu This provides audio control and network and setup menu settings and also shows version information For details see Maintenance Menu page 145 Function menu For details see Basic Operations of the Function Menu page 44 Disc Menu For details see Disc Operation
326. sc image is displayed in stop mode menu item 108 AUTO EE SELECT is off The Y add function is a circuit operation to interpolate the video signal vertically during jog or variable speed playback for the purpose of reducing the vertical movement of the playback picture 710 INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATOR Select the test signal to be output from the internal test signal generator When V INPUT on the P1 VIDEO page of the function menu is set to SG the internal test signal generator operates to output the selected test signal This signal can also be recorded CB75 75 Color Bars 75 color bar signal CB100 100 Color Bars 100 color bar signal MLTBS Multi Burst Multi burst signal 10STEP 10 steps 10 step signal PLSBR Pulse and Bar Pulse and bar signal RAMP Ramp Ramp signal BLACK Black Black signal ARIB CB ARIB Color Bars ARIB color bar signal modify width 10096 ARIB CB cannot be specified when SD recording is selected If ARIB CB is selected the selection is changed to CB75 75 Color Bars Setup Menu Menu items in the 700s relating to video control Item number Item name Settings 713 VIDEO SETUP REFERENCE P Set the video setup amount to be added to the composite output signal in 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode only Sub item OUTPUT In 59 94i 59 94P Add the setup level selected by this item to the o
327. sion may be limited to 21 characters General directory The following directory operations are possible in the UserData directory Directory creation up to 62 levels including the UserData directory Deletion and renaming of directories File name Content Operations Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete Any file Yes Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes a UTF 8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length Depending on the character type file names including extension may be limited to 21 characters Overview The following directory operations are possible in the General directory Directory creation up to 63 levels including the General directory Deletion and renaming of directories The maximum number of files that can be created on a disc is 5 000 for single layer discs and 6 000 for dual layer discs both including directories File names and directory names can use letters numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2 0 UTF 8 character set However the following control characters and symbols D cannot be used Control characters U 0000 to U 001F U 007F Symbols lt gt 1 The following character codes cannot be used by FAM connections U 010000 U 020000 U 030000 U 040000 U 050000 U 060000 U 070000 U 080000 U 090000 U 0A0000 U 0B0000 U 0C0000 U 0D0000 U 0E0000 U 0F0000 U 100000 PROAV directory Thi
328. splayed in the video monitor screenr Typhoon 00001 Typhoon 00002 The actually recorded clip names Typhoon Strikes Tokyo 00001 Typhoon Strikes Tokyo 00002 p 1 When display of the ASCH format clip name has been selected see page 93 The serial numbers return to 00001 on the next recording operation if you reach number 99999 Serial numbers are not reset when you power the unit off or exchange discs newly generated numbers are continuous on the old ones If the ASCII format clip name string is longer than 14 characters it is displayed in the viewfinder as the first 7 characters Bl abbreviated the last 5 characters for a total of 13 characters You can change the serial numbers by using Settings gt Planning Clip Name Suffix in the Disc Menu see page 71 Setting essence mark names by using planning metadata You can use planning metadata to specify user defined names for the Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark9 essence marks that correspond to the 0 to 9 keys on a USB keyboard When planning metadata that contains user defined essence mark name strings is loaded into this unit s memory the unit displays those names for the essence marks that correspond to the keys and that are recorded when the keys are pressed See page 51 for more information about recording essence marks and see page 152 for more information about how to load files Essence mark name string format Use a text editor to enter essen
329. ssian Russia e Je EE SETS ER EE dej my EE Tab Q IW E IR IT Y WU l O P Enter Delete End Page 7 8 19 AL nu yji KIL ell HL ril ud uj sft xU bi eee End I Down Homel j PgUp n Caps Lock D S D IF e H IJ IK JL E uml7 4 5 lle e Bj Bil all nil Pil ol nij AIL OW 91V gt shit IZ IK Ic V B JIN IM gt I J shit 4 1 l 3 AJ al yll cll ML nll TIL bll BIL to l End j JIROn Ctrl Alt Alt Gr Ctr 0 i 4 gt Ins Del Spanish Spain a 7 I H amp Re Blog e Jit ila ella al ls je lly Is I li lk inset rico Bag Num Tb JQ W E IR JT ify IU Jf No IP l IF Enter sul pin AY 7 8 9 gt Ue db upr jj FN P g inicio 4 ReP g E Bloq A ls D IF JIG lH JJ IK IL JIN 4 5 le May s es Shit gt Z IK Ic V B IN IM I _ Shit 4 1 2 Is a l lt Fin HAV P g T Control Alt Alt Gr Control 0 Y ct Ins Supr When the area of use is set to UC and the font setting is Korean The keyboard is fixed as the Korean keyboard and you can enter Hangul characters The keyboard language cannot be changed List of Supported USB Keyboards xipueddy 181
330. ssigned 4 Undefined 111 111 unassigned 5 Undefined Setup Menu snue wN Z Je deuj 133 snue wN Z Jejdeuj 134 Menu items in the 600s relating to the timecode metadata and UMID Item number 610 Item name REGEN CONTROL MODE P Settings Select whether or not the time code is automatically regenerated auto assem amp insert edit In automatic editing carried out in either assemble mode or insert mode with this unit as the recorder regardless of the settings of F1 TCG and F2 PRST RGN in function menu page 5 the time code generator regenerates according to the time code on the disc auto assemble edit In automatic editing carried out in assemble mode with this unit as the recorder regardless of the settings of F1 TCG and F2 PRST RGN in function menu page 5 the time code generator regenerates according to the time code on the disc manual Regardless of whether this unit is the recorder or player the time code generator operates in accordance with the settings of F1 TCG and F2 PRST RGN in function menu page 5 assemble amp insert Whether local or remote and regardless of the settings of F1 TCG and F2 PRST RGN in function menu page 5 the time code generator regenerates according to the time code played back from the disc 611 TC OUTPUT PHASE IN EE MODE Select the timecode output mode for output from the TIME CODE OUT connector in E E mode thru through O
331. superimposed text using setup menu items 002 003 005 009 011 and 012 For details see Items in the basic menu page 121 Information displayed Type of time data Timecode reader drop frame mark for 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode only Timecode generator drop frame mark for 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P mode only Time data VITC field mark 0 01 0 41 14 7 0 7 9 Playback condition mark Disc exchange cache Operation mode IR The display shown above corresponds to the factory default settings of the unit You can change the type of information to be displayed in the lower line of the display by changing the setting of setup menu item 005 DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT For details see Items in the basic menu page 121 41 Superimposed Text Information suonejedejgd e je deu Q Type of time data suonejedejg e Ja deyo 42 Display Operation mode Display Meaning BlockA BlockB CNT Counter data C STANDBY OFF Standby off mode 9 TCR TC reader timecode STOP Stop mode UBR TC reader user bits data C STOP Stop mode 9 zem VITO reader timecode NEXT xxx Cuing up to the first frame of the UBR VITC reader user bits data next clip TCG TC generator timecode PREV xxx Cuing up to the first frame of the UBG TC generator user bits data current clip I
332. t is also possible to make a setting to Front Panel seq Jo suonoun J pue seweN zsaideyo 17 Sued Jo suonounJ pue sewen z Jeideuo 18 enable shuttle mode directly by turning the dial set setup menu item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE to dial 1 Maximum speed is about 50 times normal speed However the maximum speed may vary depending on the state of the clip and the playback position on the disc When setup menu item 101 SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE is set to dial after using the shuttle dial return it to the center position If the shuttle dial is not in the center position it is possible occasionally for vibration from other operations to activate the dial and start playback in shuttle mode 4 Display menu control section Q RESET RETURN button MENU button Q PUSH SET S SEL knob Function buttons F1 to F6 Display PUSH SET S SEL C mese _ TCG SET 2 NTC oH RETURN 59 94i HD422 1080 SOMbes BCH 228 T T essai E UTC EN PEET T PRESET R RUN REM 020m 2 34 47 127 SUB CUP DISC MENU SUB CLIP DISC MENU button and indicator D THUMBNAIL button and indicator DISPLAY button SHIFT button PAGE HOME button EXPAND button CHAPTER button Function buttons F1 to F6 These buttons are enabled when the function menu see page 44 is visible Eac
333. t s XDCAM web pages 1 Connect this unit and a computer to a network see page 150 2 Start the browser on the computer and enter http IP address of this unit in the address bar of the browser and then press the Enter key For example if the IP address of this unit is 192 168 001 010 enter http 192 168 1 10 If the connection succeeds you will be prompted to enter a user name and a password 3 Enter your user name and password and then press the Enter key The user name and password are set to the following when the unit is shipped from the factory User name admin e Password Model name pdw f1600 or pdw hd1500 Disc Operations After the user name and password are verified an XDCAM web page appears To display disc and clip properties 1 Insert a disc into this unit and put this unit into the following state Recording playback search and other disc operations Stopped THUMBNAIL button Off Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips Format Disc and so on in the Disc Menu Stopped FAM or FTP connection for file operations Disconnected or logged out Connections between this unit and a computer by the Live Logging function Disconnected Setting of setup menu item 258 LIVE LOGGING Values other than live view mode off or live mode 2 Display the XDCAM web pages in the browser of your computer see the previous section To display disc
334. ted for 18 Mbps Support for multiple frame frequencies This unit can record and play multiple frame frequencies at both 1080 59 941 501 29 97P 25P and 23 98P and 720 59 94P and 50P for MPEG HD422 It can also perform pulldown playback of discs recorded at 23 98P D HD1500 When the PDBK S1500 option is installed Support for mixed format recording mode As long as the frame frequency group is the same clips in different recording formats can be recorded or written to the same disc The system frequencies supported by this unit are divided into frame frequency groups as shown in the following table 1 The recording format is regarded as different whenever the system frequency video resolution video codec bit rate or number of audio channels or number of bits does not match Frame frequency group System frequency 59 94Hz 59 94P 59 94i 29 97P 50Hz 50P 50i 25P 23 98Hz 23 98P You can record clips with different recording formats for example HD422 and HD420SP clips by putting this unit into mixed format recording mode Continuous playback may not be possible at the transition point between two clips with different recording formats Linear editing Using this unit as the recorder you can perform insert and assemble editing of recorded clips P iHD1500 When the PDBZ UPG02 Software Upgrade Key is installed you can perform timecod
335. ter the unit creates a new clip and performs normal recording Compared to linear editing on VTRs a longer time is required for processing at the end of an edit from 4 to 5 seconds are required for completion of the edit after passing the Out point When an insert edit finishes Do one of the following Wait until the unit enters standby off mode the time until the unit enters standby off mode depends on the setting of setup menu item 501 STILL TIMER Eject the disc File system information is written to the disc If you turn the unit s primary power off before doing one of the above file system information is not recorded to the disc As a result no additional edits can be made on the edited clip and the audio is set to non audio Essence marks recorded by clip editing CUT is recorded as an essence mark at the IN and OUT points of video insert editing and at the IN point of assemble editing By selecting CUT in the essence mark selection screen you can search the result of editing For details of searching using essence marks see page 75 Preread editing Video and digital audio signals already recorded on the disc can be used as an edit source for insert editing This type of editing is called preread editing The signals read out can be send to a mixer for mixing and can be recorded either on the original channels or on other digital audio channels For preread editing set PREREAD on page
336. tes a new directory Directories can be created only in the General directory For details see File operation restrictions page 104 Command syntax MKD SP lt path name gt lt CRLF gt RMD Deletes a directory Directories can be deleted only in the General directory For details see File operation restrictions page 104 Command syntax RMD SP path name lt CRLF gt MDTM Acquires the date and time of the most recent modification of the file in the format YY Y YMMDDhhmmss YYYY year MM month DD day hh hour mm minute ss second The date and time cannot be acquired in the following cases e When the path name includes a wildcard replaced by any string of characters or replaced by any single character When the size of the path name is greater than 1023 bytes Command syntax MDTM SP lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Input example MDTM PROAV DISCMETA XML Extended commands In the Command syntax SP means a space entered by pressing the space bar and lt CRLF gt means a new line entered by pressing the Enter key SITE REPF Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to the remote computer This command allows you to specify a segment in the body of the MXF file composed of video and audio data for transfer of the required segment only A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified This command cannot be used when the path name
337. th the scene selection function To create a clip list you always need to carry out the steps inside the heavy lines Other steps can be carried out as required 1 Add sub clips Use the Add Sub Clips command to add the clips you want to use to a clip list You can add up to 300 sub clips to one clip list This operation can be carried out in the following thumbnail screens Clip thumbnail screen Expand thumbnail screen Chapter thumbnail screen Clip list thumbnail screen 2 Change the sub clip order Use the Move Sub Clips command to change the order of sub clips in a clip list Delete sub clips Use the Delete Sub Clips command to delete specified sub clips from a clip list Trim sub clips Use the Trim Sub Clip command to adjust the In and Out points of a sub clip This function can also be used to adjust the overall duration of the clip list Set the start timecode Use the Set Start Time Code command to set the timecode at the start of a clip list 3 Play the clip list Use the PLAY button and other playback controls to play the current clip list and check its contents Save the clip list Use the Save Clip List or Save Clip List as command to save the newly created clip list to the disc To reedit clip lists on the disc Use the Load Clip List command to load the clip lists you want to edit and perform the steps 2 to 4 in the previous section You can also delete clip lists on the d
338. th thumbnails c sicsisisesssesvavascesesecsenstavensaaedadeceenteceaaters 74 Playing th scene you have found essere oreet soe enero ees 76 Selecting clips by type Filter Clips function essss 76 Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails 78 Changing Clip index pictures cj uns aus cae eaves none ae aes 78 6 Table of Contents Checking clip properties ined edocet oN Messe dete aon RR 79 MULTE CH FLAGS codo doce ti see ssepe aste hae pend a E 8l Locking write protecting CH psu e acta odia e a re OR Ee or bres 82 Dele ngellpssSsto tust bp utate Peto E uu edu ulis 82 Scene Selection Clip List Editing 84 What 1s scetie se lec HOD tsesen e p dte pir edid eo ee 84 Creating and editing clip sts e one ptr pota onte Eb e epe iste ie nein 85 Mariagino CI p sts 5 says soto rude ast iet a e USQUE RES AR RARE 89 Disc Operations mae nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnen 91 Checking disc properties sus Neu Heer na a s 91 Using planning metadata 54e Saas cc ccasd esse p tea En tacdgesnctetiecs sacs 91 Checking user defined essence marks eeecceeeseceesteceeneceetaeeneeees 93 Formatting CSCS ian ea e a a a E E SS 93 Displaying disc and clip properties in a web browser 94 Transferring Clips Direct FTP Function 96 Preparations for clip transfers ues sass tone rer Voter ihe
339. the POWER switch on the rear panel or disconnect the power cord This could lead to a loss of data from the disc Q Remote control switch Different positions of the switch allow different operations as follows NET Enables access to the network The indicator lights when an external network device is being accessed In this state operation from the front panel is not possible LOCAL Enables operation from the front panel REMOTE Enables remote control of this unit from the following devices Devices connected to the REMOTE 9P connector on the rear panel Devices connected to the SD HDSDI INPUT connector with SDI remote control functions Devices connected to the amp i LINK S400 connector Use setup menu item 214 REMOTE INTERFACE to select which of the connectors is used for remote control see page 130 See Setup Menu on page 120 for more information about how to make extended menu settings KEY INHI switch This turns key operation inhibit mode on or off Use setup menu item 118 KEY INHIBIT SWITCH EFFECTIVE AREA to specify the keys to inhibit Q PHONES jack The jack is a standard stereo jack Connect stereo headphones to monitor the audio during recording playback and editing Non audio signals are muted The monitored channel is selected with MONITR L and MONITR R on page P2 AUDIO of the function menu see page 45 Q LEVEL volume adjustment knob Adjust the volume of headphones or speakers
340. the factory defaults HOME page Item Setting F1 CHAR SEL Turns the display of character information on the color LCD and on an external monitor on and off ON Character information on OFF Character information off LCD Character information on for the color LCD only F2 PB EE Selects the type of video and audio signals to output during fast forward fast reverse stop and standby PB Playback signal EE E E signal F3 REC INH Specifies whether to inhibit recording to the disc OFF Do not inhibit recording ON Inhibit recording to the disc Item F4 CNTR SEL Setting Selects the type of time data to display in the time data display area TC Timecode COUNTER Elapsed recording or playback time UB User bits F5 TCG SET When CNTR SEL is set to TC displays a screen where you can set the initial value of the timecode generated by the internal timecode generator see page 39 When CNTR SEL is set to UB displays a screen where you can set timecode user bits 9 see page 40 Item F5 HUE CHRM PHS Setting Sets the hue chroma phase PRESET Set the hue chroma phase to a preset value regardless of manual setting Manual setting While the setting value is flashing turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to adjust the hue chroma phase over the range 30 F6 Unassigned function button a This is displayed only
341. the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the SELECT function button F2 This displays the setting screen 2 for the menu item selected in step 1 Example Setting screen display when item 005 DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT is selected ITEM 005 DISPLAY INFORMATION SELECT time data amp CNT Current setting 3 Use the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the function button F3 or F4 to change the setting Setup Menu Turning the PUSH SET S SEL knob while holding down the SHIFT button increases the increment of adjustment 4 To change other settings press the PUSH SET S SEL knob or the SELECT function button F2 to return to the previous screen then repeat steps 1 to 3 D When you have completed the settings press the SAVE function button F5 The message NOW SAVING appears on the video monitor display and Saving appears in the time data display area while the new settings are saved in memory When the saving operation is completed the video monitor display and the time data display area return to their normal indications If you power off the unit before a save operation is completed settings may be lost Wait until the save is completed before powering off the unit If instead of pressing the SAVE function button F5 you press the MENU button the new settings are not saved The message ABORT appears on the video monitor display and Abort in the time data display area for about 0
342. the desired insert editing mode carry out preread editing When preread editing is completed disconnect the connections Set PREREAD on page P7 OTHER of the function menu to OFF Check that no loop connection exists Playback Playback This section describes playback of video and audio on the unit Before starting playback make the following settings and adjustments Selection of time data to display Select with CNTR SEL on HOME page of the function menu Selection of audio channels to monitor Select with MONITR L and MONITR R on page P2 AUDIO of the function menu Volume adjustment of the monitor audio Adjust with the LEVEL knob Remote local setting Set the remote control switch If you set it to REMOTE also set setup menu item 214 REMOTE INTERFACE RM and the connector used appear on the display see page 130 Clip playback modes You can set the clip playback mode to either of the following Continuous playback mode The playback target is all of the clips on the disc factory default setting Single clip playback mode The playback target is the currently selected clip only To select single clip playback mode Set setup menu item 154 SINGLE CLIP PLAY MODE to ee on Playback in single clip playback mode Playback stops when it reaches the start or end of the clip The next and preceding clips are not played even if they exist on the disc The available playback types include
343. the first or last item With the SHIFT button held down press the MARK1 or V MARK2 button to move to the previous or next page To select multiple thumbnails Do one of the following Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob with the SHIFT button held down With the SHIFT button held down press the IN or OUT button To return to the previous screen Press the RESET RETURN button To move from a menu level to the next lower or higher menu level For a menu item displayed together with lt or you can move to the next lower or higher menu level by pressing the IN or OUT button To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a lt 4 or gt mark is displayed for an item you can press the IN or OUT button to scroll the display by one character for each press The 4 MARK1 and V MARK2 buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view To increment and decrement numbers Do one of the following Press the MARK1 or V MARK2 button Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob Turn the jog dial To confirm selections Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob Thumbnail Operations You can use thumbnail screens to display clip information and to find protect and delete clips The thumbnails provide visual confirmation of these and other operations Selecting thumbnails The thumbnail selection frame see page 67 indicates the currently selected thumbnail To move the thumbnail selection fram
344. tice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Part 2 Networks Associates Technology Inc copyright notice BSD Trademarks and Licenses xipueddy 183 xipueddy 184 Copyright c 2001 2003 Networks Associates Technology Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials
345. tion Lock or Delete All Filtered Clips gt Lock All Filtered Lock all of the filtered clips Clips Thumbnail Operations SU9BINS MD ul suonejedo g Ja deyD 77 SU99J9S IMD ui suonejedQ s Jaydeyo 78 Item name Function Lock or Delete All Filtered Clips gt Unlock All Filtered Clips Unlock all of the filtered clips Lock or Delete All Filtered Clips gt Delete All Filtered Clips Delete all of the filtered clips Narrow down the filtering results Filter Clips Narrowing Copy to Clip List Copy all of the filtered clips to a new clip list Upload Clips via Direct Transfer all of the filtered clips FTP to an external device via a network To display clip filtering conditions as Title2 titles For clip lists created with the Copy to Clip List command you can display the clip filtering conditions as Title2 titles When Settings gt Display Title in the Disc Menu is set to On Title2 title2 the clip filtering conditions are displayed automatically in screens such as the Load Clip List screen Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails You can select the information to be displayed at the bottom of the thumbnails in thumbnail screens See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail screen 2 Select Clip Information A window appears in which you can select the
346. tion of some of the peripherals and related devices described in this chapter has been discontinued For advice about choosing devices please contact your Sony dealer or a Sony sales representative Connections for using the supplied application software For an overview and installation of the application software see the PDF file on the supplied CD ROM For information about how to use the software refer to the Help provided in the software Using the network connector FTP connection The following shows an example of an FTP File Transfer Protocol connection The PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 IP address and other network related settings are required for connection For details of the network related settings see To change network settings page 150 Connecting this unit directly to a laptop computer PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 this unit Laptop computer To network connector Network cable not supplied Connecting three PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 units to a laptop computer via a LAN PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 oll Ilo 0 08 so oos PEN Laptop computer Se
347. tion point between two clips with different recording formats exists in the preroll segment that segment cannot be edited Recording Frame frequency groups The system frequencies supported by this unit are divided into frame frequency groups as shown in the following table Frame frequency group System frequency 59 94 Hz 59 94P 59 94i 29 97P 50 Hz 50P 50i 25P 23 98 Hz 23 98P You can record clips with different recording formats for example HD422 and HD420SP clips by putting this unit into mixed format recording mode To enable mixed format recording mode Set maintenance menu item M390 MIXED REC to ENABLE see page 146 If you want to disable mixing of clips with different recording formats leave this item set to DISABLE However regardless of the mixed format recording mode setting it is always possible to mix clips in the following format groups HD420 HQ SP and LP 1080 59 941 and 1080 29 97P 1080 50i and 1080 25P Preparations for recording Make the following settings and adjustments before starting to record Video input signal selection Select with V INPUT on page P1 VIDEO of the function menu Audio input signal selection Select with A1 INPUT and A2 INPUT on page P2 AUDIO from A3 INPUT to A8 INPUT on page P3 AUDIO of the function menu Timecode and user bits settings See Setting Timecode page 39 Selection of time data to display
348. tle2 clip titles Select one of the following languages fonts with the Disc Menu item Settings gt Select Font European Alphabet The keyboard language can be selected with the Disc Menu item Settings gt USB Keyboard Language see following section Korean The Korean keyboard is selected automatically You can enter Hangul characters if you have connected a Korean USB keyboard Simplified Chinese The keyboard layout is identical to that of the English United States keyboard Only ASCII characters can be entered Traditional Chinese The keyboard layout is identical to that of the English United States keyboard Only ASCII characters can be entered To change the keyboard language Select the desired language from the following values using Settings gt Select USB Keyboard Language in the Disc Menu English United Kingdom English United States French France German Germany e Italian Italy Polish Programmers Poland Russian Russia Spanish Spain See List of Supported USB Keyboards page 180 for the characters that can be input in each language The keyboard language cannot be changed in the following cases e When the area of use is set to J for Japan When the area of use is set to UC for regions outside Japan and the Disc Menu item Settings gt Select Font is set to Korean Simplified Chinese or Traditional Chinese The keyboard icon on the softwa
349. to the original state when you press this button again with the SHIFT button held down The lit or unlit status of the STOP button does not change This button flashes when setup menu item 105 REFERENCE SYSTEM ALARM is set to on and the correct reference video input signal as specified by OUT REF on page P6 REF of the function menu is not being input This unit can automatically enter standby off mode whenever a specified time elapses in disc stop mode For details see the description of setup menu item 501 STILL TIMER page 132 Q REC record button To start recording hold down this button and press the PLAY button The recording takes place on an unrecorded part of the disc To stop recording press the STOP button To monitor in E E mode You can press this button from stop mode to monitor input signals in E E mode The button lights when pressed Press the STOP button to return to the original video You can also press this button during playback and searches E E mode playback continues for as long as the button is held down To use the REC button as a remaining disc capacity alarm Make the following settings Function menu page P7 OTHER gt REC REMAIN ALARM enable Setup menu item 150 REC MODE disc exchange cache When the remaining disc capacity drops below two minutes the button begins to flash to prompt you to exchange the disc Q STANDBY indicator Lights when the unit is in standby mode ST
350. ton TE 9 YE eSt O o _a 0 SHIFT button SUB CLIP DISC MENU button RESET RETURN button Clip list thumbnail screen Clip List E0001 TC 00 00 00 00 C76 00 00 04 14 IR 00 00 12 04 zm HE 3 p TC 00 00 28 08 TC 00 00 35 15 TC 00 00 46 08 aee j p M 2l Wo TC 00 00 59 16 TC 00 01 06 18 TC 00 01 13 11 002 013 Ex TC 00 00 20 13 T TC 00 00 53 22 TC 00 01 17 27 DATE amp TIME 28 JUL 2006 19 55 00 01 31 16 Disc Menu Load Clip List Save Clip List Save Clip List as Delete Clip List Clear Clip List Load Planning Metadata Select Drive Planning Metadata Properties Clear Planning Metadata o or Delete All Clips Overview GUI screen operations access oF OUO a 0000 i lis O _a 0 8 E d Q PUSH SET S SEL knob IN OUT button MARK1 MARK2 button Q Jog and shuttle dials Q RESET RETURN button Q SHIFT button To select items Do one of the following to select thumbnails menu items timecode digits and other items Turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob Turn the jog or shuttle dial Press the MARK1 MARK2 IN or OUT button Press the PREV or NEXT button With the SHIFT button held down press the PREV or NEXT button to move to
351. torage Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct sunlight or in other places where the temperature or humidity is high Do not leave cartridges where dust may get inside Store cartridges in their cases Care of the discs Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using a soft dry cloth f condensation forms allow ample time to dry before use MODE KEY ENABLE DURING RECORDING to stop Write protecting discs To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental erasure move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of the disc in the direction of the arrow as shown in the following figure Lower surface of the disc Write Inhibit tab Slide in the direction of the arrow Write Inhibit tab settings SAVE gt SAVE gt Recording enabled Recording disabled You can also write protect individual clips For details see Locking write protecting clips page 82 Loading and unloading a disc When the on standby button and indicator are lit green you can load and unload a disc as shown in the following figure On standby button and indicator PN ak To unload Press the EJECT button To load Insert a disc face up The disc is drawn in When the EJECT button is pressed during recording recording stops and the disc is ejected If you do not want to eject the disc and stop recording when the EJECT button is pressed during recording set setup menu ite
352. tory specified A list of the file names only in the specified directory FTP File Operations suonejedo aji4 9 1e1deu 115 suoneJedo aji4 9 1e1deu 116 No specification A list of the file names only in the current directory The wildcard characters any string and any character may be used in lt path name gt Input example 1 NLST I Input example 2 NLST Clip MXF RETR Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on this unit to the current directory on the remote computer Command syntax RETR SP lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Input example RETR Clip C0001 MXF STOR Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on the remote computer to the current directory on this unit Depending on the type of file transferred the following files are created C MXF file C MO1 XML file metadata C MO2 KLV file user metadata C S01 MXF file proxy AV data E E01 SMI file E MO01 XML file metadata 1 0001 to 9999 2 0001 to 0099 For C MXF files the UMID of the copy source file is not saved However it is saved if an immediately preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been issued For C MXF files some data such as file header metadata may be missing Depending on the transfer destination directory and the file type transfer may not be possible For details see File operation restrictions page 104 Command syntax STOR
353. trol function This section explains the settings required for recording in HDSDI remote control mode and how the unit operates in this mode The unit camcorder that controls this unit must also support HDSDI remote output Settings Set setup menu item 214 REMOTE INTERFACE to SDI and set the remote control switch on the front panel to REMOTE This unit enters HDSDI remote control mode in which it is controlled by command packets received via the SD HDSDI INPUT connector The following limitations apply in HDSDI remote control mode Commands received via the REMOTE 9P connector are ignored Recording and playback operations on the front panel are disabled except for the EJECT button Monitor display in HDSDI remote control mode RM SDI appears in the remote interface display area see page 24 of the monitor This display lights if command packets are embedded into HDSDI signals and flashes if they are not However the RM SDI continues to flash until the time the controlling camcorder is powered on and the time that the REC button is pressed on the camcorder Recording operation When a recordable disc is inserted recording or stop is executed according to the REC or STOP command embedded into the HDSDI signals Recording stops automatically when the end of the disc is reached When HDSDI signals are interrupted during recording Recording stops if HDSDI signals are interrupted du
354. ttings on this unit Remote control switch NET see page 16 Setup menu item 257 NETWORK ENABLE net 0 08 ies oz O lt O n e all j Network cable LE iB not supplied 9 FEE 8 9 E oo2HEEE z zQ a To az network g connector S o a Settings on all PDW HD1500 Remote control switch NET see page 16 Setup menu item 257 NETWORK ENABLE net Using the amp i LINK S400 connector FAM connection The following shows an example of a FAM file access mode connection The FAM driver must be installed in advance See Preparations page 110 112 for more information about installing the FAM driver Some limitations apply to FAM connections For details see File Operations in File Access Mode for Windows page 110 PDW F1600 or PDW HD1500 this unit lloilo Laptop computer 308 ee oos o o8 ER 8885 o SECESE To 8400 connector i LINK cable not supplied Use of a shielded cable is recommended Connections and Settings 33 suonejedejg e jejdeuj 34 Connections for cut editing The following figure shows a cut editing system comprising this unit as a player When making the connections also refer to the manuals provided with the equipment to be connected See page 35 for more information about editing control unit settings HD video monitor To HDSDI input connector HDSDI OUTPUT 2 SUPER When using an editing co
355. tton In setup menu and GUI screens returns to the previous procedure Q SUB CLIP DISC MENU button and indicator When pressed alone functions as the SUB CLIP button When pressed together with the SHIFT button functions as the DISC MENU button SUB CLIP button Press the button lighting the indicator to carry out playback in clip list order see page 84 Jog and shuttle operations are supported during clip list playback To return to playback in recording order press the button again turning the indicator off If no clip list is registered this button does not light when pressed The operation is invalid DISC MENU button When pressed together with the SHIFT button displays the Disc Menu see page 91 Press the button again turning the indicator off to hide the Disc Menu See GUI screen operations page 72 for more information about how to use the thumbnail screens THUMBNAIL button and indicator To carry out a thumbnail search or create a clip list in the GUI screen press this button turning the indicator on Thumbnail images representing each clip or sub clip appear Press once more turning the indicator off to return to a whole screen display To display the thumbnails of essence mark frames frames with an essence mark attached hold down the SHIFT button and press this button The essence mark selection menu appears Select the desired type of essence mark and the corresponding essence mark frames appe
356. tton held down press the PUSH SET S SEL knob A sub clip with the range specified in steps 1 and 2 is added to the end of the clip list When you specify a range that spans several clips Sub clips are generated for each of the clips in the range To check the newly added sub clips You can check the newly added sub clips by displaying the clip list thumbnail screen 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 as required to add more sub clips D Save the clip list see page 89 To reorder sub clips When this unit is in single clip playback mode see page 75 only the selected sub clip can be played See page 72 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen select the thumbnails of the sub clips that you want to move multiple selections possible 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Move Sub Clips and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The Clip List Move screen appears Clip List Move 006 m 001 034 ll iem mm TC 00 04 06 00 TC 00 04 13 14 B FE 44 D TC 00 00 00 00 TC 00 00 21 27 t riti t IL TC 00 04 35 12 TC 00 04 57 10 TC 00 05 19 08 TC 00 05 41 05 LI o TC 00 06 46 27 TC 00 07 08 25 TOTAL DUR OLOMI ECR ESHS TC 00 06 03 03 TC 00 06 25 00 DATE amp TIME 08 AUG 2007 11 50 4 Move the I cursor to the point where you want to move the selected thumbnails D Press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The sub clips are moved to the I cursor posit
357. tware version is not properly updated Update the software version again If the same message appears after you update the software version contact your Sony service representative Troubleshooting When a disc is inserted Alarm message in time data display area Alarm message in video monitor screen Description action Unknown FS UNKNOWN FILE SYSTEM Format the disc or eject it see page 93 PLEASE FORMAT DISC OR EJECT No FS NO FILE SYSTEM PLEASE EJECT DISC Eject the disc ILL Disc IRREGULAR DISC IS USED Use a Professional Disc USE PROFESSIONAL DISC IRREGULAR DISC IS USED PLEASE EJECT DISC Salvage NG CLIP SALVAGE WAS NOT COMPLETED See Handling of discs when recording does not end Salvage XXXX DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED normally salvage functions page 54 FORMAT DISC OR CONTACT SERVICE TO RUN CLIP SALVAGE PROGRAM XXXX Over DUR EXCESSIVE DURATION IS IN DISC Data in excess of the rated capacity is recorded on RECORDING AND PLAYBACK IS NOT the disc POSSIBLE No Support FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED A disc in an unsupported recording format is loaded RECORDING AND PLAYBACK IS NOT Use a disc in a format supported by this unit POSSIBLE ILL Index INDEX FILE ERROR Format the disc or eject it see page 93 PLEASE FORMAT DISC OR EJECT Formatting AUTO FORMATTING IS EXECUTING Wait until the format has been completed and tr
358. u can select user defined essence marks see page 93 Select Essence Mark Rec Start ShotMarkO kick off turn over timeout Bow De SQ v 2 Select the essence mark that you want and then press the PUSH SET S SEL knob The essence mark thumbnail screen displays a list of frames where the selected essence mark is set To switch directly to the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen Before starting set setup menu item 153 FIND MODE to clip amp rec start mark By pressing the DISPLAY button with the clip thumbnail screen displayed you can switch directly to the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen As long as the setting of setup menu item 153 does not change the DISPLAY button switches between the clip thumbnail screen and the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen This setting allows you to use the DISPLAY button as a shortcut to Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen which is convenient for checking start points in clip recorded with the Clip Continuous Rec function Also when the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen is displayed each press of the THUMBNAIL button switches between that screen and the clip playback screen Resume function In the clip playback screen the PREV and NEXT buttons jump to the previous or next recording start points The DISPLAY button does not switch to the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen from the expand thumbnail screen or the chapte
359. ub clips in the clip list and the number of the selected sub clip Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 67 Clip list date and time Displays the date and time when the clip list was created or the date and time of its most recent modification An asterisk appears after the date and time of creation when the current clip list has not been saved to the disc New File appears when no clip list has been loaded into the unit s memory and when a clip list has been cleared from the unit s memory Overview Total duration Displays the total duration of all sub clips in the clip list Expand thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of equally sized divisions of the selected clip CB map TC 00 01 36 27 Expand Clip 008 024 x 12 mar TC 00 01 38 00 map TC 00 01 36 14 TC 00 01 38 08 TC 00 01 35 17 may Ls TC 00 01 37 11 TC 00 01 39 06 cup Tene TC 00 01 37 24 TC 00 01 38 19 TC 00 01 38 22 since TC00 01 40 02 TC 00 01 40 16 DUR 0 00 00 13 5 6 Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 67 Clip number total clips x number of divisions Displays the number of the selected clip the total number of clips on the disc and the number of times that the selected clip has been divided to display the expansion thumbnails Thumbnail number total thumbnails Displays the tot
360. urs This appears when the total duration of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 24 hours as the result of adding or trimming sub clips No More Sub Clips can be Added to the Clip List The upper limit of sub clips in the current clip list has been reached This appears when the upper limit of 300 clips in a clip list has been reached as the result of adding or trimming sub clips Sub Clip does not Exist There are no sub clips in the current clip list This appears when an attempt is made to move trim or delete sub clips or preset timecode Clip List does not Exist There are no clip lists on the disc This appears when an attempt is made to execute a Delete Clip List operation when there are no clip lists on the disc Move is Invalid The sub clip cannot be moved This appear when an attempt is made to execute a Move Sub Clips operation when there are no sub clip in the current clip list or when there is only one sub clip Chapter does not Exist The specified chapter has not been recorded This appears when an attempt is made to display a chapter when a chapter has not been recorded for that clip Some Essence Mark cannot be Deleted The essence mark cannot be deleted This appears when an attempt is made to delete an essence mark that cannot be deleted with a Delete Essence Mark operation Rec Start and Cut essence marks cannot be deleted Troubleshooting xipueddy 1
361. utput signal LEVEL 29 97P mode UC 0 0 7 5 In 59 94i 59 94P Add the setup level selected by this item to the output signal 29 97P mode J 0 096 7 5 715 VIDEO GAIN CONTROL Adjust the video output level 2048 to 0 to 848 716 CHROMA GAIN CONTROL Adjust the chroma output level 2048 to 0 to 848 717 CHROMA PHASE CONTROL Adjust the chroma phase 128 to 0 to 127 718 SETUP LEVEL 59 94i 59 94P Adjust the setup level black level 29 97P 23 98P mode BLACK 272 to 0 to 272 LEVEL 50i 50P 25P mode P 719 SYSTEM PHASE SYNC Adjust the output signal sync phase 128 to 0 to 127 720 SYSTEM PHASE SC Adjust the output signal subcarrier phase 0 to 511 723 INPUT VIDEO BLANK 9 Switch blanking on or off for lines in the vertical blanking interval of input video signals Lines can be specified individually Y C signals and odd Sub Item even fields are blanked simultaneously Blanking in recorded signals is carried out according to these settings 1 ALL LINE Specify the blanking for each line separately bink blank Regardless of the settings of other sub items blank all lines which can be specified in this menu item thru throu Regardless of the settings of other sub items switch blanking off for all lines which can be specified in this menu item 2 10 LINE 12 In 59 94i 59 94P Specify blanking for lines 12 to 20 me 29 97P mode bink blank Switch blanking on LINE 20 thru throu Switch blanking off 2 15 LI
362. utput the timecode input to the TIME CODE IN connector as it is v in video input phase Output the timecode with the same phase as the input video signal phase v out video output phase Output the timecode with the same phase as the output video signal phase 612 TC OUTPUT MUTING IN SEARCH MODE Select whether to suppress the output from the TIME CODE OUT connector in jog shuttle mode on Suppress off Do not suppress 618 UPCONV EMBEDDED VITC 9 Select the source of the VITC embedded into output HDSDI when up converting during playback of SD discs VITC Select the VITC of the SD disc LTC Select the LTC of the SD disc 619 VITC 9 Select whether to record the VITC generated by the internal timecode generator during IMX recording off Do not record the internally generated VITC on Record the internally generated VITC Even if this item is set to off VITC is recorded if the input video signal contains VITC and the VITC line is set to thru in menu item 723 651 UMID SDI OUTPUT Select whether to output UMID in the VANC of the SDI output off Do not output on Output See Using UMID Data page 172 for more information about UMID 652 UMID SD VANC LINE 9 Select the line in which UMID is output when menu item 651 is set to on 12 H 12 line 13 H 13 line 15 H 15 line 16 H 16 line 17 H 17 line 18 H 18 line 19 H 19 line 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P
363. utton F5 The DATE TIME PRESET screen appears In the DATE TIME PRESET screen set the current date and time by setting the following items RETURN DATE TIME PRESET EN YEAR MONTH Ri i TIME EE TIME ZONE UTC 00 00 INC DEC CTRL KNOB SHIFT 3 KEY es CANCEL amp PREU F1 RET SET amp NEXT F5 SET INIT YEAR Year MONTH Month DAY Day TIME Time TIME ZONE Time zone as a difference in hours with respect to Coordinated Universal Time UTC In the setting screen you can change the value of the flashing digit 6 Press the IN or OUT button to make the previous digit or next digit start flashing Press the MARK1 or V MARK2 button or turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to increment or decrement the value of the flashing digit When you have finished making settings press the SET function button F5 The date time and time zone settings are saved and the message NOW SAVING appears If you want to save the settings made up to this point press the SET function button F5 again RETURN INITIAL SETUP Push FS SAVE Key INIT CANCEL amp PREV SAVE amp REBOOT F1 RET FS SET The message NOW SAVING appears again and the setting screen disappears Then the unit powers itself off and on again To return to the original screen without saving settings Press the RETURN function button F1 The time zone is reset to the factory default when you execute the m
364. when TCG on page P5 TC of the function menu is set to INT and PRST RGN is set to PRESET P1 VIDEO page F6 SETUP BLACK Sets the HD SD output black setup level or black level PRESET Set the level to the preset value regardless of the manual setting Manual setting While the setting value is flashing turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to set the black setup level in 59 94i 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P mode over the range x30 IRE or the black level in 50i 50P 25P mode over the range 210 mV Item F1 V INPUT Setting Selects the video input signal HDSDI HDSDI signal SDSDI SDSDI signal i LINK i LINK signal when the PDBK 201 option board is installed SG Test signal from internal signal generator Normally this item is not displayed It appears when you hold the button down for 3 seconds P2 AUDIO page F2 VID PROC Selects the method used to control the internal video signal processor and make related settings LOCAL Use the function menu to change settings MENU Use the setup menu to change settings F3 VIDEO Sets the output level for HD SD video signals range e to 3 dB PRESET Set the video signal output level to a preset value regardless of manual setting Manual setting While the setting value is flashing turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob to adjust the video signal output level Item F1 A1 INPUT Setting Selects the audio input sig
365. xpand 007 235 1 a i FI DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 An NE NE K DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 AB NB ME K LY N N DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 cup Seashore pur 0 00 00 01 1 Expand thumbnail screen To select multiple thumbnails Move the selection frame to the first thumbnail that you want to select Then with the SHIFT button held down turn the PUSH SET S SEL knob To cancel the multiple selection move the selection frame without the SHIFT button held down Clip Navigating sibling relati 018 036 a ee TC 00 29 19 23 TC 00 29 38 25 XE L TC 00 30 40 13 TC 01 01 28 25 TC 00 25 42 08 DUR 0 23 22 26 TC 00 24 34 27 TC 00 24 46 22 TC 00 25 49 07 DATE amp TIME 30 NOV 2005 14 14 Searching with thumbnails By using the thumbnails that appear in the various thumbnail screens you can easily cue up and play clips and sub clips Using thumbnails to find clips The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails of all clips recorded on the disc You can use this screen to cue up the selected clip and to carry out playback see page 76 See Selecting thumbnails page 73 for more information Using the expand function to find scenes The expand function allows you to divide a selected clip into equally sized blocks and to display thumbnails of the Thumbnail Operations first frame in each block
366. y again FORMAT NG AUTO FORMATTING WAS NOT Eject the disc and insert it again or insert another COMPLETED disc DI read err CANNOT READ DISC INFORMATION PLEASE EJECT DISC Read err DRV ADJ err CANNOT PERFORM AUTO DRIVE ADJUSTMENT N A Disc CANNOT EDIT AV MATERIAL Insert a disc that can be edited by linear editing or CHECK REC FORMAT IN DISC delete the N A clips Mixed REC DISC CANNOT BE EDITED Insert a disc that can be edited by linear editing MIXED AUDIO VIDEO MODE ON DISC List Exists DISC CANNOT BE EDITED Insert a disc that can be edited by linear editing or DELETE ALL CLIP LIST BEFORE delete all the clip lists BEGINNING DESTRUCTIVE EDITING 100GB Disc IRREGULAR DISC IS USED Triple layer discs are not supported USE 23GB OR 50GB DISC Use a single layer or dual layer disc LM 128GB Disc IRREGULAR DISC IS USED Quadruple layer discs are not supported USE 23GB OR 50GB DISC Use a single layer or dual layer disc Z U1 U2 Disc CURRENT VERSION OF THE Recording to this disc is not possible 3 SOFTWARE SETS THE DISC WRITE Perform salvaging using the PDW U1 or PDW U2 2 PROTECTED PLEASE EJECT AND SALVAGE USING THE PDW U1 U2 1550 Disc CURRENT VERSION OF THE Recording to this disc is not possible SOFTWARE SETS THE DISC WRITE Discs recorded using the PDW HD1550 can be PROTECTED salvaged using the PDW HD1550 PLEASE EJECT AND SALVAGE USING Recording will be possible when discs recorded THE RECORDED SET using the XDS PD100

1 - Sony

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents